User Bulletin. - AVEVA Product Support

User Bulletin. - AVEVA Product Support
AVEVA Hull & Outfitting
Release 12.1 (Service Pack 4)
User Bulletin
Disclaimer
1.1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error -free or free from viruses.
1.2 AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or s imilar losses; loss of
anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data or information; any special,
indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages, charges or expenses which may be suffered by th e user,
including any loss suffered by the user resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data created by the AVEVA
software, irrespective of whether such losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or arise in contract, tort (including
negligence) or otherwise.
1.3 AVEVA shall have no liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with the
performance of the AVEVA software where the faulty performance of the AVEVA software results from a user's
modification of the AVEVA software. User's rights to modify the AVEVA software are strictly limited to those set out in the
Customisation Manual.
1.4 AVEVA shall not be liable for any breach or infringement of a third party's intellectual property rights where such
breach results from a user's modification of the AVEVA software or associated documentation.
1.5 AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with the performanc e
of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year in which the user's claim is brought.
1.6 Clauses 1.1 to 1.5 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law.
1.7. In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the so ftware licence under which
the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take precedence.
Copyright
Copyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software, and every part of it
(including source code, object code, any data contained in it, the manual and any other documentation supplied with it)
belongs to, or is validly licensed by, AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries.
All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its s ubsidiaries. The information contained in this document is
commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted without the prior
written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where such permission is g ranted, it expressly requires that this copyright
notice, and the above disclaimer, is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is made.
The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material or electronic form,
without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Subject to the user's rights, as set out in the
customisation manuals to amend PML software files contained in the PDMSUI and PDMSLIB folders and any
configuration files, the user may not reverse engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the software. Neither the whole, nor part
of the software described in this publication may be incorporated into any third -party software, product, machine, or
system without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited, save as permitted by law. Any such unauthorised
action is strictly prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution.
The AVEVA software described in this guide is to be installed and operated str ictly in accordance with the terms and
conditions of the respective software licences, and in accordance with the relevant User Documentation. Unauthorised or
unlicensed use of the software is strictly prohibited.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. AVEVA shall not be
liable for any breach or infringement of a third party's intellectual property rights where such breach results from a user's
modification of the AVEVA software or associated docum entation.
AVEVA Solutions Limited, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom.
Trademark
AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised use of the
AVEVA or Tribon trademarks is strictly forbidden.
AVEVA product/software names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries,
registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide).
rd
3
Party Software
The copyright, trademark rights, or other intellectual property rights in any other product or softw are, its name or logo belongs to its
respective ow ner.
The follow ing 3rd party softw are is included in some of the AVEVA products described in this document:
Teigha™ for .dgn files 2007-2010 by Open Design Alliance. All rights reserved.
Teigha™ for .dw g files 2003-2010 by Open Design Alliance. All rights reserved.
Microsoft® Office Fluent™ user interface. Fluent is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation and the Fluent user interface is
licensed from Microsoft Corporation. The Microsoft Office User Interface is subject to protection under U.S. and international
intellectual property law s and is used by AVEVA Solutions Limited under license from Microsoft.
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Contents
AVEVA Hull & Outfitting
1
Release 12.1 (Service Pack 4)
1
User Bulletin
1
1.
1
Introduction
1.1
About AV EVA Hull and Outfitting 12.1
1.1.1
1
About AVEVA Hull and Out fitting 12.1.SP4
1
1.2
About thi s Bulletin
1
1.3
Software Distribution and Installation *12.1.SP4*
1
1.3.1
Projects in Folders with Embedded Spaces
3
1.3.2
AVEVA Database Cache Service
3
1.4
2.
*12.1.SP3*
AVEV A Hull and Outfi tting 12.1 Test Projects
Upgrading from Previous Releases
4
5
2.1
Moving to 12.1SP4 from Previous Releases *12.1.SP4*
5
2.2
Compatibility
5
*12.1.SP3*
2.2.1
Optional database upgrade
5
2.2.2
Sharing data bet ween 12.1SP 2 and 12.1SP 3
5
2.3
Upgrade Overview
5
2.4
Upgrade Framework
6
2.5
Database Version Control
7
2.6
Part Upgrades Outside the Framework
7
2.7
Database Upgrade – Optional Upgrade *12.1.SP3*
7
2.8
Global and Extracts
8
2.9
The Upgrade Process
9
2.9.1
2.10
Locking the Project
Extract Hierarchies
9
9
2.10.1
Working Extracts
10
2.10.2
Offline Locations
10
2.11
International Characters (Uni code)
10
2.12
Units of Measure
11
2.12.1
Units in Outfitting
11
2.12.2
Units in Hull and Drafting
11
2.13
3.
Schematics Functions
Configuration
12
14
3.1
Operating Environment
14
3.2
PC Hardware Configuration
14
3.3
Microsoft Windows
14
*12.1.SP2*
3.3.1
Microsoft Internet Explorer
14
3.3.2
Microsoft Office & Fonts
15
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
i
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
3.4
Graphics Cards
15
3.5
Environment Variables
15
4.
General System Changes
16
4.1
Acce ss Platform s, Stairs and Ladders (ASL) *12. 1.SP4*
16
4.2
Unicode Character Handling
16
4.3
4.2.1
Restrictions
16
4.2.2
Textual File Handling
16
4.2.3
Filenames and PML
16
4.2.4
Using Forms and Menus
17
4.2.5
Using TTY Mode
17
4.2.6
Graphical Output
17
Units of Measure
17
4.3.1
Supported Dimensions and Units
18
4.3.2
Other UNITS Commands
20
4.3.3
Upgrading to use new Units
21
4.3.4
Units set up for Hull and Drafting
22
4.4
Enhanced Password Protection
23
4.5
Status Control
24
4.6
Report Generation
24
4.7
5.
4.6.1
New Reporting Add-in
24
4.6.2
‗Classic‘ Reporting
25
GML Performance
25
Database changes
5.1
26
Project Breakdown Structure (P BS) *12.1.SP4*
26
5.1.1
Overview
26
5.1.2
Setting up the PBS definition in Lexicon
26
5.2
Use the BACKREf Attribute
*12.1.SP3*
27
5.3
Cleanup and the CLEANUp Command *12.1.SP3*
28
5.4
New Database types
29
5.4.1
Engineering Database
29
5.4.2
Design Reference Databas e
29
5.5
Acce ss to Databa ses
30
5.6
Increase in Number of Database s
30
5.6.1
Admin GUI
30
5.7
Duplicate Names
31
5.8
Flexibility of Data Organisation
31
5.8.1
Database Views
31
5.8.2
Distributed Attributes
31
5.8.3
Handling of Duplicated Names of UDAs and UDE Ts
32
5.8.4
Top-Level Element Creation in Specific Database
32
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
ii
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
5.9
Dynamic Groups
32
5.10
Database Performance
33
5.10.1
Specifying the Buffer Size
33
5.10.2
Dabacon Index Tables
34
5.11
Units of Measure
34
5.12
Unicode Storage of Name and Text Attribute s
34
5.13
DRAFT Line-style World Hierarchy
34
5.14
Extract Control – Include Flush Capability
34
6.
User Interface
36
6.1
Entry to System
36
6.2
Save and Restore Views
36
6.3
Grid Control
37
6.4
Toolbar Popup Menu
37
6.5
PML Collections
37
6.6
Attribute Di splay, Editing and Validation
37
6.7
Auto-naming Utility Enhancement
38
6.8
Additional Debug Information about PML Applications
39
6.9
7.
6.8.1
Help About
39
6.8.2
PML Alert
39
Infragistics Toolki t
40
Administration
41
7.1
GUI Improvements
41
7.2
Lexicon
41
7.3
7.2.1
New Lexicon Graphical View
41
7.2.2
UDA Lists of Values
42
7.2.3
Database Views
42
7.2.4
General
43
Admin GUI Change s for Global
44
7.3.1
Global Support for Linked Documents
44
7.3.2
Database Distribution Form
46
7.3.3
Creation of an E vent without Times
48
7.3.4
Remote File Details in Admin
48
7.3.5
Enhanced Us er Interfac e for Sessions
49
7.4
Engineering (ENGI) Database
49
7.5
TAGS Module Definition
49
8.
Introduction to New Functionality
50
9.
AVEVA General Functionality
51
9.1
AVEV A Databa se Cache Service *12.1.SP3*
9.1.1
9.2
Making Use of the Cache
Expanded Selvol Graph
*12.1.SP3*
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
51
51
52
iii
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
9.3
Clean Up Orphan STALNK Elements *12.1.SP2*
53
9.4
Performance Improvements in AV EV A Marine
54
9.5
SetStart Method of NameSeq Object
55
9.6
BLOCK Creation in Specific Database
56
9.7
Stable Identification of Un-named Hull Elements
57
9.8
New Storage Model for Hull Objects
58
9.9
Hull Specific Design Explorer Configuration
59
9.10
Limited Unicode Support in Hull Design
60
9.11
Improved Local Language – Unicode Encoding
61
9.12
Units of Measure – Extended Range of Conversions
62
9.13
Extract Claims in Hull Applications
63
9.14
Documentation
64
AVEVA Initial Design
65
10.
10.1
Storing of CALC Output in DABACON *12.1.SP4*
65
10.2
Project Data Supports Roaming Profiles *12.1.SP4*
66
10.3
Sorting points in PACE
67
10.4
Oil outflow
*12.1.SP3*
68
10.5
Lines - New Grid in PACE
69
10.6
Lines - Individual Tuft Size in Views in PACE
71
10.7
Lines - Macro Editor in PACE
72
10.8
Lines - Cline s Project Limits (PMB and Mid Ships)
73
10.9
Lines - Curve Highlighting
74
*12.1.SP3*
10.10
Lines - Locking and Fitting to a Plane
75
10.11
Lines - Curve Interrogation
76
10.12
Lines – Angle Curve Creation/Editing
77
10.13
Lines - User Local View
79
10.14
Corrugated RS Os
81
10.15
Compartment Export/Import in XML Format
82
10.16
Release of Weights to Calc
83
10.17
Axis Setting Reflected in Dialogs
84
10.18
Sea Water Density
85
10.19
Multiple Lightship Weights
86
10.20
Oil Outflow
87
10.21
Inclining Experiment
88
10.22
Probabilistic Stability to SOLAS 2009 Rule s
89
10.23
Damage Case Summary Table
90
10.24
MODU Wind Heeling Moments
91
10.25
Connected Compartments
92
10.26
ABS Towing Criteria
93
11.
AVEVA Hull General Functionality
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
94
iv
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
11.1
New Representation of Shell Plates *12.1.SP4*
94
11.2
Folders in the HCMWLD
95
11.3
Save Work in Inithull
11.4
Ship Coordinate References to RS Os *12. 1.SP3*
97
11.5
Ppoints for HPREND and CP REND Elements *12.1.SP3*
98
11.6
Ppoints for HPLATE Elements *12.1.SP3*
99
11.7
Statement Wizard Enhancements *12.1.SP2*
100
11.8
Attribute MODREF
101
11.9
Reuse of Seam and Profile Numbers
*12.1.SP4*
*12.1.SP4*
96
*12.1.SP2*
102
11.10
Multiple Negatives when Designing User Defined End Cut
103
11.11
Split of Hull Note s and Posno
104
11.12
Enhanced Selection Filtering
105
11.13
Blocks and Panels from Tree View
106
11.14
Set-up of a Project to Use Free Naming
107
11.15
Hole Annotation Enhancement
108
11.16
Hull Qualities in CATA
109
11.17
Shellx with Plate Scantlings, Position Numbers and Material Quality
110
11.18
New Dialog when Setting Functional Descriptions
112
11.19
Increased Number of Surface s
114
12.
AVEVA Surface Manager
12.1
Surface Analysi s
115
*12.1.SP3*
116
12.1.1
Surface analysis
116
12.1.2
Tank Capacities
117
12.2
Hydrostatics Data Calculated for Surface *12.1.SP3*
120
12.3
Difference Between two Surfaces *12.1.SP2*
121
12.4
Surface Manager Replacing Surface Server
123
12.5
Surface Manager – Compare Surfaces
124
13.
AVEVA Space Management
13.1
Surface Analysi s
125
*12.1.SP3*
13.1.1
Surface analysis
126
13.1.2
Tank Capacities
127
13.2
Space Definition Data and Re-Create of Space Arrangements
13.3
Space Interrogation API
14.
126
*12.1.SP3*
AVEVA Hull Structural Design
*12.1.SP3*130
131
132
14.1
New Block Divide User Interface and Process *12.1.SP4*
132
14.2
Finite Element Modeller – Knuckled Panels *12.1.SP4*
134
14.3
FEM – Folder in FEMWLD
135
14.4
RSO CSV format update
14.5
Spaces in Structural Design Export *12.1.SP3*
137
14.6
Patran Interface
138
*12.1.SP4*
*12.1.SP3*
*12.1.SP2*
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
136
v
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
14.7
New Options when Creating Envelopes
139
14.8
RSO Change Envelope
140
14.9
RSO Recreate
141
14.10
RSO Rename
142
14.11
Naming of Multiply Copied RSOs
143
14.12
Pick Option Added in RSO KeyIn
144
14.13
Pick Option Added in RSO Edit
145
14.14
Right Click Menu on RSO
146
14.15
Stable Multi Face RSO Reference
147
14.16
Seam from RSO
148
14.17
COR Keyword when Referencing RSOs and Surface s
149
14.18
Delete Surface Object from Design Database
150
14.19
Block, Recreate All
151
14.20
Right Click Menu on Blocks
152
14.21
Jumbo Panels Removed
153
14.22
FEM World for Idealised and FE Models
154
14.23
FEM Additions
156
14.24
FEM Improvements
157
15.
AVEVA Hull Detailed Design
158
15.1
Production Support for Frameworks *12. 1.SP4*
158
15.2
Drag and Drop from Manu Explorer *12.1.SP4*
159
15.3
Manufacturing Objects Pre sented in 3D Canva s *12.1.SP4*
160
15.4
Show Scheme Update
161
15.5
Mixed FRP and Steel Project
15.6
Bevel Side Definition on Stiffeners *12.1.SP4*
163
15.7
Hole in Clips
164
15.8
Hull Marks – User Interaction and Functionality *12.1.SP4*
165
15.9
Parts Collection by Manufacturing Package *12.1.SP4*
168
*12.1.SP4*
*12.1.SP4*
*12.1.SP4*
162
15.10
Automatic Generation of Parts using Right-Click *12.1.SP4*
169
15.11
Frame Selection in Bending Template *12.1.SP4*
170
15.12
Cross-bending Template Additions *12.1.SP4*
171
15.13
New Options for Templates Marking *12.1.SP4*
172
15.14
Enhanced Part Table in Nesting Sketch *12.1.SP4*
173
15.15
Improved Burning Sketch
174
15.16
Direction Texts During Ne sting
15.17
Resorting Manufacturing Data *12.1.SP4*
176
15.18
Default Bracket Profile Position Number *12.1.SP4*
177
15.19
Extended Curve Flange
178
15.20
Automatic Posi tion Numbering for Shell Stiffener *12.1.SP4*
15.21
Shell Plate Dialog – Inside and Outside for Material Thickness *12.1.SP4* 180
*12.1.SP4*
*12.1.SP4*
*12.1.SP4*
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
175
179
vi
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.22
Comment Statements Available via Statement Wizard *12.1.SP4*
181
15.23
Split Shell Stiffeners with RSO *12.1.SP4*
182
15.24
Turn Off Profile Generic Data *12.1.SP4*
183
15.25
Turn Off Profile Bending Sketch *12.1.SP4*
184
15.26
Attachment Angle s on Curved Plates *12.1.SP4*
185
15.28
Interactive Jig Pillar Enhancements *12.1.SP3*
187
15.29
Hull Mark Update
188
15.30
Reporting Tool Available in Hull Design *12.1.SP3*
189
15.31
Minimal Bending Templates
191
15.32
Cutouts in Cross Bending Templates *12.1.SP3*
192
15.33
Bent Plates in PPM
193
15.34
Labelled Texts and Symbols *12.1.SP3*
194
15.35
Enhanced Dimensioning in Profile Sketches *12. 1.SP3*
195
15.36
New GSD Corner Di stance Keywords *12.1.SP3*
196
15.37
Enhanced Control of Profile Sketches *12. 1.SP3*
197
15.38
Deprecated Environment Variable *12.1.SP2*
198
15.39
Holes in Brackets
199
15.40
Labelled Texts
15.41
Parts Menu Di splay
15.42
Bevel Chamfer Option
203
15.43
Bevel for Shell Stiffener Ends
204
15.44
Posi tion of Upper and Lower Cutting Curve
205
15.45
Posi tion Control of Shell Profile and Plane Panel Stiffener
206
15.46
Compensation for Shell Plate Thickness
208
15.47
Top View of Stiffener Improved
209
15.48
Weld Built Profiles before Bending
210
15.49
Weight Unit in Profile Sketches
211
15.50
Generic File Viewer
212
15.51
Looking Field Changed for Hull Mark Projection
214
15.52
Control of Marking Gap at Holes
215
15.53
GSD Marking of Built Profiles
216
15.54
Mark Reference Plane on Both Sides of Profiles
217
15.55
Nest Profile s without Re st
218
15.56
New Nesting Default Parameters
219
15.57
Nesting Plug-In Interface
223
15.58
Storing Change s after Running Production Programs
224
15.59
New MANU Data Model
225
15.60
Automatic Naming of Production Sketche s
227
15.61
Find Documents Related to Production Parts
228
15.62
Naming of Curved Plates and Stiffeners
229
*12.1.SP3*
*12.1.SP3*
*12.1.SP3*
*12.1.SP2*
*12.1.SP2*
*12.1.SP2*
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
200
201
vii
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.63
Function to Find and Remove Dangling MANU Parts
231
15.64
Enhancement in Dialogue for Automatic Position Number Definition.
232
15.65
Reflection in Hull Element Names and Hurefl Attribute
233
15.66
FRP Additions
234
15.67
Tribon 5 Curved Hull Input Data
235
16.
AVEVA Hull Weld Planning
236
16.1
Improved Edit Welds Function *12.1.SP4*
236
16.2
User Defined Rules for Weld Suspension *12. 1.SP3*
237
16.3
Weld Calculation Curved Panels
238
16.4
Weld Calculation Shell Profiles
239
17.
AVEVA Design Reuse
17.1
18.
PML Triggers
240
*12.1.SP4*
241
AVEVA Assembly Planning
242
18.1
Assembly Drawings & Parts Li st *12.1.SP4*
242
18.2
Material side
*12.1.SP3*
243
18.3
Assembly Drawing & Parts Li st *12.1.SP2*
244
18.4
Assembly Reports
246
18.5
Assembly Selection
18.6
Assembly Planning Context Menu *12.1.SP2*
248
18.7
Curved Hull Panel as Ba se Panel for Assembly Orientation
249
18.8
Clean Up Assembly References
250
18.9
New Drawing Type for Assembly ADP Drawings
251
*12.1.SP2*
*12.1.SP2*
247
18.10
Multiple Select
253
18.11
Change Projection of an Assembly ADP Drawing View
254
18.12
POS attribute available for ASMBLY Elements
255
19.
AVEVA Marine Drafting
256
19.1
Staggered Views
*12.1.SP4*
19.2
Folders in HCMWLD
19.3
Colour Coding of Curved Plates *12.1.SP4*
259
19.4
Presenting Welds in Model and Symbolic Views *12. 1.SP4*
260
19.5
Exce ss Line Type and Colour *12.1.SP4*
261
19.6
Improved Functionality for Editing Evaluation of Dimension Text *12.1.SP4* 263
19.7
Controlling the Prefix for Longitudinal Annotations *12.1.SP4*
265
19.8
Deleting Labels Generated via Autotagging *12.1.SP4*
266
19.9
Dynamic Highlighting when Inserting Parallel Curve *12.1.SP4*
267
*12.1.SP4*
*12.1.SP4*
256
258
19.10
New Style Dialogs
19.11
Render “Fill-styled” Items First *12.1.SP4*
269
19.12
Blanking behind Labels and Dimensionings *12.1.SP4*
271
19.13
Default Initial Point Mode
273
19.14
Labels
*12.1.SP4*
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
*12.1.SP4*
268
275
viii
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.15
Di stribute Drawings Across Several DEPTs *12.1.SP4*
276
19.16
Open Drawing in Read Only Mode *12.1.SP4*
277
19.17
Long Drawing Names
278
19.18
PML Triggers
19.19
New Drawing Types for Automatic Drawing Production (ADP ) *12.1.SP3* 280
19.20
Draw Pipe Spools
19.21
Automatic Drawing Production (ADP) *12.1.SP3*
283
19.22
Sample C# Project
284
19.23
Handle Subpictures a s SDB Files *12.1.SP3*
285
19.24
Di stance to RS O Dimension
286
19.25
Radius/ Diameter Dimensioning for Outfitting Model s *12.1.SP3*
287
19.26
Remove Obsolete .SDB Files *12.1.SP3*
288
19.27
Layers for Outfitting Model s
289
19.28
List Drawings
19.29
Set Drawing Type during DXF/DWG Import *12.1.SP3*
291
19.30
Draw Outfitting Model s
293
19.31
Autotagging *12.1.SP3*
294
19.32
Databank for Drawing Forms *12.1.SP3*
295
19.33
KEEP _S ESSION_FILES
296
19.34
SZ021
19.35
The Restrict Function
19.36
Delete System Components
19.37
Multi-line Dimension Texts *12.1.SP2*
301
19.38
Marine Drafting – Open Sheet *12.1.SP2*
303
19.39
Marine System Font
304
19.40
Insert Text Shortcut Keys *12.1.SP2*
305
19.41
Symbolic View Menu
306
19.42
Default Action at Start-up
308
19.43
New Module Name
309
19.44
Drawing Export Formats
310
19.45
Navigate To
311
19.46
General Note
312
19.47
Choose Projection
313
19.48
Fill Styles
314
19.49
Symbol Files
316
19.50
Dynamic Highlighting
317
19.51
Arc Quarter Points
318
19.52
New Definition of Line Segment, Direction + Length
319
19.53
Simple Arithmetic in 2D Offset Input
320
19.54
Automatic Chaining of New Contours to Exi sting Ones
321
*12.1.SP4*
*12.1.SP4*
279
*12.1.SP3*
*12.1.SP3*
*12.1.SP3*
*12.1.SP3*
*12.1.SP3*
282
290
*12.1.SP3*
*12.1.SP2*
*12.1.SP2*
297
*12.1.SP2*
*12.1.SP2*
*12.1.SP2*
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
298
300
ix
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.55
Dimensioning UI Improvements
322
19.56
Improved Dragging Technique
323
19.57
Plane Reference Text in Distance -To-Plane Dimensioning
324
19.58
Delete Last Enti ty
325
19.59
Persi sting Contours to PADD
326
19.60
Text Font Attribute s
327
19.61
Dimming & Checking of Menu Item s
328
19.62
Unicode
329
19.63
Restriction of Symbolic Views
330
19.64
Inspect Drawing
332
19.65
Draw Assemblies
333
19.66
RSO Default Colours
335
19.67
RSO Enhancements in Insert Model
336
19.68
Curved Panel Holes in Input Model
337
19.69
Base Line Position Ruler
338
19.70
Overlays
339
19.71
Protection of the Drawing Form View
340
19.72
Open Drawing
341
19.73
Drag and Drop to the 2D Canva s.
342
19.74
Marine .NET API (hull views)
343
19.75
Removing Default Variables
345
19.76
TBSystemFonts
347
19.77
Persi sting of part level modifications in Linear Dimensions
349
20.
AVEVA Outfitting Draft
352
20.1
Extended Hatch Patterns
352
20.2
Line Styles
352
20.3
Line Widths
352
20.4
System Defined Line Styles
352
20.5
User Defined Line Styles
353
20.6
Minimum Line Width
353
20.7
Plotting User Interface
353
20.7.1
DRAFT ―Plotting Options‖ Form
353
20.7.2
DXF – General Options
354
20.8
Enhanced Angular Dimensions
354
20.9
Enhanced P-line Picking
355
20.10
Improved Performance of Extrusions
355
20.11
Drawing Gridlines
355
20.12
Intelligent Text Handling Enhancement
355
20.13
Export to CAD Formats
356
20.14
Support for Unicode Text
356
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
x
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
20.15
Improved Drawing Feature Export
356
20.16
Configurable DXF & DWG Export
357
20.17
Configurable DGN Export
357
20.18
AVEV A I sometric ADP
357
21.
AVEVA Marine Migration
21.1
22.
359
Preparing Databanks for Import into Hull and Outfitting 12.1
AVEVA Schematic 3D Integrator
359
360
22.1
Compare/Update Scope by Destination *12.1.SP4*
361
22.2
Simplified Selection of Configurations *12.1.SP4*
363
22.3
Compare/Update Additional Filter Fields *12.1.SP3*
367
22.4
Show in Diagram Option in Compare/Update *12.1.SP3*
369
22.5
Integrator Capability to Accept Difference s *12.1.SP3*
370
22.6
Design and Schematic Explorers Enhancements *12.1.SP3*
375
22.7
New Integrator Object Method
376
22.8
Electrical Connections
376
22.9
Selector Rule s
376
22.10
Improved Links Admini stration
376
22.11
Configuration Rules Extensions
376
22.12
Example Macro
378
23.
AVEVA Diagrams
379
23.1
Ribbon User Interface in Diagrams *12.1.SP4*
379
23.2
View Datasheets in Diagrams *12. 1.SP4*
380
23.3
Design Reuse for AV EVA Diagrams *12.1.SP4*
381
23.4
Secondary Shapes for Pipe and Instrument Lines *12.1.SP4*
382
23.5
Customi sable Drawing Grid in Diagrams *12.1.SP4*
383
23.6
Diagrams Rule s (Configurable Consi stency Check) *12.1.SP3*
384
23.7
Export of Diagrams Drawings in DGN Format *12.1.SP3*
385
23.8
Batch Export of DWG and DGN Format Files *12.1.SP3*
386
23.9
Customization API for Diagrams *12.1.SP3*
387
23.10
Explorer Enhancements
*12.1.SP3*
23.11
Instrument Loop Creation Dialog *12.1.SP3*
389
23.12
Size of Imported Background Shape *12.1.SP3*
391
23.13
Flipping Labels
392
23.14
Improved Copy/pa ste Capability *12.1.SP2*
393
23.15
Diagram Change Highlighting
394
23.16
Connection between Instrument and Proce ss Item s
396
23.17
Automatic Upgrade of Options Settings Files
397
23.18
Admin Settings vs. User Settings
398
23.19
Handling of Units in Annotations
399
23.20
Publish Diagrams Data to AV EVA NET
401
*12.1.SP2*
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
388
xi
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
23.21
Automatic Line Breaks Depending on Line Priority.
402
23.22
Improved Shape Annotation in Schematic Model Viewer
403
23.23
Automatic Line Breaks Depending on Line Priority.
404
23.24
Improved Shape Annotation in Schematic Model Viewer
406
23.25
Split-Merge for SCBRAN
408
23.26
Setting SCVALV GTYP to INST rather than VALV
410
23.27
Changes to Upgrade Drawing Functionality.
415
23.28
Linked Files Update
417
23.29
Possibility to Determine Connector Re-route Style
418
23.30
Default Value of the Stencil in Batch Job
420
23.31
Auto Hide Option for Shape Text for Short Connectors
422
23.32
Miscellaneous Minor Improvements
424
24.
AVEVA Engineering
425
24.1
Project Breakdown Structure (P BS) *12.1.SP4*
425
24.2
DateTime Data Type
427
24.3
Icons for Linked Item s and Documents *12.1.SP4*
429
24.4
Sublists for Reference Attribute s in Engineering *12.1.SP4*
430
24.5
Datasheets in AV EVA Engineering *12.1.SP4*
432
24.6
Datasheets Option in “Publish to AVEV A Net” *12.1.SP4*
434
24.7
Design Reuse for AV EVA Engineering *12.1.SP4*
436
24.8
Tags
437
24.8.1
Admin Tab
438
24.8.2
Tag Deletion
439
24.9
Schematic Model Manager
440
24.9.1
Use of units
440
24.9.2
Units upgrade
440
24.9.3
Change Highlighting in Diagram
440
24.10
Tag Compare / Update
24.10.1
25.
*12.1.SP4*
Enhanced Compare/Update
441
*12.1.SP2*
AVEVA Outfitting Module
25.1
Model Editor
441
442
442
25.1.1
Offset From Feature… option
442
25.1.2
Structural primitives
442
25.2
Move, Drag Move and Plane Move Commands
25.2.1
25.3
Summary of Move, Drag Move and Plane Move options
Change highlighting and reversion
443
443
444
25.3.1
Enhanced Us er Interfac e for Sessions
444
25.3.2
Revert Elements Command
445
25.3.3
Change Highlighting via Extract Data Control
446
25.3.4
Change Highlighting via Model Changes Add -in
447
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
xii
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
25.4
Enhanced attribute export to Review
452
25.5
Weight and Centre of Gravity (CofG) form
452
25.6
DRAFT Explorer
452
25.7
AVEV A Mechanical Equipment Interface
453
26.
25.7.1
Tesselation Cache
*12.1.SP4*
454
25.7.2
Import Subequipments
25.7.3
Import of Coordinat e System Entities from STEP Files *12.1.SP3*
*12.1.SP4*
455
AVEVA Outfitting Design Applications
456
457
26.1
CSV Import Function *12. 1.SP3*
457
26.2
Equipment
458
26.2.1
Equipment Interface – Modification
458
26.2.2
Create Equipment Form
458
26.3
Piping
458
26.3.1
Non-standard Pipe Connections
26.3.2
New Pipe Fabrication Capabilities
26.3.3
New Options in Spooler Create Menu
26.3.4
New Dependent Spool Drawings Frame *12.1.SP3*
462
26.3.5
Sloping piping
462
26.3.6
Direct setting of Insulation Thickness & Material
463
26.3.7
Bending Machine NC Output
463
26.3.8
Improved production checks
465
26.3.9
Material search for Pipe Bending Machine setup
465
26.4
*12.1.SP4*
*12.1.SP4*
*12.1.SP3*
Structure s
458
459
461
465
26.4.1
New Bent Panel
*12.1.SP4*
465
26.4.2
Steelwork Connectivity Upgrade
466
26.5
Hole Management Enhancements
466
26.5.1
Hole Management Enhancements
26.5.2
Create Holes
467
26.5.3
Merge Holes
467
26.5.4
Modify (and Delete) Holes
468
26.5.5
Utilities
468
26.5.6
Configuration of Hole Management Data
470
26.5.7
Hole Association Manager
470
Penetration with Piping Component
472
26.6
26.6.1
Creation of Penetration
*12.1.SP4*
467
473
26.7
Standard Model Library
474
26.8
Clash Utility enhancements
475
26.8.1
26.9
Reports
480
Cable Design
26.9.1
Copy Cable
481
*12.1.SP2*
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
481
xiii
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
26.9.2
26.10
Cable Tray Volume Converter
*12.1.SP2*
Multi-Di scipline Supports
481
482
26.10.1
Cable Tray Supports
482
26.10.2
Automatic generation of pads
482
26.10.3
Updating client project defaults
482
26.11
Outfi tting Piping Isometrics
484
26.11.1
New Output File Formats, Including PDF
484
26.11.2
TrueTy pe Fonts
484
26.11.3
Large Coordinates
484
26.11.4
Additional Coordinat e Formats
485
26.11.5
Drawing Pipe Spool
485
26.11.6
‗Nort h‘ Arrow Text
486
26.11.7
Pipe Penetration Seal Symbol
486
26.11.8
Setting Units in Options files
486
26.12
Future Considerations
26.12.1
27.
User Bulletin
488
Access platforms, Stairs and Ladders (ASL)
AVEVA Global
488
489
27.1
Global Server Version
489
27.2
Layout of Create/Modify Database Form *12.1.SP3*
490
27.3
Global WCF
491
27.4
Global Claim Commands
491
27.5
Global WCF Service Name
491
27.6
ADUUID Attribute Length
492
28.
AVEVA Catalogue & Specifications
493
28.1
Model Settings
493
28.2
Parameterised Detail Text
493
28.3
Structural Catalogue
493
29.
28.3.1
Copy Button for Structural Catalogue
493
28.3.2
Creation of Structural Specs
494
28.3.3
Raw Plates in CA TA
494
28.3.4
Unknown Ref on NARE F reports an error
*12.1.SP2*
Known Issues
29.1
494
496
Outstanding Faults and Issue s
496
29.1.1
General Issues
496
29.1.2
The Impact of the PML Form Layout Changes *12.1.SP3*
496
29.1.3
AVEVA Global
496
29.1.4
New Reporting Add-in
497
29.2
Corrections and Minor Enhancements
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
*12.1.SP2*
500
xiv
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Revision History
Date
Description
September 2011
Initial release of 12.1
28/9/2011
Updated
29/9/2011
Added information about ASL, moved Piping Isometrics to Outfitting
Design.
04/10/2011
Added section 1.3.1 Projects in Folders with Embedded Spaces. Added
section 29.1.3 New Reporting Add-in.
05/10/2011
Added section 29.1.3 AVEVA Global.
18/10/2011
Added reference to Upgrade documentation in chapter 2, release note 9.1
ha been updated with a last bullet point.
January 2012
Updated for 12.1.SP2 service pack.
October 2012
Updated for 12.1.SP3 service pack.
April 2013
Updated for 12.1.SP4 service pack.
June 2013
Updated for 12.1.SP4 service pack.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
xv
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
User Bulletin
xvi
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
1. Introduction
This bulletin describes the new and enhanced functionality available in AVEVA Hull and Outfitting
12.1 as compared to AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12.0. It gives an overview of the major changes,
which are described in full in new and revised User Documentation. Some known issues are also
described in this bulletin.
1.1 About AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12.1
AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12.1 is a major update from AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12.0; many of the
associated products have also been enhanced.
1.1.1 About AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12.1.SP4
AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12.1.SP4 is a full release that supersedes AVEVA Hull and Outfitting
12.1.SP3 and any subsequent partial fix releases.
It comprises a significant number of fault corrections, including those previously released in the fix
releases of service pack 12.1.SP3 (and ongoing fix releases of Hull and Outfitting 12.0) together with
enhancements. It addresses a number of issues found by early adopters of the 12.1. SP3 release,
together with those found during AVEVA’s extensive test programme.
The user documentation has been updated to suit; each manual now has a revision sheet, which
gives a brief history of changes to the manual.
1.2 About this Bulletin
This manual gives an overview of changes since the previous major release: Hull and Outfitting 12.0.
It is aimed primarily at users upgrading from that release; those upgrading from earlier releases
should also read the Hull and Outfitting 12.0 User Bulletin, preferably the edition issued with Service
Pack 6.
This bulletin also covers many of the associated products supplied on the same DVD-R. These
products fall into 3 families – Engineer, Design and Manage – and these groupings within the Marine
portfolio are reflected in this document. Those aspects that are common between most of the
products are generally covered in the first part of the document.
Significant changes to this document introduced at service pack 4 are indicated thus: *12.1.SP4*.
1.3 Software Distribution and Installation
*12.1.SP4*
AVEVA Hull & Outfitting 12.1.SP4 is supplied on a DVD-R, which self-installs using standard
Microsoft installation procedures. The full software suite is usually loaded onto individual PCs running
Windows, with the license server and file loaded onto a networked Windows server.
Please note that this release requires AVEVA Licensing System (ALS) and an appropriate license; it
will not work with FlexMan. Older versions of Hull and Outfitting will also work with ALS. ALS is
supported in virtual environments and facilitates support on Citrix.
Please note that AVEVA Licensing is not included on the product DVD but should be downloaded
from the AVEVA web-site. For further details of AVEVA Licensing releases, please see:
http://support.aveva.com/services/products/alic/index.asp
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
1
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
The installers use standard Microsoft Installer (MSI) technology, which facilitates silent installations
through standard MSI means. They are usually triggered by use of a setup.exe file.
There are fewer separate installers, each corresponding to an AVEVA ‗release‘, on the DVD. The Hull
& Outfitting/Marine installer now includes options to install many of the associated products, although,
for various reasons, some products still use a separate installer.
Using separate installers means that a selection of products can easily be installed together. This
includes the AVEVA Global client option, which enables the use of Hull and Outfitting or other Marine
products with Global. However, there is a separate installer for Global server, which is us ually
installed on a separate machine, such as a server, which does not necessarily have Hull and
Outfitting installed.
There are options to install batch files and shortcuts on the desktop and/or in the start menu for direct
entry to popular modules. In addition, the pml index can be automatically configured. Please note that
there is no ‗thin client‘ installation options as this is no longer supported.
Existing installations should be changed, repaired or removed using Add or Remove Programs from
the Control Panel. This process will prompt for the original DVD if required. This ensures that a
consistent product set, as tested by AVEVA, will be deployed.
Fix releases (patches) will use a standard updating process, which also checks, and if necessary
‗heals‘, the existing installation. There is therefore no prompt for location, as the system already has
this information. Fix releases may also be removed using Add or Remove Programs. Fix releases are
applied to all products installed together, not to the individual products. The use of the latest fix
release is recommended: this includes any previous fixes to products installed together.
Please note: During the installation it is fully possible to change the path in which the Marine product
is installed from its suggested default. However, it is required that the installation path does not
include folders with spaces in the names.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
2
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
For full details of the installation options and procedure, and the hardware and software requirements,
please refer to the Marine Software Installation Guide and Minimum System Requirements Marine.
1.3.1 Projects in Folders with Embedded Spaces
AVEVA Hull & Outfitting 12.1 will not fully support projects with spaces in their pathnames. Work is in
hand to remove these limitations but no definite release date is yet set.
1.3.2 AVEVA Database Cache Service
*12.1.SP3*
For installation of AVEVA Database Cache Service and the activation of Microsoft Message Queuing
(MSMQ) please see the Marine Software Installation Guide provided on the DVD. There is also a
short description in this bulletin in chapter AVEVA General Functionality.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
3
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
1.4 AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12.1 Test Projects
The table below shows details about the sample project supplied, and where to find the test data.
Project
MDB
Description
MAR
ALL_NO_MDS
MDB for Project Setup with ALL databases except MDS
ALL_WITH_MDS
MDB for Project Setup with ALL databases including MDS
ASSYPLANNING
For Assembly Planning Hull and Outfit Users
CABLEAFT
For Outfit Aft Cable User
CABLETRAYAFT
For Outfit Aft Cabletray User
CURVEDHULL
For Curved Hull User
DBPROMPT
For creating required db elements from DB Prompt
EQUIPAFT
For Outfit Aft Equipment User
HADMIN
For Hull Admin User
HULLNESTING
For Hull Nesting User
HVACAFT
For Outfit Aft HVAC User
INITDES
For Initial Design User
LAYOUTAFT
For Outfit Aft Layout User
MDSAFT
For Outfit Aft MDS User
OUTSTEELAFT
For Aft Outfit Steel User
PIPEAFT
For Outfit Aft Piping User
PLANARHULL
For Planar Hull User
PROJADMIN
For Project Admin User
SCHEMATICS
For Schematics User
STRUCDESIGN
For Structural Design User
WELDPLANNING
For Weld Planning User
MAS (Catalogue)
—
The MDB‘s can be accessed by the system (FREE) user (SYSTEM/XXXXXX), each has their own
'dedicated' user as well. There will be a full Project Description PDF file with each project which
contains the details outlined in the table above, plus the Teams and Users (including passwords)
available in the project. This can be found for the Marine (MAR) project at the projects installation
location top level, (MARProjectDescription.pdf and MASProjectDescription.pdf).
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
4
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
2. Upgrading from Previous Releases
Please note that the full Upgrade documentation is available from the User Documentation index
page Read Me First / Upgrade 12.0 to 12.1.
2.1 Moving to 12.1SP4 from Previous Releases *12.1.SP4*
Mixing 12.1SP4 with prior software versions on the same databases is not appropriate; such usage
can cause database inconsistencies. It is therefore strongly recommended, though not mandatory, to
upgrade the project to 12.1SP4 level, by running the optional upgrade provided with the 12.1SP4
installation. By applying this upgrade the databases are protected from being updated by any version
prior to 12.1.SP4.
The upgrade level denoted 12010401 is an optional upgrade provided by release of 12.1 SP4 and
contains one upgrade item only:
Item: 93792, General database changes.
2.2 Compatibility
*12.1.SP3*
Databases created and updated in Marine 12.1SP2 or PDMS 12.1SP2 can be used as they are in
Marine 12.1SP3 without any need to upgrade.
2.2.1 Optional database upgrade
Some of the new functionality in Marine 12.1SP3 requires an upgrade, though. This is an Optional
Upgrade, which is applied by the system administrator when all users in the project are running
12.1SP3.
For More Information
See chapter 2.6 Database Upgrade – Optional Upgrade in this bulletin.
NB! When this Optional Upgrade has been applied the project is no longer compatible with 12.1SP2.
2.2.2 Sharing data between 12.1SP2 and 12.1SP3
A project can be shared between users running 12.1SP2 and 12.1SP3. Users working in both product
versions can access and update the same project databases. If 12.1SP2 and 12.1SP3 are to be used
in parallel in the same project certain restrictions apply. Marine 12.1SP3 can co-operate with Marine
12.1SP2 or PDMS 12.1SP2 in the same project under the following circumstances:
All users running 12.1SP2 must use a specific hotfix for 12.1SP2. The hotfix in question will
be announced at a later stage through the proper channels.
The optional upgrade for Marine 12.1SP3 must not be applied on the project.
2.3 Upgrade Overview
A number of the enhancements made at Hull & Outfitting 12.1 require an upgrade to the database.
Each of these individual changes is referred to as a Part Upgrade. In general each of these has been
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
5
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
designed to be ‗optional‘ from a customer perspective, in that the 12.1 software can work with a
database that has not been upgraded and the software will degrade gracefully – that is, the software
will continue to work, although some new functions may not be available.
This means that it is possible for customers to continue to work with Foreign DBs, which may be
shared with 12.0 or earlier projects and which have not been upgraded, included in their projects. An
example would be a Corporate Catalogue DB used for 12.0 and multiple projects.
Databases which have not been upgraded will however be read-only. The following warning will
appear when opening an MDB from a project that has not been upgraded:
This warning (or similar) indicates that the project needs to be upgraded to the latest version in order
to allow write access.
All the Part Upgrades will be run by a new Upgrade Framework, which converts a Hull & Outfitting
12.0 project to 12.1. This is initiated from Admin using the following commands in the Command Pane
(or TTY mode):
lock
dbupgrade project to latest
unlock
This procedure may also be used with Global projects if some additional precauti ons are taken. A
brief summary is given below – further details are given in the 12.0 to 12.1 Upgrade manual.
Earlier projects should first be upgraded to Hull & Outfitting 12.0.
Schematic Model Manager has its own units handling at Hull and Outfitting 12.0. It also has its own
upgrade mechanism, which is separately documented; the software will advise if it is necessary to run
this:
2.4 Upgrade Framework
The Upgrade tool is invoked from Admin; it controls the upgrade process and runs each Part Upgrade
in the appropriate order. Upgrades relevant to Hull & Outfitting that are covered by this process are:
UKEYs (now include database number to avoid duplicates)
Performance of ‗finding‘ database elements (index by type)
Module Definitions – new TAGS module (and renamed Marine Drafting module)
Character handling (Unicode representation for names, text etc.)
HULL FEM Data Model
Compressed HULL Objects
New Index on Hull Object Type
Start Value for Name Sequence
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
6
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Assembly POS Attribute
Line widths in Draft (widths of thin, medium and thick lines now stored in system database)
The upgrade tool puts an upgrade number in the databases, indicating the level to which they have
been upgraded. This makes it easy to detect, on opening, whether a database has or has not been
upgraded. This upgrade number will also be used by the Reconfigure process.
2.5 Database Version Control
The upgrade version number is used to verify that the versions of the database and the software that
accesses them are compatible. During application start-up, databases are checked against the
software; access may be restricted according to the following table:
Pre 12.1
Software Version
Pre 12.1
12.1.1
Future (e.g. 12.2)
R/W
R
R
Database Upgrade Version
12.1.1
Future (e.g. 12.2)
Max Open Mode
X
X
R/W
X
R
R/W
This control ensures that AVEVA software that opens a database is compatible with the contents of
that database and thereby prevents accidental data corruption. It also ensures that data intended for
use with one software version is not modified by a newer, incompatible software version.
X indicates ‗no access‘; however, versions earlier than 12.1 do not make this check, so cannot detect
a database upgraded to 12.1 or later.
2.6 Part Upgrades Outside the Framework
These are independent of other non-framework upgrades; in other words, non-framework upgrades
can be applied in any order. However, it will not be possible to backtrack to pre-upgrade sessions.
2.7 Database Upgrade – Optional Upgrade
*12.1.SP3*
Description
The database upgrade framework is extended with a concept of optional upgrades. The software
requires a database to be upgraded to a certain level to be granted write access to the database. But
beyond that mandatory upgrade level it is now possible to apply further optional upgrade levels to
acquire new enhanced features.
The upgrade level denoted 12010301 is an optional upgrade provided by release of 12.1 SP3 and
contain following upgrade items which are further documented in separate release notes.
2893: Storing of a space arrangement definition. See release note 13.2 Space Definition Data and
Re-Create of Space Arrangements.
2931: Storing of coordinate system entities under a GENPRI element. See release note 25.7.1 Import
of Coordinate System Entities from STEP Files.
38541: Introduce marine drawing type as table attribute. Applicable for PADD databases. See release
note 19.9 List Drawings.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
7
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15251: Marine Drawing Object applied with new Layers and IDs for outfitting models. Applicable for
PADD databases. See release note 19.8 Layers for Outfitting Models.
45823: New Marine Drawing Types. Applicable for PADD databases. See release note 19.1 New
Drawing Types for Automatic Drawing Production (ADP).
The DBUP command is extended with an additional qualifier OPTIONAL to apply an optional upgrade
version. E.g.:
DBUP PROJECT TO LATEST OPTIONAL
The Q UPGRADE LIST is extended to give a short notice for upgrade versions that are optional. E.g.:
Q UPGRADE LIST
Db upgrade: 12010301, Upgrades the database to 12.1.SP3, version 1. Optional upgrade version.
Benefits
The benefit of an optional upgrade is that it is possible to choose whether to upgrade or not. If you
choose not to upgrade the 12.1.SP3 software will continue to operate with previous databases and
share project data with previous software versions.
Compatibility Constraints
As soon as a database is upgraded it is no longer compatible with 12.1.SP2 or earlier versions.
For More Information
See User Guide Administration / Database Upgrade.
Affected Programs
All
2.8 Global and Extracts
Each database must be entirely in either an upgraded or non-upgraded state for Hull & Outfitting to
work correctly. Therefore it is essential that all extracts of any database are processed during an
upgrade.
The whole project, excluding Foreign databases, should be upgraded at once.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
8
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
2.9 The Upgrade Process
The upgrade process will be undertaken by System Administrators responsible for the project at all
locations. When upgrading multiple projects, many System Administrators will need to co-ordinate.
The upgrade process will upgrade one project at a time. Customers will need to give careful
consideration to the order of upgrade for the various projects.
The projects will need to be locked for the duration of the upgrade, with all Users out of the system.
The upgrade process will be:1.
Ensure all users have exited from project
1.
Lock project at all locations (upgrade will check for this (see below)
2.
Disable Automatic update events if required. (Recommended but not essential)
3.
Expunge all users in the system at the local location
4.
Flush data from Working extracts – these will not be considered; in Global projects they
should be deleted
5.
Check project using DICE (Integrity Checker)
6.
[If DICE reveals issues, address them, then re-run DICE]
7.
Administrator may want to unlock project while DICE issues are being addressed, but will
need to exclude all users and Lock project again before final DICE check
8.
[After clean DICE check]
9.
Back-up project at all locations
10. Temporarily relocate all non-Foreign DBs to their master‘s Primary location
11. Check for No Transient Databases
12. Upgrade the project at each location
13. Optionally Merge Sessions
14. Optionally Reconfigure for Unicode
15. DICE check project
16. Relocate extracts back to their original locations
17. Perform non-framework upgrades if applicable
18. Unlock the project
2.9.1 Locking the Project
The project as a whole cannot be locked, only individual locations; however, it is possible to lock all
online locations from the HUB through Global. To do this run the following command from the HUB:
LOCK AT <location>
The HUB can be locked without the need for a daemon command using the command:
LOCK
It is possible to confirm whether locations are locked by evaluating the return result from:
QUERY LOCK AT <location>
2.10 Extract Hierarchies
It should not be necessary to change the extract hierarchy, nor to consolidate data within extract
hierarchies. Therefore the System Administrator should not need to FLUSH, ISSUE, DROP data
between extracts (working extracts are an exception to this – see below). Nor should they need to
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
9
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
delete any extract families to leave only Masters. However all extracts will need to be relocated to a
single location, although this does not need to be the HUB.
2.10.1 Working Extracts
The upgrade process will need to ensure that all data is up to date at the HUB where pre-scan data
checks will need to be made. Working Extracts cannot be propagated as they are specific to a single
location. As a result all data MUST be flushed, and claims released from the Working Extract into its
parent. This is only true for working extracts; all other extracts do not need to be flushed, or have their
claims released, as they will be available at the HUB.
2.10.2 Offline Locations
Global supports Offline locations; therefore we cannot assume that the Hub has a Global connection
to that location. Offline locations do not support distributed Extracts but can support stand-alone
extract families.
It will not be possible to co-ordinate the upgrade from another location if Offline locations are used.
Offline locations are relatively independent, and can be treated as such.
2.11 International Characters (Unicode)
New databases created at Hull & Outfitting 12.1 will by default use the Unicode character set for
textual attributes and names – see section 5.1. However, no upgrade is required for older databases:
they will be handled according to the project character set as defined in Admin (PROJECT CHARSET
or PROJECT MBCHARSET commands). They will also be converted according to this setting if they
are reconfigured so it is important that it is set correctly!
In cases where an extended range of characters is needed, Reconfigure may be used to convert a
‗legacy‘ database to a Unicode encoded database.
In the following example legacy DICT databases (used to hold UDA and UDET names) are
reconfigured to be Unicode encoded, using Admin 12.1.
FROM DB MASTER/DICT
TO FILE /c:\DICT1 /c:\DICT2
RCFCOPY ALL
RECONFIG SESSIONS
FROM FILE /c:\DICT1 /c:\DICT2
TO DB MASTER/DICT
RECONFIG
Doing it this way means that no deletion and recreation (or copy) is required for the DB, and therefore
neither is re-adding to the MDB structures required. Using RECONFIG SESSIONS in the FROM
phase of the reconfigure operation will preserve both the sessions and references.
Summary
Locally Encoded (Legacy) Databases:
can be opened for read access in both Hull & Outfitting 12.1 and earlier versions
can be opened for write access in both Hull & Outfitting 12.1 and non-Unicode versions, but
the range of characters which may be used is restricted to the set defined by the project
settings
require that the project settings are correct so that characters can be interpreted correctly
can be reconfigured to a Unicode encoded database
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
10
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Unicode Encoded Databases:
cannot be opened for read or write access in versions of Hull & Outfitting prior to 12.1
can store the full range of Unicode characters available in Hull & Outfitting 12.1
2.12 Units of Measure
2.12.1 Units in Outfitting
Distance and bore units are handled in much the same way as before and should need no
conversion. Other attributes will now be converted to and stored in appropriate units. Where a
database has stored all quantities of a dimension in the appropriate unit, the new functions can be
used without upgrade.
Attributes other than distances and bores have the UNIT field set for the first time; in previous
versions of Hull & Outfitting, they were until now stored as values with no specified unit, other than by
use and convention - they could change from application to application, and project to project. This
approach is not compatible with automated conversion so the storage units must be defined. For
compatibility, it is possible to set the units to NUMERIC which will disable Units conversion for that
physical dimension. Disabling a specific dimension in this way means that no advantage will be
gained from the introduction of that dimension.
Previous versions of Schematic Model Manager had special units support for Angle, Area, Pressure,
Temperature, Volume and Weight values that could be included in the ISO15926 format import file.
Units UDAs were provided as mandatory UDAs and were attributes on each Diagram element
(SCDIAG). The chosen units for these dimensioned quantities could be set in the Project Options
form in Schematic Model Manager. In 12.1, the new units capabilities mean that the special units
support in Schematic Model Manager is no longer required. Data imported in 12.1 will be stored in the
appropriate units consistent with the data read from the ISO15926 import file. The upgrade process
for projects moving to 12.1 includes a part upgrade for Schematic Model Manager dimensioned data.
Please note that the CATA database elements MSET, MTYP, ATLI, USEC and UDEF are no longer
used; they will be removed from the database in due course.
2.12.2 Units in Hull and Drafting
In AVEVA Marine Hull and Marine Drafting applications the set up for Units differs from the Units
setup in Outfitting.
Presentation format for Units in Hull and Drafting can be set to SI or Imperial. SI units are default. The
format for SI and Imperial respectively can be further controlled by a set of environment variables and
default variables.
For details on the Units usage in Hull and Drafting, please see the following chapters in the AVEVA
Marine User Documentation:
1.
Hull Basic Features and Concepts -> Basic Features -> Imperial Units Syntax Description
2.
Marine Drafting -> Drafting -> User Guide -> Appendices -> Drafting default file k eywords ->
Unit codes
3.
Marine Drafting -> Drafting -> User Guide -> Appendices -> Drafting default file k eywords ->
Unit system
4.
Hull Initial Design -> Lines – User’s Guide -> Technical reference -> Conventions -> Units
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
11
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Unit Controlled Dimensions in Hull and Drafting
The dimensions that can be unit controlled in Hull and Marine Drafting are shown in the table below.
Core units are independent of the Unit settings and are the same for Hull and Outfitting data.
Dimension
Core unit
Coordinate
mm
Linear measure
mm
Area
mm
2
Volume
mm
3
Weight
kg
Density
kg/ mm
Angle
degree
3
Presentation Format for Units in Marine Applications
Within Hull and Marine Drafting specific application functions, values will be presented according to
the Hull/Drafting settings.
Attributes in Hull Initial Design are presented according to Initial Design settings.
Within general functions available in Hull Design or Marine Drafting, e.g. Reporter, Attribute addin or
Query attribute command, values will be presented according to the Outfitting Units system.
Within common marine applications, such as Space Management and Assembly Planning, all
attributes will be presented according to the Outfitting Units system.
Within Outfitting specific functions, presentation of hull attributes will follow the Outfitting Units system.
Input Format for Units in Marine Applications
In Hull and Marine Drafting applications the input format can be SI or Imperial, independent of the
Units settings.
Units in Marine – Upgrade and Migration
No upgrade or unit conversion from AVEVA Marine 12.0 to 12.1 is required for Units in Hull and
Drafting, since core units have not been changed.
The unit settings, including the default settings, for Hull and Marine Drafting are the same in AVEVA
Marine 12.1 as in AVEVA Marine 12.0 (and in Tribon M3).
2.13 Schematics Functions
Projects that are upgraded from Hull and Outfitting 12.0 or earlier need a suitable module definition in
order to use the new Engineering functions in the new Tags product (see above).
The data will need some reconfiguring:
Integrator links world (CYMWRL) has been moved to Reference database
Shape upgrades in Diagrams – automatic when opening a diagram in write mode
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
12
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Systems moved to Reference Design database
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
13
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
3. Configuration
3.1 Operating Environment
Hull & Outfitting 12.1 is supported on Windows XP Service Pack 3 (32-bit) and Windows 7 (both 32and 64-bit versions). Projects are usually installed on a server – both Windows Server 2003 & 2008
R2 are supported.
3.2 PC Hardware Configuration
A minimum of 4 GB of memory is recommended for this release, especially when installed on
Windows 7. Hull & Outfitting 12.0 will operate with less, but system performance will be compromised.
A screen resolution of at least 1280x1024 is recommended, though most users now use either two
such screens or a wide-screen (1920x1200) display. For details, please refer to the Systems
Requirements Manual.
3.3 Microsoft Windows
*12.1.SP2*
Desktop
Hull & Outfitting 12.1 is supported for use on Microsoft Windows XP Professional, Service Pack (SP)
3 or on Windows 7 (Business and Enterprise editions) Service Pack 1, with appropriate patches . It
should be noted that extended support (from Microsoft) for Windows XP ends in April 2014,
after which date AVEVA will no longer support its software running on XP.
A single 32-bit version of the Hull & Outfitting system is available; this is supported on both 32- and
64-bit versions of Windows 7. It is no longer supported on Windows 2000; indeed Microsoft no longer
offers support for Windows 2000 or Windows XP SP2.
Please note that User Account Control (UAC) introduces new security rest rictions at Windows 7). In
particular, this makes it important to ensure that files that need to be written are accessible by users
without Administrator privileges.
3.3.1 Microsoft Internet Explorer
Internet Explorer is required for the on-line help system; version 7 or 8 is recommended as version 9
does not currently work correctly.
Hull & Outfitting 12.1 requires Microsoft‘s .NET Framework 3.5, which is supplied on the DVD and
installed if required. It should be noted that installation of version 3.5 brings with it several of the
earlier versions, on which it depends.
The updated version of .NET used for Hull & Outfitting 12.0.SP6 onwards may prevent .NET add-ins
running if deployed on a network. This will not usually cause an issue as AVEVA recommends a local
installation on each machine, but might cause problems for customers running their own add-ins.
.NET security can cause issues when running Hull & Outfitting across the network where the add-in
assemblies reside on a different machine to the .NET runtime. The default securit y level for the local
intranet is not set to Full Trust, which means that programs may not be able to access resources on
the local machine. To overcome this, the intranet security may be set to Full Trust, though this means
that any .NET assembly may run. Alternatively, Full Trust may be given to a specified group of
strongly named assemblies.
Trust levels may be set using the Microsoft Code Access Security Policy tool caspol. For details,
please see http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cb6t8dtz(v=VS.90).aspx.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
14
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Serialization
Please note that serialized settings (of the user interface configuration) are now saved in the following
location on Windows XP:
C:\Documents and Settings\<username>\Local Settings\Application
Data\Aveva\
and on Windows 7:
C:\users\<username>\Appdata\Local\AVEVA\
3.3.2 Microsoft Office & Fonts
AVEVA Marine 12.1 is supported with Office 2007 and Office 2010. The use of the 32-bit version of
Office, including Visio, is recommended on both 32- and 64-bit Windows as issues have been
encountered with the 64-bit version.
Excel Interoperability
Import of data into a grid control requires an optional component from Microsoft Office. This is not
supplied with Hull & Outfitting but is an installation option for Microsoft Office. Please ensure that
―.NET Programmability Support‖ under Advanced customisation of applications‖ is enabled when
Office is installed.
This will install the Microsoft Microsoft.Office.Interop.Excel.dll. If this assembly is not enabled,
invoking the Excel import facility will not work.
Screen Font for GUI
The Hull & Outfitting user interface (version 11.6 onwards) requires the use of the Arial Unicode MS
font, which is supplied with Microsoft Office (version 2000 onwards) and is usually installed
automatically when using Windows XP or later.
For further information, please refer to http://office.microsoft.com/enus/help/HP052558401033.aspx. If this
font is not installed, some of the text in the user interface may become illegible.
The layout of some GUI forms may also be adversely affected if the screen font size is not set to the
smallest size, which is usually default. This setting is accessed from the Control Panel and is referred
to as ―Normal‖ in Windows XP or ―Smaller‖ (100%) in Windows 7.
3.4 Graphics Cards
Due to the rapidly changing availability of hardware-accelerated OpenGL graphics cards, an up-todate list of supported cards is not included in the documentation released with Hull & Outfitting. The
AVEVA Product Support website (accessible from http://www.aveva.com ) – IT Configuration section,–
contains a list of tested and supported graphics cards.
3.5 Environment Variables
Hull & Outfitting and some of the other products rely on the use of environment variables for various
aspects of configuration, notably the location of folders for project databases and user workspace.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
15
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
4. General System Changes
4.1 Access Platforms, Stairs and Ladders (ASL) *12.1.SP4*
The application for Access platforms, Stairs and Ladders (ASL) as developed at 12.0 and 12.1 has
been removed. It has been replaced at this release with the primitive based capability available at
Vantage Marine 11.6.
4.2 Unicode Character Handling
Earlier versions of Hull & Outfitting handled textual data such as element names, textual attributes
and file names in a manner specific to the various supported character sets used in supported
languages. This applied to most of the input, output and storage. This has now changed; all textual
information in Hull & Outfitting is represented as Unicode.
Unicode is a computing industry standard for the consistent encoding, representation and handling of
text expressed in most of the world's writing systems. Developed in conjunction with the Universal
Character Set standard and published in book form as The Unicode Standard, the latest version of
Unicode consists of a repertoire of more than 109,000 characters covering 93 scripts. For more
details, please see: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unicode.
Unicode can be implemented using different character encodings. The Hull & Outfitting Internal
Format for string data is Unicode UTF-8 format. This can handle all seven character sets supported in
previous versions – and potentially many more.
4.2.1 Restrictions
Hull & Outfitting MS has been tested using the same range of languages as previous releases. No
font files are available for any other language; this means that TrueType fonts must be used on
drawings and that therefore it is not possible to produce plotfile output.
With that restriction, it is anticipated that many other languages will work, though there are aspects of
the Unicode standard that are not yet implemented. Hull & Outfitting currently handles the following
correctly:
Left to Right languages; and therefore not, for example, Arabic and Hebrew
Upper and lower casing of characters, where both cases have the same number of bytes
4.2.2 Textual File Handling
By default all sequential text files read by Hull & Outfitting will be expected to be in UTF-8 format with
a Byte Order Mark (BOM) present to identify them. Similarly by default all sequential text files written
by Hull & Outfitting will be in Unicode UTF-8 format with a BOM present.
A simple command line ‗transcoder‘ is also supplied; this may be used in some applications to convert
files to a different encoding.
4.2.3 Filenames and PML
The Hull & Outfitting command processor supports Unicode characters. All PML string variables
support Unicode values. You can use Unicode characters in PML variable names, PML object form
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
16
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
and gadget names, PML method and function names. It is recommended that PML language files
should either be UTF-8 format with a BOM present or else strictly ASCII (basic Latin) format. AVEVA
application (appware) files are mostly ASCII at present.
Filenames and directory names can also contain foreign Unicode characters, but may cause
problems in other systems so it is recommended to keep to ASCII names. This applies to some of the
systems to which Hull & Outfitting is interfaced, and even to some of the interfaces where the system
makes use of third party software such as output of DXF and DGN. PML Publisher does not currently
fully support Unicode filenames. AVEVA has also encountered problems us ing files with non-ASCII
names in some development tools.
4.2.4 Using Forms and Menus
The default ‗system font‘ used by Forms and Menus (F&M) is Arial Unicode MS which contains a
large number of the world‘s alphabets. Internally F&M uses Unicode, but can only di splay the
characters accessible in its current ‗system font‘. You will be able to copy and paste Unicode
characters from and to textual fields of F&M gadgets. This includes entering characters into the Hull &
Outfitting command window.
4.2.5 Using TTY Mode
You can enter Unicode characters in Teletype (TTY) mode, but the Console Window can only display
the characters which exist in its currently selected font. Console fonts tend to be quite restrictive so
you need to select a suitable one. In the UK you will probably be restricted to ―Lucida Console‖ or
―Consolas‖ which will display European characters but not Asian characters etc.
4.2.6 Graphical Output
In general Hull & Outfitting graphical output (2D and 3D) allows only the use of the TrueType fonts set
up in the Admin module. This will allow you to display Unicode characters which are known to those
fonts. By default you get font 5 = ―Arial Unicode MS‖ which gives a large range of character sets.
Restrictions using Draft and Isodraft 2D Views
For TrueType fonts, the TrueType font selected must have the correct character set(s) present for the
language(s) you want to use. Arial Unicode MS has most, but other TrueType fonts typically have a
subset. In this case, foreign and mixed language strings will work correctly.
You can of course use fonts specific to a given language for Unicode characters in that language
(even if the font name itself is in a foreign character set).
It is recommended that you avoid using Hull & Outfitting (Wigwam) fonts if possible. It is not, in
general, possible to have mixed language strings if you use them. They are more complicated to
setup, and work more like 12.0, so are limited compared with TrueType. The following restrictions,
some of which were documented in previous versions of the Hull & Outfitting Installation Guide, apply:
4.3 Units of Measure
The inclusion of a much wider range of units means that most real attributes now have a default unit
(usually in SI units) for storage and input/output. User can also set a default unit, which must be of an
appropriate type, for input and output. Input via the command line or GUI also allows the user to
specify an alternative unit.
This does mean some unavoidable changes to the command line so user applications using real
attributes will need to be reviewed. There are also minor changes to many of the user interface forms.
The new functions can also be accessed by the .NET Units interface, as detailed in the .NET
Customisation manual.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
17
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Customers who have written or adapted PML applications may need t o check these. They are
explained in more detail in the 12.0 to 12.1 Upgrade manual.
Several of the reference manuals have been updated to reflect these changes, including:
Catalogue and Specifications Reference Manual
Data Access Routine User Guide
Database Management Reference Manual
Design Reference Manual Creating The Model
Design Reference Manual General Commands
Lexicon Command Reference
Software Customisation Guide
Software Customisation Reference Manual
4.3.1 Supported Dimensions and Units
In previous versions of Hull & Outfitting, all dimensioned quantities other than distances or bores were
output in units stored in the database, irrespective of the current units. For example all masses were
assumed to be Kg.
There is a new set of commands to complement and extend the existing units functions. These
commands control the units of supported dimensions, and their dependent quantities (e.g. density and
pressure). For masses, the command UNITS may be followed by KG MASS, GRAM MASS, POUND
MASS, TONNE MASS or TON SHORT/LONG MASS. New DISTANCE options are also provided:
‗FOOT DIST‘ and ‗METRE DIST‘ to output and return values in these common units.
The command which sets the distance units is:
{MM INCH FINCH} DISTANCE
The new commands use the keyword ‗UNITS‘ to define the units to use for the various dimension
types. For example:
UNITS MM DISTANCE
UNITS POUND MASS
The leading UNITS keyword is optional for MM INCH and FINCH DISTANCE but is required for all
new options in the commands listed below. The command and functionality of BORE units remains
unchanged.
Some units are case-sensitive to adhere more closely to SI conventions; strict adherence is not
always possible due to syntax conflicts. This allow a distinction to be made between units such as
s(econds) and S(iemens), hours and Henrys, tonnes and Teslas. This does not apply to Imperial units
(IN or in, FT or ft are all valid) or to some metric units such as MM, which have been supported in
previous releases.
Units that are case sensitive are (m, s, g, t, K, h, Pa, N, V, A, F, Sv, d, J, W, C, S, H, T, W, P, G) – i.e
metre, second, gram, tonne, Kelvin, hour, pascal, Newton, volt, ampere, farad, sievert, day, joule,
watt, coulomb, Siemens, henry, tesla, watt, poise, gforce. SI prefixes are also case sensitive – for
example, m means milli and M mega – except in their full form (e.g. MILLI and MEGA are both
accepted).
The table overleaf shows the new units of measure and the options available, as well as the old ones:
BORE DIST SQDI CUDI. It gives their name (or description) recognised by the system, the assigned
hash-code, the database storage units and the supported standard units for the quantity. For
example, attributes of length have a hash code of DIST, are stored in mm and other standard units
include inch, cm, ft, metre etc.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
18
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
Name of Dimension
User Bulletin
Abs Pres s ure
HashCode
/Word
ABSP
Database
units
pa s ca l
Accel era ti on
Angl e
Angul a r Frequency
Angul a rMomentum
Area
Bore
ACCL
ANGL
ANGF
ANGM
SQDI
BORE
m/s 2
degree
rpm
N.m.s
mm2
mm
Ca pa ci ta nce
Cha rge
Conducta nce
Content
Currency
Current
Dens i ty
Dens i tyMANDB
CAPA
CHAR
COND
PCUD
CURY
CURR
DENS
MAND
fa ra d
coul omb
s i emens
mm-3
USDol l a r
a mpere
kg/m3
kg/mm3
El ectri cConducti vi ty
El ectri cFi el d
EMF
Energy
EnergyDens i ty
Force
Foul i ngFa ctor
Frequency
Ga ugePres s ure
CNDT
EFLD
EMF
ENER
EDEN
FORC
FFAC
FREQ
GAGE
Si /m
V/m2
vol t
ki l oWa tthour
kg/m3
newton
m2.K/W
hertz
pa s ca l
Hea tCa pa ci ty
Hea ti ngVa l ue
Hea tTra ns ferCoeff
Impeda nce
Inducta nce
Inerti a
Ki nema ti cVi s cos i ty
Length
ENTR
HVAL
HTRA
IMPE
INDU
INER
KVIS
DIST
J/m
J/m3
W/m2/K
ohm
henry
kg/m2
m2/s
mi l l i metre
Li nea rDens i ty
Ma gFi el dIntens i ty
Ma gFl uxDens i ty
Ma gneti cFl ux
Ma s s
PDIS
MFIN
MFXD
MGFX
MASS
mm-1
A/m
tes l a
weber
ki l ogra m
Ma s s Fl ow
Momentum
Permea bi l i ty
Permi tti vi ty
Power
Pres s ure
Ra di a ti onDos e
Ra di oa cti vi ty
Res i s ti vi ty
Rota ti ona l Sti ffnes s
SpecHea tCa pa ci ty
Speci fi cEnergy
Speed
Sti ffnes s
MFLO
MOME
PMBT
PMTT
POWE
PRES
RDOS
RADY
REST
STFR
SHCP
SENG
SPEE
STIF
kg/s
N.s
H/m
F/m
ki l oWa tt
pa s ca l
s i evert
bequerel
ohm/m
N.m/ra d
N/K
J/kg
m/s
N/m
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
other specific units
comment
ba r a tm PSI torr mmHg
i nHg
gforce (gra vi ty)
ra di an gra de a rcmin a rcs ec
Pres s ure
ma y
a bs ol ute or ga uge
a cre hecta re
in
be
Ra nge limited to mm and
i nch (a nd Fi nch)
UKPound Euro
Dens i ti es s tored
MANU da ta ba s e
in
Pres s ure
ma y
a bs ol ute or ga uge
be
joul e BTU ca l
pounda l dyne kgF l bF
rpm
ba r a tm PSI torr mmHg
i nHg
m i n ft cm km mi l e ya rd
mi cron thou a ngs trom
gra m tonne pound
l ongTon s hortTon cwt
oz
hp wa tt
ra dd rem gra y
curi e
19
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
Name of Dimension
User Bulletin
Surfa ceDens i ty
Tempera ture
TemperatureGradient
ThermalConducti vi ty
Therma l Res i s ta nce
Ti me
Torque
Uni tMa s s
Vi s cos i tyDyna mi c
Vol ume
HashCode
/Word
PSQD
TEMP
TPDI
TCON
TRES
TIME
TORQ
UMAS
VISC
CUDI
Database
units
mm-2
degCel s i us
degC/mm
W/m/K
K/W
s econd
N.m
kg/mm
s /Pa
mm3
Vol umetri cFl ow
VFLO
m3/s
None
WORD
NONE
WORD
Pa ra meter
UNIPAR
other specific units
comment
degF K degRa nki ne
mi n hr day month week year
l i tre ImpGallon USGallon bbl
Mbbl MMbbl
numerical real a ttri bute
us ed to a ssign parameter
di mens i ons etc.
us ed for pa ra meter
a ttri butes
4.3.2 Other UNITS Commands
Three additional forms of the UNITS command for the Fundamental dimensions (i.e. those settable)
are supported – UNITS DEFAULT, UNITS NUMERIC, UNITS MKS and UNITS FPS and UNITS CGS .
DEFAULT Units
The default unit of a physical dimension is the database storage unit, which is listed in the table
above.
The command UNITS DEFAULT formerly set the DISTANCE default units to mm; it now sets the
units of all the dimensioned attributes to their database storage units. Individual dimensions can be
set to their default selectively using the command:
UNITS DEFAULT dimension
DERIVED Units
The command UNITS DERIVED dimension is valid for compound dimensions such as volume,
density and pressure. It sets the current units for that dimension to be determined by the current units
of its primary dimensions (most often mass and distance).
Volumes, areas, densities, temperature gradients, and numeric densities can all be set to Derived
units. Only volumes can be set to specific units.
NUMERIC Units
All attributes that have the UNIT field set for the first time, were stored in previous versions as values
with no specified unit. The units that were previously attributed to their values were determined by use
and convention and could change from application to application, and project to project. This flexibility
can no longer be supported as ‗storage units‘ must be defined. Database storage units have been set
to those most commonly used, but this will not be universally compatible. The UNITS NUMERIC
command is introduced for compatibility:
UNITS NUM/ERIC dimension
is used to suspend unit conversions on input and output for attributes of the nominated dimension,
that is:
No conversion from the stored value will be made on output
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
20
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
No unit qualifying strings will be appended to output values
Input values with no qualifying unit strings will be stored without conversion in the database
If input values have a unit qualifying string, a conversion factor will be applied.
This is of particular value to users who wish to continue storing and using attribute values as now, and
especially when the values stored are assumed by their system to be in units that are DIFFERENT to
those now being assumed by Hull & Outfitting.
The system also supports UNITS NUMERIC DISTANCE for completeness.
When a fundamental dimension‘s unit is NUMERIC, all derived dimensions that use this fundamental
dimension will also be treated as NUMERIC. For example, setting NUMERIC MASS will force
densities and pressures to be numeric, irrespective of the current ly set distance units. Derived units
can have their units set to NUMERIC even if their fundamental dimensions have units set.
Weights and Masses
In the past, Hull & Outfitting has not distinguished between weight and mass; this has now changed.
Densities (mass/volume) are in Kg per cu metre and the weight of objects derived from this is in Kgf.
Pressures
Pressures are in Force per unit area. Pressure units are supported but whether the pressure is
absolute or relative to atmospheric pressure (Gauge Pressure) is a matter for the user to determine
when he sets values. No conversion is performed.
4.3.3 Upgrading to use new Units
To take advantage of the new functions, attributes need to be set to the correct dimension. This has
been done for the standard attributes. Customers will need it to do it for their UDAs and catalogue and
design parameters and properties. Any data imported to a Schematic database using Schematic
Model Manager will need to have the 12.1 upgrade applied.
It is not necessary to change all dimensions at the same time. For example, Lengths are already
handled correctly. It is expected that angles are stored in Degrees, so they will also be handled
correctly, but users will have to identify which UDAs are angles and set their UUNIT to ANGL.
This will be done for a project; the administrator also needs to determine how to handle each of the
dimensions used for other attributes – volumes, densities, pressures etc. It is possible to continue as
before for any by using the NUMERIC option. For details, please refer to the 12.0 to 12.1 Upgrade
manual. The process for each will be:
If all quantities have been stored in the new Database Units
Set the UUNIT for any UDAs
Any UDAs used to store the Unit values are no longer required and can be deleted
Any customer appware managing unit conversion or display can be removed or replaced by
standard functions
If all quantities have been stored in the same unit (which is not the new Database Unit)
Set the UUNIT for any UDAs
Output a datal file with the dimensions being set to numeric, e.g.
UNITS NUMERIC TEMPERATURE
Read the datal file back in with the current units set appropriately so that unqualified values
are assumed to be in those units: UNITS DEGF TEMPERATURE
o
Any UDAs used to store the Unit values are no longer required and can be deleted
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
21
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
o
User Bulletin
Any customer appware managing unit conversion or display can be removed or
replaced by standard functions
If quantities have been stored in mixed units with a UDA recording the unit for each
Set the UUNIT for any UDAs
Set the dimensions to numeric, e.g. UNITS NUMERIC TEMPERATURE
Output a file with the attribute values, with the value from the unit UDA appended
Check the format of the value plus unit conforms to new input format rules
If necessary edit the file with a text editor or script to achieve this
Read the file back in
Set current units as preferred, e.g. UNITS DEGF TEMPERATURE
Any UDAs used to store the Unit values are no longer required and can be deleted
Any customer appware managing unit conversion or display can be removed or replaced by
standard functions
If quantities have been stored in mixed units with ‗custom and practice‘ being the only record of the
unit, which is hopefully rarely the case:
For the short-term set the dimensions to NUMERIC
Plan to move to more rigorous use of units, probably employing a combination of the
techniques above
4.3.4 Units set up for Hull and Drafting
In AVEVA Marine Hull and Marine Drafting applications the set up for Units differs from the Units
setup in Outfitting.
Presentation format for Units in Hull and Drafting can be set to SI or Imperial. SI units are default. The
format for SI and Imperial respectively can be further controlled by a set of environment variables and
default variables.
For details on the Units usage in Hull and Drafting, please see the following chapters in the AVEVA
Marine User Documentation:
1.
Hull Basic Features and Concepts -> Basic Features -> Imperial Units Syntax Description
2.
Marine Drafting -> Drafting -> User Guide -> Appendices -> Drafting default file k eywords ->
Unit codes
3.
Marine Drafting -> Drafting -> User Guide -> Appendices -> Drafting default file k eywords ->
Unit system
4.
Hull Initial Design -> Lines – User’s Guide -> Technical reference -> Conventions -> Units
Unit Controlled Dimensions in Hull and Drafting
The dimensions that can be unit controlled in Hull and Marine Drafting are shown in the table below.
Core units are independent of the Unit settings and are the same for Hull and Outfitting data.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
22
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Dimension
Core unit
Coordinate
mm
Linear measure
mm
Area
mm
2
Volume
mm
3
Weight
kg
Density
kg/ mm
Angle
degree
3
Presentation Format for Units in Marine Applications
Within Hull and Marine Drafting specific application functions, values will be presented according to
the Hull/Drafting settings.
Attributes in Hull Initial Design are presented according to Initial Design settings.
Within general functions available in Hull Design or Marine Drafting, e.g. Reporter, Attribute addin or
Query attribute command, values will be presented according to the Outfitting Units system.
Within common marine applications, such as Space Management and Assembly Planning, all
attributes will be presented according to the Outfitting Units system.
Within Outfitting specific functions, presentation of hull attributes will follow the Outfitting Units system.
Input Format for Units in Marine Applications
In Hull and Marine Drafting applications the input format can be SI or Imperial, independent of the
Units settings.
Units in Marine – Upgrade and Migration
No upgrade or unit conversion from AVEVA Marine 12.0 to 12.1 is required for Units in Hull and
Drafting, since core units have not been changed.
The unit settings, including the default settings, for Hull and Marine Drafting are the same in AVEVA
Marine 12.1 as in AVEVA Marine 12.0 (and in Tribon M3).
4.4 Enhanced Password Protection
Password protection was made more rigorous at Hull & Outfitting 12.0.SP5. Additional checks have
been at this release introduced to trap potential error conditions.
A confirmation dialog, as shown below, warns if a user is created with no password:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
23
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
A warning is also given, when using the Generate Script dialog, if the password for logging in to the
project is not correct. An incorrect password could cause an invalid password error when the script is
later executed.
In addition to the ConfirmID(), method on the SESSION object, an analogous method has been
added to the USER object. This method also takes a string as argument: the suggested password text
with leading ‗/‘ character. It returns a boolean value that determines whether the password is correct
for the specified user. Example:
!u = object USER(|MYUSER|)
if !u.ConfirmID( |/SESAME| ) then $*…
4.5 Status Control
A number of small improvements, which affect all constructor modules, have been made to Status
Control.
New pseudo-attributes STVMOD and STVUSE have been added to return the status last
modification date and user.
PML2 qualified attribute queries are now available for status data, for example:
!statusDefinitions[1] = /DesignStatus
!statusValues = !!ce.attribute('STVVAL',
!statusDefinitions)
A new command STM COMMENT has been added to set the status comment without modifying the
status value.
The Status Change Event Methods now take an array of objects as their first argument where
previously this was a single element reference in a string. The StatusProjectHandler pml object has
been modified accordingly and comments show where customised code can be placed. Customised
code in the StatusProjectHandler pml object must be updated into the new version. Code for a single
object can generally be inserted in the do loops where indicated by comments.
The StatusData pml object has also been updated to better handle arrays of objects. It has
additional members to hold arrays of data. The previously provided single object members have been
maintained and hold the values of the first elements of each equivalent array at the end of each
operation, so previously defined calling code will generally work as before. Code using the Status Data
pml object will generally continue to work but must be tested, and reviewed to see if it can be made
more efficient by using the array members.
For More Information, please refer to the Status Control User Guide sections 5.1, 5.2, 8.1, and 8.3.
4.6 Report Generation
4.6.1 New Reporting Add-in
Hull & Outfitting 12.1 includes a new ―Reporting‖ add-in, based on the reporting tool Xtrareports from
DevExpress. This can produce sophisticated formatted reports in a wide variety of formats and can
also send the results to AVEVA NET via the Gateway. It is available in Design, Paragon, Spooler,
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
24
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Draft and Isodraft, as well as in some of the Engineer product modules (Schematic Model Manager,
Diagrams and TAGS.)
Running existing reports should be simple. For detailed instructions on designing new reports, please
see the new Report Designer User Guide. A chapter in that guide gives some further information
about running reports – from the Search results grid and from Run Report:
A new PML Reporting API is documented in the Software Customisation Reference Manual.
4.6.2 „Classic‟ Reporting
The PML based reporting tool (now known as ―Standard Reporting‖) is still available as before:
The reporting functions are largely unchanged; however, there are some changes due to the
implementation of more units handling. The effect is that:
The units output for quantities other than distance will be the appropriate current working unit;
distances will be given in mm unless ―inch‖ is specified
When Units Conversion is set to ―Off‖, quantities will have their units appended.
In this case, distances will be in mm with ―mm‖ appended, for example a one inch distance
will be shown as. ―25.4mm‖. When Units Conversion is set to ―Any/mm‖ or ―Inch‖, the units
are not appended but are show as 25.4 or 1‖.
Details are available, as before, in the Reporting Reference Manual.
The new Report tool is available in Marine Drafting and Hull. For the new functionality in Hull reporting
see chapter 15.3 Reporting Tool Available in Hull Design in this bulletin and in the User Guides
mentioned above.
4.7 GML Performance
There are further improvements to the Geometric Modelling software used in Hull & Outfitting, aimed
particularly at speeding up the drawing of data imported using the new Mechanical Equipment
Interface.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
25
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
5. Database changes
5.1 Project Breakdown Structure (PBS) *12.1.SP4*
5.1.1 Overview
The Project Breakdown Structure (PBS) allows the user to present database data in a user-defined
structure. For example, it is possible to present database items according to their system, class, etc.
A tree showing this data structure is generated at runtime.
An Administrator defines PBS hierarchies using Lexicon. He may create more than one such data
structure, each starting from a root node called a PBS Template. The PBS Explorer shows the
structures thus defined as separate hierarchies.
The PBS is available in AVEVA Engineering and AVEVA Diagrams in version 12.1.SP4, but was
designed as a general capability, which could be in other Dabacon based products in future. Future
enhancements will probably include filtering, searching and status control.
5.1.2 Setting up the PBS definition in Lexicon
The appearance of the PBS explorer is defined in Lexicon and stored in the dictionary database. All
the PBS definitions are created below the PBS World (PBSWLD), which can own PBS Templates
(PBSTPL). Each PBS Template defines a separate PBS hierarchy and will be presented in the PBS
Explorer as a single root node. This makes it possible to define several PBS structures; for instance
one structure might present engineering items organised by system, another might show schematic
elements by class or other properties, and another might be used for presenting design data.
Elements in the PBS Template define the data, and its organisation, to be shown in the structure. The
data is in the PBS tree as text nodes, or nodes connected to existing database elements. In both
cases, there is a choice of different methods for generating the result nodes.
For full details, please refer to the Admin manuals.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
26
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
5.2 Use the BACKREf Attribute
*12.1.SP3*
The BACKREf attribute brings the back pointer reference for Referenc e Table Attributes and answer
the question ―what references me (ce)‖. The syntax is:
Q BACKREF [(ATTNAME att1 [, ATTNAME att2] )]
E.g. standing on a SPCO and querying for BACKREf (attname SPREF ) will return all elements
referencing that SPCO.
Q BACKREF( attname SPCO)
Excluding the argument will list all Reference Table Attributes referencing CE.
E.g. Q BACKREF
For More Information
See Reference Manual Database and Data Management /Database Navigation and Query Syntax.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
27
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
5.3 Cleanup and the CLEANUp Command
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP3*
The command CLEANUp cleans up unwanted references in the database. It is possible to remove
null references and unresolved/invalid references.
The logical attributes NULLREf, INVREF and UNRESOlved is used to sort out whether a reference
attribute points to something valid or not. The syntax is the same for all three:
Q NULLRE (ATTNAME att )
Answers the question is the attribute att null (=0/0)?
Q UNRESO (ATTNAME att )
Is the attribute att pointing to an element whose existence we cannot find and verify? It could be that
the database is missing or that the reference is truly invalid.
Q INVREF (ATTNAME att )
Is the attribute pointing to an element that is non-existent? This differs from unresolved in that the
database that should accommodate the missing element is present in the active mdb.
For More Information
See Reference Manual Database and Data Management /Database Navigation and Query Syntax /
Cleanup and the CLEANUp Command.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
28
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
5.4 New Database types
5.4.1 Engineering Database
The new ENGI database holds engineering data that does not normally appear on the schematics
drawings. It therefore holds more detailed information necessary to fully specify the engineering
equipment in a plant. For example, a schematic might show a pump, its name and its major
connections – and perhaps a little more. The engineering database will include electrical data (for the
motor, loading calculations etc), process data (the process conditions), mechanical data etc.
These data may be owned and controlled by several different discipline engineers. This database will
make it easy to produce lists of equipment and other tagged items. Using a separate database makes
it simpler for the schematics and the engineering data to be compiled in parallel – and later checked
for consistency.
5.4.2 Design Reference Database
This is a restricted Design database, used mainly for
administrative purposes – it cannot include any SITE
or HULL data. Its main use is for storing information
about Systems and Areas for use in Engineering and
Schematics applications. It is therefore useful for
users who are licensed only for 2D applications.
It is created by setting a flag on the database when it
is created; this is the only way to create it and the flag
cannot be removed at a later date.
Points to note about Design Reference databases:
Engineering or Schematics users can use
them
They cannot be the default DB in an MDB
They cannot include SITEs; this also
prevents the creation of elements below
SITEs
They can include Schematic-3D link
elements, making link information available in
Schematics products when their users do not
have access to normal DESI databases
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
29
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
5.5 Access to Databases
The complete list of database types, apart from ‗system‘ types, is now:
Administrative: DICTIONA RY, NSEQUENCE
Parts catalogue and material properties: CATALOGUE, PROPERTIES
3D Design and Drafting: DESIGN & DESIGN Reference, DRAFT (PADD), ISODRAFT
Schematics and Engineering: DESIGN Reference, SCHEMATIC, ENGINEERING
In addition, MANUFACTURING and NSEQUENCE database types are primarily used by the Marine
products.
Access to the various types of database depends on the product and module being used as well as a
user‘s access as determined by his team membership and any Data Access Controls in use. In
summary:
All AVEVA Plant products have full read/write access to the administrative and catalogue data
in the DICTIONA RY, CATALOGUE, NSEQUENCE and PROPERTIES databases.
Hull & Outfitting users can read & write 3D databases; those who need to access Schematic
or Engineering data also need a Schematic 3D Integrator license. The decision to work in
―Integrated‖ mode is taken when a user enters Hull & Outfitting and applies to the whole
session.
Diagrams users can read & write SCHEMATICS databases; they can read but not write 3D
databases. Diagrams users can also read (but not write) the new ENGINEERING database
(see below).
Engineering users can read & write both Schematic and Engineering data; they can also read
(but not write) 3D data.
Existing users of Diagrams, Schematic Model Manager and Schematic 3D Integrator will require an
updated license file.
5.6 Increase in Number of Databases
A larger number of databases can now be used in a project; the new limit is 250,000. New database
numbers from 250,001 to 255,000 are reserved for AVEVA use, as well as those from 7,001 to 8,000.
It is now easier to avoid database number conflicts when databases are shared between projects.
These conflicts may be avoided by creating DBRange elements to define the range of database
numbers available for use in each of the projects. The database numbers may be between 10,000
and 250,000; these numbers may also be used explicitly in a project that does not use DBRanges.
A DBRange may be created in Admin under the STAT element in the SYSTEM or GLOBAL database
and defines the start DBRBEG and end DBREND of a range of numbers.
There is a new ―UNIQUE‖ option for the CREATE DB command to allow the user to create the next
database in the defined range for the project; a new pseudo-attribute NXTDBU gives the next
database number within the range.
For full details, please refer to the Administrator User Guide and Command Reference Manual.
5.6.1 Admin GUI
To create a DB Range, a menu in the Settings pull down takes the user to a new form to set values
for a DB Range. If no range already exists, this will create an unnamed DB Range and populate it with
the specified values; if more than one range is required for the project, these should be created on the
command line.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
30
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
A Unique button for DB Number on the Create Database form ensures creation of a database within
the project‘s range: see picture in section 5.4.2.
5.7 Duplicate Names
In general, AVEVA Marine products prevent the use of duplicate names within the current MDB.
However, it may be desirable for Engineering or Schematics elements to use the same name as the
3D elements in the Design database. Hull & Outfitting 12.0 allowed name duplication between the
DESI and the SCHE databases.
It is now possible to create or rename an element in an Engineering (ENGI) database to have the
same name as any element in any Schematic (SCHE), Design (DESI) or Marine Production (MANU)
database in the current MDB.
Similarly it is now possible to create or rename an element in any Schematic (SCHE), Design (DESI)
or Production (MANU) database to have the same name as any element in any Engineering (ENGI)
database in the current MDB.
5.8 Flexibility of Data Organisation
5.8.1 Database Views
Database views provide a way to consolidate data from elements and attributes distributed across
databases in an MDB. These views are set up by an administrator using the Database Views Editor
and stored in the Lexicon (DICT) database in a ‗Database View World‘ (DBVWWL/D). Users‘
database views may also be saved a local settings file.
The Editor is currently available in the Lexicon and Tags modules, under Display > Database Views
Editor.
A Database View uses a table to define a view of the data, which may be derived from a single or
multiple elements. There is a row in the Database View table for each element of a particular type that
meets the criteria defined by filters. These filters use the same concept as the search grid. If the
criteria cannot be expressed using attribute filters, it is also possible to define an expression for
evaluation. A row is present in the table only if all the filter criteria are met.
This is a very powerful technique which can be used to derive data structures for a variety of
purposes, including the new reporting function. The Excel Import/Export functions also work with
Database Views, which are of particular importance in the integration of engineering, schematic and
design data.
5.8.2 Distributed Attributes
Distributed attributes enable the definition of objects that have groups of attributes distributed across
databases, currently restricted to the DESIgn and new ENGIneering database types . This enables a
number of new possibilities:
Improved concurrency
o
Several users may work in parallel on an object, using different sets of data
o
Simultaneous multi-discipline updates on the same object are possible
o
Claims may be smaller, only claiming the relevant ―portions‖ of an object
Distribution of an object‘s attributes across hierarchies and databases
o
Easier distribution using Global
o
Reduced need for Global extracts
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
31
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Simplified access control
o
It may be sufficient to use database ownership (by teams)
Data may be included or excluded by database
Extensibility of data structures – an alternative to direct use of UDETs and UDAs
A ‗binding‘ element is used to achieve this: it may bind any number of bound elements, but
these bound elements can only bind to one binding element. The attributes defined on the
bound elements are then available on the binding element for both querying and
manipulation.
Details of the configuration and use of distributed attributes can be found in the Database
Management Reference Manual and Lexicon User Guide.
5.8.3 Handling of Duplicated Names of UDAs and UDETs
UDA keys now take into account database number to remove the possibility of conflicts between UDA
names in different databases. In previous versions, this could occur when merging data from different
projects or MDBs.
A new command in Lexicon allows a user to reallocate existing UKEY values to the new format for
UDAs and UDETs. They can operate on either a selection of UDAs and UDETs or all in the current
MDB. The old keys are stored in the attribute OLDKEY for reference. Admin commands allow update
of project data to use the new keys.
For details, please refer to the Lexicon and Admin Command Reference Manuals.
5.8.4 Top-Level Element Creation in Specific Database
It is now simpler to ensure that top level elements are created in a specific database; a DB keyword
and name can be added to the NEW command:
NEW element_type element_name DB database_name
where element_name is also optional; database_name is a full database name, i.e. team/database.
For example, this command will create a new SITE named /MYSITE in the MYTEAM/MYDB
database:
NEW SITE /MYSITE DB MYTEAM/MYDB
5.9 Dynamic Groups
A PML1 collection expression, evaluated whenever the group is used, may now be used to define a
selection for a GPSET. The SCOSEL attribute is used to store this selection, for example:
SCOSEL ALL EQUI FROM CLAIMLIST
More complex dynamic selections are possible, for example:
ALL PIPE WHERE (BORE GT 80)
ALL BRAN MEMBERS WHERE (SPREF EQ /MYSPEC) for SITE /SITE1
There is a performance overhead in evaluating more complex selection expressions.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
32
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
5.10 Database Performance
A number of enhancements have been made to the performance of the Dabacon database. Those
noted here are the most visible to users.
Dabacon Buffer
The Dabacon buffer is used for temporary storage of data in local memory and can therefore have a
significant effect on performance. Increasing its size is likely to reduce the amount of network I/O, so
in generally a larger buffer will improve performance. However if it is larger than the available
memory, paging will increase, thus offsetting some of the advantages.
Previous versions of Hull & Outfitting 12 have limited the buffer to between 32,000 and 51,200,000
(integers) with a default of (in general) only 12,800,000. This corresponds to a default of 50 and a
maximum of 200 Mbytes; with modern PCs, most customers found it best to use the maximum value,
set by use of the BUFFER command in Admin.
These values have been increased at Hull & Outfitting 12.1; it may now be set to between 20 Mbytes
and 1 Gbyte.
Default Buffer Size
The default buffer for modules in a new project is now:
Monitor
20 MBytes
Admin, Specon, Propcon, Isodraft,
Lexicon
200 Mbytes
DARs, Toolbox
Design, Draft, Paragon, Spooler
500 Mbytes
Diagrams, Schematic Model Manager,
Tags
5.10.1 Specifying the Buffer Size
The Dabacon buffer may be set in Admin for each module or by use of an environment variable for all
modules.
Buffer Setting for Each Module in a Project
The setting for each program module is usually performed using the modmac.mac file during project
setup. At a later date, the ED MOD command may be used to change its value for one or more
modules.
The value may be specified in Mbytes or integers; 256000 integers means the same as 1 MByte.
For example, ED MOD DESIGN 12800000 is the same as ED MOD DESIGN 50 Mbytes
Buffer Setting Per User
The Dabacon value may be set for a particular user by setting the environment variable ‗PDMSBUF‘
before running Hull & Outfitting. This sets the buffer size in Megabytes for use by all Hull & Outfitting
modules; it will be ignored if its value is greater than 1000. For example, set PDMSBUF=500 sets it
to 500 MByte.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
33
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Querying the Amount of Unused Buffer
This may be queried using the command: Q DABACON AVAIL.
5.10.2 Dabacon Index Tables
The use of Dabacon index tables has been extended to speed up selection by Hull object type code,
element type, UDET or UDA value.
5.11 Units of Measure
This enhancement enables Outfitting to store attribute data in standard units and perform conversions
as appropriate. The system handles this automatically dependent on the units and also stores
appropriate information with parameterised attributes to enable them to be handled.
A new dynamic UNIPAR attribute has been added to all catalogue elements with PARA attributes –
namely SCOM, SPRF, JOIN and FITT – and to all design elements with DESP attributes. It is a
hidden (VISI FALSE) integer array attribute (that may not be listed or queried) and holds the set of
WORD unit values corresponding to the dimensions of the values in a sibling PARA or DESP
attribute.
5.12 Unicode Storage of Name and Text Attributes
Marine Outfitting and Marine Drafting code will handle Unicode strings. Administrators may have
chosen to convert all DBs which do not contain Hull data to Unicode as part of their upgrade
process, or may decide for each DB whether and when to upgrade manually, and perform this
upgrade using Reconfigure as in the example above.
5.13 DRAFT Line-style World Hierarchy
System line-style widths are now stored in the system database, for consistency throughout a project,
and are initially set to ISO defaults: Thin=0.25mm, Medium=0.35mm, Thick=0.70mm. See also
5.14 Extract Control – Include Flush Capability
Enhancements have been made to Extract Control in the Design/Engineer modules Design, Diagrams
and Schematic Model Manager. When working in an extract database, issuing, flushing or dropping
an element that has a referencing Integrator link will automatically include the link object.
The new reference array attribute INCFLU (include flush) returns any Integrator or Status link
elements that reference the current element. Flushing, issuing or dropping an element with
referencing link objects will act on those link objects even if the element itself is not claimed or
modified. The Extract Control form will display an ―R‖ label on such elements.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
34
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
User Bulletin
35
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
6. User Interface
6.1 Entry to System
Entry to the system has been changed to allow direct entry to any module, without the need to go via
Monitor. The login form is presented with the appropriate splash screen. Desktop and Start menu
shortcuts are provided for the popular options.
A new checkbox, labelled ―Integrated Schematics and Engineering‖, determines whether or not the
Hull & Outfitting user will also have read access to the SCHEmatic and ENGIneering databases. This
option is relevant to customers who also use one of AVEVA‘s 2D products , AVEVA Diagrams or
AVEVA Engineering. Checking this option allows users to access to these data and is necessary in
order to use the Schematic Integrator Addin during the session.
Note: The console window may be suppressed by using a –noconsole argument to the start-up
script. It may also be controlled using an environment variable: if you wish to run the system with the
console hidden, use:
set AVEVA_NOCONSOLE=TRUE
6.2 Save and Restore Views
This new feature allows a user to take a snapshot
of a view and save it to file. The saved view can be reinstated when required, including a new session
of Hull & Outfitting. A saved view consists of three elements:
The current drawlist
View properties (e.g. view direction)
A snapshot picture of the view when it was saved
When selecting which view to restore, the snapshot picture is shown to help identify the correct view.
Note that this snapshot is just a picture captured at the time the view was saved. Elements in that
picture may have been modified or deleted since the picture was saved, so when the view may look
different once it is restored. In fact, it is possible that an empty view may appear if all elements in the
drawlist have been deleted or moved outside the view area since the original view was saved.
The Save & Restore 3D Views function is accessed via a new icon on the 3D View:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
36
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
The old numbered saved views are no longer available.
For details, please refer to the Graphical Model Manipulation Guide.
6.3 Grid Control
A number of enhancements have been made to the grid control. These include an enhanced column
setup form, a new filter on the row filter, an autofit function and an ability to copy a set of grid cells and
paste them into another document. In addition, Drag and Drop may be used in the grid for some
operations. The Grid Control has also been enhanced to support multi-element and distributed
attribute editing using Database Views.
6.4 Toolbar Popup Menu
The popup context menu displayed from the Toolbar area has a new entry Lock the Toolbars. This
enables users to lock the position of the toolbars to prevent acc idental change of layout.
6.5 PML Collections
A PML Collection with unlimited scope now collects data from the entire database; in other words, an
empty scope now means ALL rather than NONE. [This means that the collection operation will take
much longer, so it may be worth checking any PML functions to ensure that this is what is required.]
6.6 Attribute Display, Editing and Validation
A new Attributes Utility replaces the previous Query Attributes and Attributes forms; it combines the
functions of both and also enables attributes to be edited if access rights permit. Attributes that are
not editable are shown with a grey background; feedback is given for inappropriate attribute values.
The form displays the attributes of the current database element either in a list or by category: see
pictures below.
The form allows the user to edit attributes, where appropriate, and is available in all modules. It
replaces the old PML Query Attributes form and the old C# Attributes form.
The popup menu provides various new functions such as an ability to set the current element to a
reference attribute value. The details vary between modules and are documented in the appropriate
manuals.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
37
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
Attrib utes displayed in a list
User Bulletin
Attrib utes displayed b y Category
6.7 Auto-naming Utility Enhancement
This utility has been enhanced to allow the formulation of a name to use an IFTRUE statement, which
is a PML1 facility. For example, if you wish to make up a name based on attributes of a PIPE, you can
use the following PML2 autonaming rule:
!!ce.fluref.namn & '-' & !!ce.pspec.namn & '-' & !!ce.ispec.namn &
'-' & !index
However this rule will fail if any of the attributes (FLUREF, PSPE, ISPE) have not been set. You can
now use the IFTRUE function in PML1 form to do the same by using the following rule:
iftrue(badref(fluref) ,'unset' , namn of fluref) & '-' &
iftrue(badref(pspec) ,'unset' , namn of pspe) & '-' &
iftrue(badref(ispe) ,'unset' , namn of ispe) & '-' & !index
Please note that the whole ‗Format‘ must be PML 1, c oncatenated with the ‗&‘. It is not possible to mix
PML1 and PML2 functions. The result of this rule can be seen below:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
38
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
The FLUREF and ISPE have not been set but the PSPE is set to /A3B, so the resultant name is
unset-A3B-unset-1.
6.8 Additional Debug Information about PML Applications
6.8.1 Help About
A new button has been added to the Help About > Additional Information dialog, with a new option
to scan all Application Appware files to check if they have been changed.
6.8.2 PML Alert
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
39
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
An additional button has been added to the PML alert dialog to allow extra information relevant to the
alert to be saved to file. Clicking the Save Support Info… button will bring-up a save file dialog and
allow the user to save the extended information:
6.9 Infragistics Toolkit
Hull & Outfitting 12.1 uses an updated Infragistics Netadvantage toolkit (version 10. 3) for its GUI. The
filenames of the Infragistics DLLs no longer include the version number, which will make future
upgrades easier.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
40
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
7. Administration
7.1 GUI Improvements
A number of features have been added to the GUI to improve its ease of use and make it more
consistent with other modules. For example:
Import from Excel
Data for Admin elements such as users, teams etc. may now be imported reliably from Excel. This
has resulted in three changes in behaviour:
Access Control Assistant (ACA) is no longer hidden during Import and Rollback operations.
The Export and Import logging dialog no longer has a Cancel button; it is also less responsive
to Window operations such as move or resize, while export or import operations are in
progress.
The Export and Import logging dialog "OK" button has been renamed "Dismiss".
For details, please refer to the Admin User Guide.
For full details of the various different types of view, please refer to t he Lexicon User Guide.
7.2 Lexicon
7.2.1 New Lexicon Graphical View
A new user interface can show a graphic representation of the relationships between Lexicon data
entities, using nodes and links, in the style of UML and entity relationship diagrams.
There is a series of graphical views, which are shown on separate tabbed panes in the Lexicon User
Interface. There are 4 types of view, showing UDAs, UDETs, status definitions and distributed
attributes. Each view tab is opened by selecting the ‗Graphical View‘ menu option during a ‗right-click‘
on an element of a supported type in the Lexicon explorer.
The picture below shows a screenshot of Lexicon with the new Graphical View on the right, side-byside with the Dictionary Explorer and Current Element Editor. Individual views are associated with a
single database element. To open a view, select the element of interest in the explorer and click the
context menu. Each view opens in a separate tab, whose title reflects the name of the element for
which it was opened.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
41
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
7.2.2 UDA Lists of Values
User-Defined Attributes (UDAs) and User System Defined Attributes (USDAs) can have a list of valid
values (for text attributes) or a list of valid ranges (for numeric attributes). These lists are checked
when setting the UDA to prevent the use of values outside the valid range.
A new logical attribute on UDA and USDA elements determines whether the valid values or ranges (if
such exist) are optional. The default behaviour remains that the restrictions remain non-optional. If,
however, this attribute is set TRUE and the UDA or USDA definition is re-compiled, it will be possible
to override the restriction and set the attribute to a value outside the valid range.
To support this, a new method has been added to PML2 Attribute object and .NET public interface.
The new method LIMITSVALIDOPTIONAL(ELEMENTTYPE) complements the existing
LIMITS(ELEMENTTYPE) and VALIDVALUES(ELEMENTTYPE) methods.
The .NET database interface class for attributes, Aveva.Pdms.Database.DbAttribute has a
new method to determine whether the valid values or range is optional for a particular element type:
public abstract bool IsAllowedOptional(DbElementType type);
7.2.3 Database Views
A Database View defines a table for viewing manipulating data in the database; these data may be
derived from a single element or multiple elements. There is a row in the Database View table for
each element that has a particular element type and meets the criteria defined by attribute filters.
These Filters are similar in concept to those in the search grid. In addition, if element match criteria
cannot be expressed using attribute filters, it is possible to define an expression for evaluation.
For example, a Database View could be derived from all Equipment elements in the current MDB with
a description of ‗Vessel‘. The user also specifies the required columns; each can be a database
attribute or an expression run against the equipment element. The user can also specify how to
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
42
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
navigate to related elements, such as the owning SITE or ZONE, and derive further columns from that
element. This is similar in concept to a saved search except that editable columns may be derived
from several elements.
Database Views may be defined and modified in the DICTIONA RY database using Lexicon to set up
new elements in a new ‗Database View World‘ (DBVWWL/D). Their definition may alternatively be
stored as a local settings file (similar to saved searches) or as part of an application. This allows:
User defined Database Views for reports, ad-hoc working etc.
Project defined Database Views, shared via Global
Application defined Database Views for specialist applications
The Editor is currently available in the LEXICON and TAGS modules, under Display > Database
Views Editor.
Access to the full Editor is gained by selecting Element Views from the dropdown list in the View
Definition Set area. For details, please refer to the Tags User Guide.
Database Views are created automatically to represent element type structures so that users don‘t
have to define them to make element information accessible to the generic reporting tool. This means
there is already a Database View for equipment elements with their attributes defined in columns.
7.2.4 General
The User Interface has been changed to help with maintenance and improve consistency. In
particular the following have changed:
New menu on the menu bar
Explorer right click menu (now consistent with other modules)
Edit Members on the Explorer menu
New element types, which have changed the contents of the Explorer, Current Element editor
and ElementType editor.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
43
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
7.3 Admin GUI Changes for Global
7.3.1 Global Support for Linked Documents
Global has been extended to include support for linked documents by propagating any document
marked as ‘propagating’ between two locations. By default the propagation of Linked documents is
disabled. To enable the propagation of Linked Documents switch on the ‘Propagate Link Documents’
setting under the ‘Project’ menu in Admin:
Note: Link Documents are only available in DESI databases
Link Document Propagation can be enabled on the command line by setting the GLINKP attribute on
the GLOCWL (/*GL) element. The default is false indicating that Link propagation is disabled for the
project.
To determine which documents require propagation the update process must scan applicable
databases. As this has a performance impact on the overall time for updates, the administrator can
select which databases to scan. By default all DESI databases will be scanned for Link documents. It
is possible to disable Link Documents propagation for a single database via the CREATE/MODIFY
Database form by deselecting the Link Documents tick box:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
44
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Note: The link ed Document tick box is only available for DESI databases;
this option is not available for other types of databases.
The DBLOC element for the Database contains the attribute NOLNKP to determine whether the
database should be scanned for link documents. This defaults to False indicating that links will be
propagated if enabled. To determine if a Database can support Link Documents the attribute ISLNKD
can be queried. The attribute DBLNKP can be queried to determine if the update process will scan
this database for link documents.
The Global update process will scan all relevant databases to determine what linked doc uments to
propagate to the remote location. Link Documents are applied to the database through the creation if
a LNDESC element. The scan will select all link documents that have the LNKPRP attribute set to
SEND. The document is referenced via the URL link which must have the format
‘file:///<pathname>’; The file specified by <pathname> must exist at both the source and
destination locations. Usually this is best achieved using an Environment variable to hide installation
differences. Link Documents fully support the use of spaces in path/filenames.
The Update process only propagates documents that are not present at the remote location. It does
not support documents that have changed and as a result these will not be propagated over the top of
the previous version. However, it is possible to force the propagation of link documents by using the
following command in Admin:-
SYNCHR <dbname> LINKDOC FORCE
Note: There is no UI to support this command
On allocation of a new database, the propagation of all link relevant documents will be forced to the
remote location. Recover will force the propagation of all relevant linked documents in the direction of
the recover. Therefore if recovering a database back to the primary location then the linked
documents will also be recovered back to the primary location.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
45
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Note: The originating location of a document referenced by an extract hierarchy may
be unclear. For this reason RECOVER and the FORCE option of SYNCHRONISE
should be used with caution for extracts.
Progress and State (Success/Failure) of linked document propagation is recorded in the transaction
database
Limitations
When creating a new location with allocated databases the linked documents will not be transferred.
These will require a forced Synchronisation after the location has been configured and initialised.
Global does not delete linked documents at the remote location when the linked document has been
marked with LNKPRP DELE.
Offline transfer is not supported.
Linked documents propagation does not guarantee consistency between files at different locations. In
particular:Linked documents functionality is primarily intended for files which are part of the data model,
such as PDF Plotfiles, and certain Marine files;
Linked documents are not definitely linked to the database which references them. It is
therefore difficult to track such documents once the link description is no longer available.
Likewise linked documents may be referenced multiple times. This will be the norm for extract
databases. This makes it difficult to identify the primary location of a document.
It is possible to reference Linked documents for other data types of documents, such as Word
documents and Excel spread sheets;
It is possible for users to change documents at the destination loc ation; this will lead to an
inconsistency between locations. The update process does not detect this.
Behaviour for extract hierarchies may not be as expected. For this reason the FORCE option
should be used with caution on databases in an extract hierarchy, since it could overwrite the
wrong version of the file.
No documents are deleted when a database is de-allocated. For this reason ALLOCATE will
always overwrite any pre-existing files.
There is a strong likelihood that ‗orphan‘ linked documents will be left behind after databases
have been merged, backtracked, de-allocated or deleted.
7.3.2 Database Distribution Form
This new form helps visualise where databases are allocated, and which location databases are
primary. This form provides additional functionality to change the primary location of a series of
databases. It is available from the Data menu in Admin:-
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
46
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
The Data Distribution form lists all Databases in the project and maps it against a matrix of locations.
This uses the common symbols of:-
+‘
‗- ‗
‗> ‘
‗* ‘
‗
indicates the database is primary at this location
indicates the database is allocated to this location but is primary elsewhere
indicates the database is in transit from this location under a pending transaction
indicates the database is foreign and allocated to this location
By selecting a number of databases and a location, it is possible to change all those databases to be
primary to the selected location.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
47
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
7.3.3 Creation of an Event without Times
The Update event form will now allow the creation of an event without times, to run scripts at the
remote location. To do this, create an update event at the current location with the Frequency text box
left blank, and the Transfer Scripts text boxes filled in. When an update occurs between A and B, the
scripts will be run at B. The arguments will be reversed (B, A).
For details, please refer to the AVEVA Global User Guide Section 4.12 Creating Update Events wrt
Transfer Scripts.
7.3.4 Remote File Details in Admin
When querying remote file details at different locations to compare them, the results for the different
queries are available. Each press of the Apply button appends the results to the list on the right of the
form. This means you can choose different locations and see the information for selected databases
together in the list.
Press the Clear button to empty the results list. Results can be stored in a file by pressing the Save
Report button which will display a file browser for you to save the results into a text file.
For details, please refer to the AVEVA Global User Guide.
Satellite Commands filter for Transactions
The Transactions form display can now be filtered so that only Global commands are listed. Global
commands are defined as those that take place via the Global daemon (i.e. not local ly), For example,
an Extract claim made when an owning extract database is NOT at the same location.
For details, please refer to the AVEVA Global User Guide.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
48
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
7.3.5 Enhanced User Interface for Sessions
Forms that display details of a database session now also include the reason for that the session. In
particular, the DB sessions form, available from Query > Project > DB Sessions, shows it thus:
7.4 Engineering (ENGI) Database
The Engineering database type has been added to the list for database creation. Note that the top
level database element for Engineering databases is SATWLD.
It has also been added to the module definitions (modmac.mac) and as appropriate in the other admin
and global forms for selection, sorting, allocation etc.
7.5 TAGS Module Definition
The new TAGS module has been added to the product modules defined by modmac.mac and
therefore available for use.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
49
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
8. Introduction to New Functionality
This bulletin describes the new and enhanced functionality available in AVEVA Hull and Outfitting
12.1 as compared to 12.0. It gives an overview of the major changes, which are described in full in
new and revised User Documentation.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
50
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
9. AVEVA General Functionality
9.1 AVEVA Database Cache Service
*12.1.SP3*
The AVEVA Database Cache Service is a feature that stores highly optimised copies of retrieved
project data on the local disk to improve performance where there is repeated reading of project data
across a computer network.
The cache must be active on the client machine running the AVEVA applications and cached data is
shared by relevant AVEVA Marine applications and users running on that machine. If the Cache
Service is installed and running, applications will connect to the Cache Service and all data that is
read across the network will be cached locally for the next access. However, the projects that are
already stored on a local disk will not be cached.
In AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP3 and subsequent releases of AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP3, the Hull Design,
Outfitting, Marine Drafting and Outfitting Draft modules are able to use the Cache Service. Using the
Cache Service is optional and if it is not active then database access is via the network file system, as
usual.
9.1.1 Making Use of the Cache
If the Cache Service is installed and running, applications will connect to the Cache Service and all
data that is read across the network will be cached locally for the next access.
For More Information
See AVEVA Marine Software Installation Guide.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
51
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
9.2 Expanded Selvol Graph
*12.1.SP3*
It is now possible to collect elements that fully encloses a physical volume using the keyword
enclosing in the same way as the keyword within. This will for example allow collections of spaces
that a specific equipment is located in. It is also possible to use the within syntax with both the
keywords exactly and exclusive at the same time.
For more information
See User Guide Design / Design Reference Manual / General Commands / How to Use the Syntax
Graphs / Standard Syntax Graphs / Selection <selatt>.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
52
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
9.3 Clean Up Orphan STALNK Elements *12.1.SP2*
Description
Deleting status controlled elements leaves orphan STALNK elements behind, with their attribute
CELREF reported as BADREF by Dice. A new PML function has been added to fix this problem.
Execute !!stmcleanup() on the command line to clean up all STALNKs with an invalid CELREF.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Status Control / Status Pseudo Attributes and Commands / Clean Up Orphan Status
link s.
Affected Programs
All PDMS based applications
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
53
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
9.4 Performance Improvements in AVEVA Marine
Description
A number of improvements have been made to speed of functions and usability AVEVA Marine.
In start-up of AVEVA Marine, the loading of Dll‘s have been improved to take less time.
Many of the Addins will be loaded but they are only notifying the main process that they
exist. Data load by an Addin, will take place when needed.
New indexes are introduced in the database to speed up searching of different Marine objects
such as panels, profiles, plate and profile parts, nesting‘s.
For example:
List Drawings
Auto scale of drawing
Create Symbolic View
Recreate Symbolic View
Input Model
Schema run
Automatic Creation of Planar Parts (PPanparts)
Automatic Creation of Curved Parts (CPanparts)
Open Nest
Part Menu
Selected forms have changed behaviour to remember more information, for example
Planar Hull Statement Wizard
Boundary to remember last used point mode
Stiffener to remember type, connection and endcut codes
Flange to remember type, connection and endcut codes
The reading of large objects from the database over a high latency network has been
improved.
Work in this important area is on-going.
See, for example, improvements for 12.1.SP3 in chapters 19.9 List Drawings and 19.11 Draw
Outfitting Models in this bulletin.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
54
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
9.5 SetStart Method of NameSeq Object
Description
The NameSeq object that can be used to make user defined name sequences working with data in an
NSEQ database has been extended with new methods. Earlier the SetStart method made a name
sequence to start over from a specified value. Now it is possible to store a specific start value for a
sequence by the SetStart method (which no longer restarts a sequence). By a new ReStart method a
name sequence can be restarted from the stored initial value. Name sequences with wraparound, will
automatically restart by the initial value when required.
Benefits
Handle wraparounds and name sequence restarts from specified initial value.
Compatibility Constraints
To store an initial value other than zero upgrade of NSEQ dbs is required.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Curved Hull Design and any customisation using NSEQ dbs.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
55
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
9.6 BLOCK Creation in Specific Database
Description
There is a new PML function available for creating BLOCKs in specific databases.
!!HullNewBlock(!blkName is STRING, !dbName is STRING) is DBREF
The parameter blk Name is the name of the new block and it is mandatory.
The parameter dbName is the name of the new block and it is optional (needs to be passed as space,
i.e. ‗‘).
The function returns the DBREF to the newly created BLOCK element if successful. Otherwise an
error message is issued and the function result is undefined.
Example:
!blk = !!HullNewBlock(‘MYBLOCK’, ‘MYTEAM/MYDB’)
That statement will create a new block, MYBLOCK, in the database MYTEAM/MYDB.
!blk = !!HullNewBlock(‘MYBLOCK’, ‘/MYHBLWLD’)
That statement will create a new block, MYBLOCK, under the existing HBLWLD /MYHBLWLD.
Benefits
The new PML function makes it possible to create Hull Blocks without using DBPrompt.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull in Dabacon / Marine Project Setup – Getting Started / Create Initial Data
Structures.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
56
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
9.7 Stable Identification of Un-named Hull Elements
Description
When the name of an unnamed element is displayed, it is composed by its type and member position.
TYPE n of …
The n is its numbered position in the list of its owner, only counting elements of the same type. Some
types of elements are possibly better identified by the value of an attribute than by its position among
its equal type of siblings. For some marine hull type of elements this is just the case. The name of an
unnamed element is normally presented in the format:
HSTIFF 3 of HPANEL /ER2-LP32_2
While it onwards instead will be presented in the format
HSTIFF idsp 6003 of HPANEL /ER2-LP32_2
The value 6003 is provided by the TBID attribute for the HSTIFF element. Hull elements
attribute will be presented in this format.
with a TBID
Command graphs are adjusted so that the same format can be used as input by user to change
position in the element hierarchy.
Benefits
More stable identification of unnamed hull elements.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to Design Reference Manual / How to Use the Syntax Graphs / Standard Syntax Graphs /
Design Element Identity <gid> and User Guide Hull in Dabacon / General / Identification of Unnamed
Elements.
Affected Programs
This is a core change that affects all programs exploring hull data.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
57
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
9.8 New Storage Model for Hull Objects
Description
The underlying Hull objects (i.e. OBJHD) are stored in a more efficient way in the database.
Benefits
Performance in terms of read/write I/O; and less space consumed in the database. I/O reductions on
up to 40 percent can be achieved.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See the upgrade documentation for details on how to optionally convert object into new storage
model.
Affected Programs
HullDesign, HullDrafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
58
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
9.9 Hull Specific Design Explorer Configuration
Description
The Design Explorer is configured to expose an additional name for hull part nodes. Beside the name
derived from the FLNM attribute hull parts are presented by a second name derived from the
PARNAM attribute. If the environment variable MARINE_DESIGN_E XPLORE R_P LAIN is assigned
any value the additional name presentation is switched off.
Benefits
None.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design, Outfitting Design, Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
59
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
9.10 Limited Unicode Support in Hull Design
Description
Even if a project is in Unicode mode the same restrictions on allowed characters in the names of
objects created using Hull Design still apply.
I.e. only uppercase letters A-Z, digits and the special characters hyphen (-), full stop (.), underscore
(_) and plus (+) can be used.
A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - . _ +
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
60
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
9.11 Improved Local Language – Unicode Encoding
A major internal change at Hull & Outfitting 12.1 is that the system uses the Unicode standard for text
storage and manipulation, rather than the various specific and somewhat proprietary methods that are
used in Hull & Outfitting 12.0 and earlier releases. This standard covers all common world languages
– and special characters – and will make it much easier to provide support for additional character
sets in the future. It makes text handling more robust and makes it much easier to relax some of the
previous restrictions, particularly to the use of Asian 16-bit character sets. For example, these may
now be viewed in the 3D views. Inputs and outputs may be in Unicode or local standards.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
61
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
9.12 Units of Measure – Extended Range of Conversions
Hull & Outfitting has always provided conversions for distance and (pipe) bore measurements, to
cater for the use of both Metric and Imperial (English) units. This has allowed users to work with feet
and inch input & output, but with database storage always in millimetres. Area and volume units have
been derived from the length units. Other physical quantities have been handled as purely numeric
and have had no conversions applied to them.
Hull & Outfitting 12.1 extends these facilities to a much wider range of measures, and includes built-in
definitions and conversion factors for a wide variety of units of measure, with standardised storage
and efficient conversion.
These extensions are needed to provide for the much wider range of data now being handled,
particularly for plant engineering and schematic data. These data now include Distance, Bore, Area,
Volume, Angle, Weight, Temperature, Density, Pressure, Force, Voltage, Current, Impedance, and
many others.
Please note that this does mean that the behaviour of some real attributes is different; users‘ PML
applications that check or manipulate these values will need to be reviewed.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
62
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
9.13 Extract Claims in Hull Applications
Description
Hull object locking (claiming) and releasing in extracts has been improved. When working in extracts,
it is no longer a requirement to make explicit extract claims of hull objects before making modifications
to them. I.e. when modifying a hull object, e.g. a planar panel, in an extract, the application will
implicitly try to claim the object to the extract.
Benefits
Hull user does not need to make explicit extract claims.
Compatibility constraints
None
For more information
Only noted here
Affected programs
Hull Design applications
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
63
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
9.14 Documentation
A great many changes have been made to the documentation set for Hull and Outfitting 12.1, with all
manuals updated.
Notable improvements to the documentation set include:
A new 12.0 to 12.1 Upgrade manual
Manuals for new functions and products: Design Reuse, Space Management, Surface
Manager, Report Designer, Tags, Isometric ADP
Major update for Lexicon manual
A new section on Event Driven Graphics in the Software Customisation Reference Manual
A new index page gives access to the online help system, which may also be accessed direct from
the system using <F1> as usual.
It should be noted that the PDF manuals are no longer supplied separately but may be obtained from
the on-line help by clicking
on entry to any manual.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
64
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Initial Design
10.1 Storing of CALC Output in DABACON *12.1.SP4*
Description
A new database type named ALYS is introduced in Dabacon. It is intended for any type of analysis
data. Currently, Initial Design Hydrostatics has an option to store data in this new database
Benefits
With the output from Hydrostatics available inside DABACON, the Reporting Tool with all its
customization capabilities can be used to produce reports.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine, Initial Design Hydrostatics
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
65
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
10.2 Project Data Supports Roaming Profiles
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Initial Design projects can now be used with roaming profiles and more clearly shared between users.
The data is now stored in the local and roaming application data folders for each user. Two new top
nodes have been added to the tree view to reflect this ―Local‖ and ―Shared‖. Projects created under a
shared node are available to a user with a roaming profile regardless of the machine logged in to.
Benefits
It will now be possible to use project definition data regardless of the machine logged into when using
roaming profiles. Project definitions can be shared between users.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
The first time the project tool is started the information stored in the old format will be read and
transferred to the new Local node in the projects tree. After this the old format will only be read by
previous versions of the project tool.
For More Information
Only noted here
Affected Programs
AVEVA Initial Design applications.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
66
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.3 Sorting points in PACE
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP3*
Description
Previously the only method of sorting points in a curve in PACE was to select them in the data points
grid. It is now possible to sort a group of selected points in the graphical window via a popup menu.
The group of points that should be sorted in ascending/descending order is selected by picking a first
point and then use the SHIFT key to extend the selection. The sorting popup menu is made visible by
a mouse right click
A manual sort option is also available, similar to that one in Lines. This works by selecting the first
point and then using the CTRL key to extend the selection. Right click and select ―Sort in selection
order‖. The selected points are sorted in the order they were selected.
Benefits
The points of a curve can easily be sorted in the graphical window.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Lines/PACE
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
67
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.4 Oil outflow
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP3*
Description
Calculations for cargo oil outflow according to MARPOL Regulation 23 – Accidental oil flow
performance have been added to the existing Oil Outflow module of AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics and
Hydrodynamics. The module already included calculations of fuel oil tank outflow according to
MARPOL Regulation 12A – Oil fuel tank protection.
Benefits
Ensures compliance with statutory regulations.
Compatibility constraints
None.
For more information
See User Guide Initial Design / Hydrostatics / Major Task s / Regulations / Oil Fuel Outflow.
Affected programs
AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
68
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
10.5 Lines - New Grid in PACE
Description
To improve the usability of the grid used in PACE, the way the grid is displayed has changed from a
graph paper like grid to a less intrusive intersection point based grid. The rulers have been made
more distinct and locked to the sides of the viewport. The coordinate axis are also displayed.
Benefits
A less intrusive grid and more distinct rulers make it easier to work when geometry and grid coincide.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
69
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Lines
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
70
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
10.6 Lines - Individual Tuft Size in Views in PACE
Description
It is now possible to have different size of tufts in individual views in PACE.
Benefits
This makes fairing easier when the scale difference is large between individual views.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
See User Guide Initial Design / Lines / Screen Based Reference Guide / Patch and Curve Editor /
Graphics View Control.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Lines
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
71
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
10.7 Lines - Macro Editor in PACE
Description
The Lines macro editor is now available in PACE, and can be used in a similar fashion as in Lines.
Recording of macros however should be avoided as not all PACE actions will generate corresponding
macro commands.
Benefits
There is now a possibility to run macros without interaction, without having to switch to Lines.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Lines.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
72
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
10.8 Lines - Clines Project Limits (PMB and Mid Ships)
Description
Cline projection limits have been extended to include a general Midbody limit. In this way, giving e.g.
the upper limit as Midbody, a pline would stop at either the FOS, FOB or PMB Aft curve, whichever is
the aft most point.
Benefits
The parallel surface limit can be automatically set for curves which has a Cline as source.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Only noted her.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Lines
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
73
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
10.9 Lines - Curve Highlighting
Description
An enhancement to the highlighting of the current curve has been implemented in the curve grid. The
currently selected curve from the Curve tree view is now highlighted in the curves grid. Selecting a
curve in a graphical view will also scroll into view and highlight the corresponding curve in the curve
grid.
Benefits
It is more apparent which curve is currently selected
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Lines
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
74
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.10
User Bulletin
Lines - Locking and Fitting to a Plane
Description
Curves can now be fitted and locked to arbitrary planes. Curves lying in the principal planes (for
example boundary curves) are already locked and fitted, and as such the items below are not
applicable. For both locking and fitting, specification of the plane for the curve can be done in two
ways – either using automatically determined points, or manually via selec ted points.
Benefits
Easier fairing and manipulation of planar curves not lying in a principal plane.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Lines
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
75
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.11
User Bulletin
Lines - Curve Interrogation
Description
Coordinates and angles at X/Y/Z values can be examined for a curve. The function is activated by the
right mouse button and values are shown on the output window.
Benefits
Coordinates can be derived for inserting a point into a curve
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Lines
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
76
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.12
User Bulletin
Lines – Angle Curve Creation/Editing
Description
It is now possible to create and manipulate angle curves in PACE. The angle curves can be set active
as other curves and are visually superimposed on the existing orthogonal and oblique views. They
can therefore be changed graphically or edited by changing the values in the Data Point grid.
The angle curves can be created by function Curve, Create Angle Curve and the angle coordinates
are put by means of the dialog box.
Benefits
The angle curves can more easily be changed in PACE.
Compatibility Constraints
None
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
77
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Lines
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
78
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.13
User Bulletin
Lines - User Local View
Description
An oblique local view based either on a locked curve or on a user specified coordinate system can be
created. The view context menu in an oblique view contains the items ―Local (specified axes)…‖ and
―Local (from selected curve)‖. The second option is available when a curve locked in an arbitrary
plane is selected. The first option is always available.
From selected curve
When available, selecting this option will switch the view to an oblique view with a local coordinate
system defined by the plane of the selected curve. The title bar will change to reflect the curve on
which the view is based, and the axes it is defined by.
Specified axes
Selecting this option will provide a dialog where an arbitrary Cartesian coordinate system can be
specified. The user entered coordinates are normalized and adjusted to ensure the axes are
orthogonal. To ensure a right handed system is defined, the z axis may require negation. If the user
coordinates can be used to form a system, the resulting system is displayed as edits are made.
Clicking ok will switch the view to one defined by the calculated axes.
Benefits
Makes definition and fairing of planar curves easier when they are not located in a principal plane.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
79
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Lines
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
80
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.14
User Bulletin
Corrugated RSOs
Description
Corrugated bulkheads with stools created in Surface & Compartment, using the Corrugation or Stool
tab in the Internal Surfaces dialog, now has an extended representation which closes the design loop
between Surface & Compartment and Structural Design for these RSOs.
As previous a parametrically defined bulkhead will be stored in the model, but alongside it a geometric
identical copy will be stored, but instead of the parametric definition it will be defined by using sheer
and camber curves. In this new representation the stools and corrugation are individual entities.
These new entities will be possible to edit in the same way a knuckled bulkhead is today.
The above allows for creation of corrugated bulkheads with stools in Surface & Compartment,
releasing them to design, further editing with Structural Design tools and updating Surface &
Compartment with the changes via the ―Use Design‖ function.
Benefits
Enables RSO modelling to be made in a more flexible way
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Geometry.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
81
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.15
User Bulletin
Compartment Export/Import in XML Format
Description
A new open XML-based format is introduced to support import/export of compartments. The format
covers compartment definition and content data as well as category information.
The export and import functionality is accessed through added functionality in the ―File – Export‖ and
―File – Import‖ functions.
Benefits
Open format for describing compartments.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Structural Design / Functions Overview / Functions in the XML Menu.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Geometry
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
82
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.16
User Bulletin
Release of Weights to Calc
Description
The default settings for releasing weight of objects to the Hydrostatics and Hydrodynamics application
have been changed. Previously the default was to release the weight . This will now be set to off. As
before the setting of this is done in the weight analysis dialog,
Benefits
Ease of use.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Surface & Compartment
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
83
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.17
User Bulletin
Axis Setting Reflected in Dialogs
Description
In Hydrostatics/Hydrodynamics it has been possible to set the direction of the x-axis and y-axis to be
used in reports. This setting is now also reflected in dialogs in Hydrostatics/Hydrodynamics
application.
Benefits
Ease of use.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics
AVEVA Marine Hydrodynamics
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
84
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.18
User Bulletin
Sea Water Density
Description
A different sea water density can now be specified for each Loading Condition. The sea water density
is entered on the Options page of the Loading Condition dialog.
Benefits
Ease of use.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics and Hydrodynamics
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
85
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.19
User Bulletin
Multiple Lightship Weights
Description
Hydrostatics/Hydrodynamics can now handle alternative lightweights. More than one Lightweight
module can be created in the General Particulars folder. A combo box for selecting which lightweight
to use, has been added to the Loading module dialog. The Deterministic, Loading Sequence and
Summary Table modules have also been updated to handle multiple lightweights.
Benefits
Ease of use.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics and Hydrodynamics
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
86
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.20
User Bulletin
Oil Outflow
Description
A new Oil Outflow module has been added to the Regulations folder. This calculates the oil outflow
performance according to MARPOL Regulation 12A p11 concerning the probability of oil outflow from
damaged fuel tanks.
Benefits
Ensures compliance with the statutory regulations.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Initial Design / Hydrostatics / Major Task s / Regulations / Oil Fuel Outflow.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
87
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.21
User Bulletin
Inclining Experiment
Description
The Inclining module In Hydrostatics/Hydrodynamics has been corrected and revised according to
comments received from users. The calculations and output should now fully comply with statutory
requirements.
Benefits
Ensures compliance with the statutory regulations.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics and Hydrodynamics
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
88
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.22
User Bulletin
Probabilistic Stability to SOLAS 2009 Rules
Description
The Probabilistic Stability module In Hydrostatics/Hydrodynamics has been updated to include the
latest 2009 SOLAS cargo/passenger ship rules. The damage case generation algorithm for multi -zone
damage has also been revised to bring it in line with the recommended interpretation of the rules.
The implementation also provides for different damage permeabilities for different loading conditions,
as specified in the rules.
Benefits
Ensures compliance with the latest statutory regulations.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Initial Design / Hydrostatics / Major Task s / Probabilistic Stability.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics and Hydrodynamics
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
89
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.23
User Bulletin
Damage Case Summary Table
Description
A summary of damage cases is now included in the loading condition intact condition report. The
table is included by default, but there is an option for turning it off.
Benefits
A concise way of reporting damage case results.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Initial Design / Hydrostatics / Operator’s Instructions / Calculations / Stability
Calculations / Damage Scenarios.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics and Hydrodynamics
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
90
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.24
User Bulletin
MODU Wind Heeling Moments
Description
The IMO Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit method of calculating the wind force and moment on the
structure has been implemented. To use this feature, all exposed above and under water elements,
must be defined as compartments and assigned to a special category with an identifier, SL, and
name, Sail. The program assumes that the specified Structural permeability is the Shape Factor for
these elements. Also the wind moment must be set to the MODU wind moment, in the Criteria file.
Benefits
Allows stability assessment for MODU's.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Initial Design / Hydrostatics / Major Task s / Rig Wind Heeling Moments in Initial
Design.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics and Hydrodynamics.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
91
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.25
User Bulletin
Connected Compartments
Description
Compartments specified as connected to damaged compartments, are now just added to the list of
damaged compartments for the analysis and treated as being damaged to the outside waterline.
Previously, such compartments were combined to form one multi-compartment, but this meant that
only one damage permeability could be applied, which was that of the first damaged compartment.
With this new method, each connected compartment will have its own damage and probabilistic
stability permeability. The latter can vary with loading draft.
Also compartments are now connected in one direction only. Flood water will flow from the first to
second compartment, but not the other way. Note that this means that to specify flow in both
directions, two connected compartment records are now needed.
Benefits
Ensures compliance with the latest statutory regulations.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Initial Design / Hydrostatics / Screen Based Reference Guide / Dialogs in Detail /
General Particulars / Openings and Deck Edge Points and Other Data.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hydrostatics
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
92
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
10.26
User Bulletin
ABS Towing Criteria
Description
The special ABS bollard pull criterion has been added. The user must edit a local copy of the Criteria
file and specify the bollard pull heeling moment arm for the particular vessel according to the rules,
using the Edit/Criteria menu option in the program.
Benefits
Ensures compliance with the latest statutory regulations.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
maridcalc
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
93
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
11.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Hull General Functionality
11.1 New Representation of Shell Plates
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Shell plates can now be represented using a Generic Primitive created from the referenced surface
and the involved seams in that surface. The new representation gives a more exact representation
rd
when presenting graphically or when exporting to 3 party systems.
The new representation is enabled by setting the variable SBH_ENABLE_SOLID_PLA TES to YES.
With this new representation enabled the performance when creating shell plates is degraded,
however using the plates are on the same performance level as before.
Benefits
The representation of shell plates is now much more accurate with holes included if existing. The new
representation will give higher and more robust quality in various operations, e.g. Shell Plate
Compensation
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Model Concept / Run Mode Control / Control on Application Level /
Graphical Representation of Shell Plates.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
94
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
11.2 Folders in the HCMWLD
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Folders have been added below the surfaces in the node HCMWLD of the database browser. The
folders contain all plates, profiles seams and curves that are associated with the surfac e. The folder
names are shown in the picture below:
Benefits
Easier to find information
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here
Affected Programs
All AVEVA Marine Drafting based applications
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
95
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
11.3 Save Work in Inithull
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP4*
Description
If objects are updated using the Inithull software, the user is now asked if ―Save Work‖ shall be done
at exit. Previously the ―Save Work‖ was done automatically.
Benefits
The user can select to leave Inithull without saving changed objects.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Initialization Utility Program (Inithull)
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
96
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
11.4 Ship Coordinate References to RSOs
*12.1.SP3*
Description
The ship coordinate system functionality has been enhanced to be able to get alternative dimensions
when using pseudo attributes SHIPX, SHIPY and SHIPZ. The new alternative expression of
coordinates are:
X coordinates expressed as distance to a certain transversal bulkhead.
Y coordinates expressed as distance to a certain longitudinal bulkhead or as distance from
the centreline.
Z coordinates expressed as distance to a certain deck .
To get this information RSOs must exist for the bulkheads or decks and to use those RSOs for
dimensioning in the according direction the RSO attribute RSDIM has to be set to one of the values
DIMX, DIMY or DIMZ.
The reference is built up according to the rule
<RSO_name>(<X/Y/Z_position_of_RSO>) +/- <distance_from_RSO>
The ship coordinate option can be enabled in the target application by the command SHIPCO ON
(default: OFF).
Benefits
This functionality can replace customer in-house tools that were needed to get the requested
information in e.g. isometric drawings.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
See User Guide Marine Customisation / Customising Presentation of Ship Coordinates.
Affected Programs
Isodraft (AVEVA Marine only)
AVEVA Marine modules
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
97
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
11.5 Ppoints for HPREND and CPREND Elements
*12.1.SP3*
Description
The PPOS attribute for planar panel profile ends (HPREND) and shell stiffener ends (CPREND)
returns the event points in the end cut geometry. Ppoints may be retrieved for the mouldside and the
non-mouldside of the web and for the top and lower side of the flange(s).
The PPCOUNT attribute shows the total number of visible ppoints on the end cut.
The PPVI attribute returns a list of ppoint identity numbers, with the following meaning:
1 - 25
on the web mould side
26 - 50
on the web non-mould side
51 - 75
top side of first flange
76 - 100
lower side of first flange
101 - 125
top side of second flange
126 – 150
lower side of second flange
The PDIR attribute shows the direction in each ppoint.
Benefits
Flexibility.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull in Dabacon / Hull Data in Dabacon / Hull Geometry.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
98
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
11.6 Ppoints for HPLATE Elements
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP3*
Description
The PPOS attribute for planar panel plate elements (HPLATE) returns event points at plate corners.
There are 3 points for each corner, one for each material side and one for the mould plane.
PPOS index:
0 - 49 contains points related to the material side generated by the value in the attribute
DIST(1)
50 - 99 contains points related to the material side generated by the value in the attribute
DIST(2)
100 - 149 contains points related to the mould plane
The PPLS attribute returns a list of all valid PPoint indexes, while the PPVI attribute returns the visible
PPoint indexes. In the case that DIST(1) or DIST(2) equals 0.0 i.e. coincides with the mould plane,
PPVI will not contain references to the mouldplane indexes.
Benefits
Flexibility.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull in Dabacon / Hull Data in Dabacon / Hull Geometry
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Design.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
99
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
11.7 Statement Wizard Enhancements
*12.1.SP2*
Description
Some work has been put into making the statement wizard more efficient to work with. The main
areas of improvements are:
Unify over all layout of data on tabs for all components.
Make similar input the same for similar components.
Remember entered data in an intelligent way.
Graphical way of selecting which component to modify next.
Other enhancements are:
Switching ends on a stiffener now also switches the bevel and excess values.
Mandatory field markers do no longer flash. They are also removed once a value has been
entered and then performing an update or create operation.
Benefits
The enhancements made to the statement wizard will make designers more productive by
remembering entered data which can be reused for components of the same type. Make sure the
layout for similar components follow the same rules. Support the designer in common operations such
as selecting a new component to modify by selecting in a drawing.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Design.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
100
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
11.8 Attribute MODREF
*12.1.SP2*
Description
The MODREF attribute will now return an array of model references and the syntax has been
extended from MODREF to MODREF/S.
Benefits
An element with this attribute can now return multiple references. An example of such an element is
the notch of a planar panel stiffener, which can refer many seams.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
101
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
11.9 Reuse of Seam and Profile Numbers
Description
When using the option of free naming for seams and shell profiles the same number will be given to
objects with the same name within one session. I.e. creating seam seam_at_fr32 results in the seam
getting the number 123. If the seam is deleted and then a new seam is created with the same name in
the same session the new seam will get number 123. If the seam ―seam_at_fr32‖ is deleted and then
the application is restarted and a new seam with the same name, ―seam_at_fr32‖, is created then it
will not get the same number. The same is relevant for shell profiles as well.
When starting batch generation of seams and shell profiles from the interactive application, the
information needed to recreate any deleted seams and shell profiles with the same number as they
had in the interactive application session, will be sent to the batch process.
Benefits
The name sequence database is better utilised and thus less numbers will be used.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
102
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
11.10
Multiple Negatives when Designing User Defined
End Cut
Description
The current implementation of user-defined end cuts has been restricted to only one negative
extrusion and to cut angles less or equal to 90 degrees.
This has now been improved, allowing any number of negative extrusions defined in any plane, e.g.
one negative extrusion used to define the end cut for the web and another one defining the flange end
cut. Furthermore, extensions of the profile is supported, allowing also cut angles greater than 90
degrees.
Benefits
The improvement makes it possible to define any type of complex end cuts
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Setup, Customisation and Standards / Profiles in AVEVA
Marine / Profile Endcuts in AVEVA Marine / Customer Set-up of Endcut Standard / User Defined
Endcut / Setting up User Defined Endcuts.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
103
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
11.11
User Bulletin
Split of Hull Notes and Posno
Description
The identification of a Hull Note and Position number has been split in the way that a Hull Note is
recognized as a note and not as a position number.
Benefits
Possibility to handle all the Hull Notes without disturbing the position numbers in e.g. delete notes/all.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
104
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
11.12
User Bulletin
Enhanced Selection Filtering
Description
The OR syntax can now be used when defining filters in the Selection Tool.
In the general Selection Tool different kind of filters are used to extract the model items both when
defining the scope of plane panels and the groups within these panels. The filters can be used both
for selecting blocks or panels with wildcards, and by using the scheme syntax to select panels or
groups.
The wildcard characters % and * represents any single character and any number of characters
respectively. But certain selections could not be made, e.g. a selection of both stiffeners and flanges
was not possible because making a filter accepting stiffeners will exclude flanges and vice versa.
Likewise selecting only the blocks AB123 and AB124 but not the other blocks with names starting with
AB12 was not possible.
This can now be done using the vertical bar character | as the OR operator. The two alternative
patterns must be surrounded by parentheses having the OR operator between them.
E.g. in the example above with the two blocks the expression (AB123|AB124) will only accept
panels belonging to these two blocks. Note that no blanks are added around operator and
parenthesis. (AB1%%-FR*|AB2%%-FR*) will accept panels with a name containing the letters FR
and starting in AB1 or AB2.
To select stiffeners and flanges with a material grade equal to A23 the expression can be
(STI|FLA)*, QUA=A23*;
The parenthesis are necessary to define the two alternate patterns separating the OR clause from the
common part of the filter. If the parentheses are left out they are added at the beginning and the end
of the filter which may give unexpected results. E.g. if the parentheses where left out in the example
above only the flanges would match as the stiffener pattern will only be the three charac ters STI
which doesn‘t match any statement.
Benefits
By using the OR operator in defining the filters a greater variety of panels and groups can be collected
in one selection.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
105
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
11.13
User Bulletin
Blocks and Panels from Tree View
Description
Like some other functions within Hull Design, the Panel Scope of a Selection can now also be defined
by picking blocks or panels via a tree view dialog in addition to the existing picking from the picture.
Benefits
Tree view available for picking blocks and panel for the Panel Scope
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
106
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
11.14
User Bulletin
Set-up of a Project to Use Free Naming
Description
Today the environment variable SBH_FREE_SEAMPROF_NAMES is used to control if a project is
set in free naming mode or not. From now on this has to be set using the InitHull application.
Benefits
It will no longer be possible to change this setting if seams or shell profiles have been created in a
project.
Compatibility Constraints
The variable will still be used as a last resort for determining whether the project allows free naming.
However, as soon as the hull reference object has been recreated in InitHull, the variable will not be
used any longer in that project.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Detail Design.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
107
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
11.15
User Bulletin
Hole Annotation Enhancement
Description
The possibility to annotate holes in symbolic views has been extended with more customisation
possibilities. The following 3 default values have been added to the Hull Modelling default file:
HOLE_ANNOTATE _SIGN
The sign in the dimension string between the dimensions (e.g. the X in HO200X500). Default value is
X.
HOLE_ANNOTATE _USE _TYPE
If set the text in the hole type will be omitted (e.g. HO200X500 will be 200X500). The value is unset
by default.
HOLE_AN_MIN_TE XT_HEIGHT
The minimum text height for the hole annotation. Default value is 2.0.
Benefits
Enables the user to control the annotate hole note better.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Planar Modelling / Default File of Planar Modelling / Picture
Derivation.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
108
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
11.16
User Bulletin
Hull Qualities in CATA
Description
The definition of the Hull qualities has been moved from the file assigned to the environment variable
SBH_QUALITY_LIS T to the catalogue in the Property World. The quality elements can be defined in
Paragon using the PML script HullCreateQualityList. Input to the script is the file defined by the
environment variable SBH_QUALITY_LIS T.
Benefits
This change is beneficial for projects using Global.
Compatibility Constraints
The qualities must be defined on cata.
For More Information
Further details are given in the 12.0 to 12.1 Upgrade manual.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
109
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
11.17
Shellx with Plate Scantlings, Position Numbers
and Material Quality
Description
The shell expansion view is now created with plate thickness, plate quality and plate position number
annotated on each plate. Furthermore, each plate is drawn with a hatch pattern chosen to display the
plate thickness that is used.
The user can control the visibility of this information in two ways:
By using the function Symbolic View->Curved Hull View->Properties and picking a shell expansion
view. The user will get the possibility to display or hide the plate information. Furthermore, if plate
hatching is chosen to be shown, an accompanying legend can also be created that shows each used
hatch pattern and the thickness it represents.
The shell expansion view is initially presented with shown information controlled by new keywords
available in the default file:
SHX_DRAW_PLATES = TEXT
Plates are shown with plate thickness annotated
= DRAW
Plates are shown with hatch patterns representing
the plate thickness
= NOT SET
Plates are shown with plate thickness information
hidden (default)
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
110
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
SHX_SHOW_POSNO
User Bulletin
when given, plates are shown with position number annotated
= NOT SET
SHX_SHOW_MATQ
Plates are shown with position number hidden
(default)
when given, plates are shown with material quality annotated
= NOT SET
Plates are shown with material quality hidden
(default)
Benefits
Visual overview of plate thicknesses in shell expansion view.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Curved Modelling / Interactive Functions, Curved Hull
Menu / Curved Panel.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
111
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
11.18
User Bulletin
New Dialog when Setting Functional Descriptions
Description
The dialog for the function Hull Tools > Functional Description has been changed. The following
dialog is now presented when activating the function:
First select an interval from the drop-down list. This interval represents either a component on a
planar or curved panel or a planar or curved panel. When the selection is made, the functional
descriptions that are specifically defined for this interval will be presented and possible to select. A
Tick-box is available to show all system defined functional descriptions in case these are the ones to
be set on components or panels. It‘s also possible to key in any integer value. Once the selection i s
made, the use of the OK button will hide the dialogue and the user is requested to pick components
or panels depending on the interval that was selected. Picked elements will be updated with the
selected functional description. Involved objects are made active before the update and it‘s necessary
to apply the changes to get the update confirmed.
Benefits
Easier update of functional descriptions
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
112
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Planar Modelling / Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Functions /
Hull Tools.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
113
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
11.19
User Bulletin
Increased Number of Surfaces
Description
The number of surfaces to be used in the Hull system is limited. With the possibility to add parametric
surfaces, the limit of 100 is easily reached. To be able to add and handle more surfaces, the limit has
been increased to 1000. This affects the Hull default keyword SURFACES, where the surface
numbers to be used in Create View are listed.
Benefits
More surfaces can be handled
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Marine Planar and Curved Hull
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
114
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
12.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Surface Manager
Description
Surface Manager is a new module that allows transfer (import/export) of surfaces from/to ext ernal
systems by the use of neutral standards. It also offers tools for the assessment of the quality of the
rd
imported surface and if needed can repair selected defects detected in the surface coming from 3
party.
Surface Manager requires a specific license.
Benefits
Key features are:
Import surfaces into AVEVA Marine projects
Graphically displays the layout of the surface
Finds problem areas and shows them graphically
If possible optimises the surface by removing problem areas
Extract curves for use in Hull Design
Extracts surfaces from existing AVEVA Marine projects
Exports surfaces to file
Possible to select only part of a surface to export
Mirror surfaces in the centre line plane
Supports the most commonly spread formats: IGES, SAT, DML, STEP AP203
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
See User Guide AVEVA Surface Manager / Tools and Functions.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
115
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
12.1 Surface Analysis
*12.1.SP3*
Description
Functions have been added to Space Management and to Surface Manager to analyse the
hydrostatic parameters of a surface or to do tank capacity analysis on a compartment arrangement.
The added functions are not complete and not intended for productive use, but are available for
evaluation and to give comments for further development. For this reason, all documentation is
currently only within this release note. In final versions, it will be part of all official documentation.
12.1.1 Surface analysis
Surface analysis can be used on surfaces that are closed or can be closed by a plane. The analysis
will calculate physical properties of closed volumes to use for the stability analysis.
There are two analyses available, hydrostatic parameters and tank capacities.
Hydrostatic parameters
Given a surface and drafts, hydrostatic properties can be obtained for the surface.
Displacement
Centre of buoyancy
Centre of floatation
Midship area
Water plane area
Block, midship, prismatic and water plane area coefficients
This analysis is available both in Surface Manager and Space Management.
Space Management
The calculation of hydrostatic parameters is activated by using the Space Management function Calc
Hydrostatic Parameters. When activating, the dialogue below is presented to the user:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
116
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Select a surface or envelope and enter one or more drafts separated by commas. The calculation is
made on a closed volume. If a non-closed surface is selected, then the function tries to close the
surface using the given drafts.
The result of the calculation is presented as a table in the current drawing. A n example of such table
is shown below:
Surface Manager
To activate this function in Surface Manager, right click on the surface in the tree browser and select
Calculate Hydrostatics in the menu. The dialogue below is presented, where the ship particulars
and the draft of the ship must be given. The analysis is activated by pressing the Calculate button.
The result from the calculation is presented in the output window.
12.1.2 Tank Capacities
Given a space arrangement this function will reply with tables of tanks grouped on purpose, the tables
are displayed on the current drawing. The following information are displayed, in the table head the
purpose is shown and for each tank the following properties are shown,
Id
Start/End frame for the tank
Volume
Weight full
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
117
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Centre of tank, LCG/TCG/VCG
Density of the tank content
This calculation is available in Space Management on arrangements of type Compartment.
Space Management
The calculation of Tank Capacities is activated by using the Space Management function Tank
Capacities. When activating, the dialogue below is presented to the user:
Select a Space world and compartment arrangement. The tank report will be added to the current
drawing with calculated properties presented in tables. An example of such tables is shown below:
Benefits
Analysis tools available to provide analysis where needed will shorten design time.
Compatibility Constraints
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
118
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
None
For more information
Only noted here
Affected Programs
AVEVA Space Management.
AVEVA Surface Manager
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
119
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
12.2 Hydrostatics Data Calculated for Surface *12.1.SP3*
Description
It is now possible to get hydrostatics data for a surface. The following is presented for a surface of
which some are given as input, length between perpendiculars, breadth, draft, displacement, LCB,
VCB, block coefficient, midship section area, midship section area coefficient, waterplane area, LCF,
prismatic coefficient, waterplane coefficient.
Benefits
Allow checking of a hull surface hydrostatics properties.
Compatibility constraints
None
For more information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Surface Manager
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
120
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
12.3 Difference Between two Surfaces *12.1.SP2*
Description
It is now possible to compare two surfaces by creating sample points on one and comparing them to
the other directly within in the surface manager.
The surface manager now also displays the difference between the sample points and the surface
graphically. This is done by representing each difference as a line with a height proportional to the
size of the measured difference. You will still get a report as well.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
121
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Benefits
A visual interpretation of the differences between two surfaces will help in taking the correct decisions
when replacing one surface with another.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide AVEVA Surface Manager / Appendices / Create Sample Points .
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Surface Manager
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
122
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
12.4 Surface Manager Replacing Surface Server
Description
For a long time the only way of using an external surface with Aveva Marine has been through the
surface server. This has limited the type of operations performed on the surface and control of the
quality, ―fit for purpose‖, of the surface.
Starting with AVEVA Marine 12.1 all surfaces have to be released into the database and the surface
server will not be used. To help with this when working with surfaces created by non AVEVA software,
there is a new application, the AVEVA Surface Manager. It can import surfaces in IGES, SAT, STEP
and dml formats. It also has a number of features for checking and repairing the surface.
Benefits
More advanced operations can be performed on the surface and the user can check the externally
created surface before importing it to the database.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
See User Guide AVEVA Surface Manager
Affected Programs
None.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
123
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
12.5 Surface Manager – Compare Surfaces
Surface manager has a function which can compare surfaces in Tribon M3SP6 and AVEVA Marine
12.1. To create the input from Tribon M3SP6 there is a program sj708 that int ersects a surface and
writes a text file with sample points that can be read by Surface Manager compare function. To get
the program sj708, please contact regional support representatives.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
124
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
13.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Space Management
Description
Space Management is a new application that can be used to create and manage an automatic
subdivision of a ship into spaces. Space Management can also be used for analysis, planning,
monitoring and follow up on space arrangements generated for different purposes such as:
SOLAS classification of compartments
Design Zones
Compartmentation and stability assessment
Sub-contractors subdivision
Production Planning
Painting areas
Fire/Noise/Thermal insulation plans
Etc.
Space arrangements can be reused in all other modelling disciplines and as t he design evolves,
spaces can be interrogated regarding all objects within each space.
Space Management requires a specific license.
Benefits
Key features are:
A new tool for simulations, estimations and decisions , de-risking design of more complex
ships
Better productivity for GA activities and drawings
Better cost follow-up by getting early and precise estimates of e.g. insulation material or
painting areas
Increased production efficiency by optimisation of block structure
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
See User Guide Space Management
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Space Management
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
125
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
13.1 Surface Analysis
*12.1.SP3*
Description
Functions have been added to Space Management and to Surface Manager to analyse the
hydrostatic parameters of a surface or to do tank capacity analysis on a compartment arrangement.
The added functions are not complete and not intended for productive use, but are available for
evaluation and to give comments for further development. For this reason, all document ation is
currently only within this release note. In final versions, it will be part of all official documentation.
13.1.1 Surface analysis
Surface analysis can be used on surfaces that are closed or can be closed by a plane. The analysis
will calculate physical properties of closed volumes to use for the stability analysis.
There are two analyses available, hydrostatic parameters and tank capacities.
Hydrostatic parameters
Given a surface and drafts, hydrostatic properties can be obtained for the surface.
Displacement
Centre of buoyancy
Centre of floatation
Midship area
Water plane area
Block, midship, prismatic and water plane area coefficients
This analysis is available both in Surface Manager and Space Management.
Space Management
The calculation of hydrostatic parameters is activated by using the Space Management function Calc
Hydrostatic Parameters. When activating, the dialogue below is presented to the user:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
126
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Select a surface or envelope and enter one or more drafts separated by commas. The calculation i s
made on a closed volume. If a non-closed surface is selected, then the function tries to close the
surface using the given drafts.
The result of the calculation is presented as a table in the current drawing. An example of such table
is shown below:
Surface Manager
To activate this function in Surface Manager, right click on the surface in the tree browser and select
Calculate Hydrostatics in the menu. The dialogue below is presented, where the ship particulars
and the draft of the ship must be given. The analysis is activated by pressing the Calculate button.
The result from the calculation is presented in the output window.
13.1.2 Tank Capacities
Given a space arrangement this function will reply with tables of tanks grouped on purpose, the tables
are displayed on the current drawing. The following information are displayed, in the table head the
purpose is shown and for each tank the following properties are shown,
Id
Start/End frame for the tank
Volume
Weight full
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
127
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Centre of tank, LCG/TCG/VCG
Density of the tank content
This calculation is available in Space Management on arrangements of type Compartment.
Space Management
The calculation of Tank Capacities is activated by using the Space Management function Tank
Capacities. When activating, the dialogue below is presented to the user:
Select a Space world and compartment arrangement. The tank report will be added to the current
drawing with calculated properties presented in tables. An example of such tables is shown below:
Benefits
Analysis tools available to provide analysis where needed will shorten design time.
Compatibility Constraints
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
128
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
None
For more information
Only noted here
Affected Programs
AVEVA Space Management.
AVEVA Surface Manager
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
129
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
13.2 Space Definition Data and Re-Create of Space
Arrangements
*12.1.SP3*
Description
The definition data used when creating space arrangements is stored in two ways; as an XML file in
the project (already available) and as definition data in the database together with the space
arrangement (new in this release).
The new storing of definition data can be used to recreate an arrangement when any of the involved
surfaces or RSOs has been changed. This is done by using the function Space Management->Select
and Create by giving the name of the arrangement that needs to be recreated. The function will get all
relevant data and the arrangement can be recreated
The new functionality is activated only if the optional database upgrade is done. See separate release
note with title Optional Upgrade.
Benefits
Enables the recreation of space arrangements.
Compatibility Constraints
The XML format has been changed to better fit with the new possibilities. The consequence of this is
that old XML input files can not be used anymore
For More Information
See User Guide Space Management / Functions Overview / Functions in the Space Management
Menu / Select and Create.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Space Management
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
130
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
13.3 Space Interrogation API
*12.1.SP3*
Description
The Space Interrogation API aims to extend some of the functionality within the Space Management
module by including a set of new Pseudo attributes. These attributes can be used to retrieve
information about particular spaces such as the closest face or adjoining spaces. They can also find
out details about an RSO‘s planar panel and its thickness.
Benefits
New SPMAS Attribute – Finds the adjoining space of a given space based on a user defined
point.
New SPMCF Attribute - Finds the closest face of a given space based on a user defined
point.
New SPMRSO Attribute – Finds the RSO of a selected face.
New RSOPP Attribute – Finds the Planar panel of the selected RSO with a user defined point.
New RSOPPT Attribute – Finds the thickness of a planar panel from the selected RSO and
point.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Space Management / Basic Concepts / Space Worlds and Space Arrangements /
Attributes / Pseudo Attributes
Affected Programs
AVEVA Space Management
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
131
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
14.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Hull Structural Design
14.1 New Block Divide User Interface and Process
*12.1.SP4*
Description
The Block Divide function has a new user interface based on a tree view.
Also the process is broken down in steps where all other functions are available between the steps
such as dragging objects into the canvas or checking panel definitions.
The panels collected to take part in the process can be selected freely and need not belong to a
single block.
Selected panels can be added or removed during the process. Cutters and Target Blocks can also be
added during the process.
The user decides the order between cutting and sorting of the selected panels.
All cutters are applied to the panels as temporary seams that can be visualized and optionally
adjusted before the division takes place.
The new Block Divide function handles all cases that were handled by the previous version except for
the case where a Design block is used to populate a number of Production blocks in a multi -view
project. To reach this functionality set the environment variable SBH_OLD_BLO_DIV to TRUE. This
will make the previous wizard-based Block Divide function to start instead.
Benefits
Better overview through subdivision of the Block Divide process into steps
Greater flexibility as the order of the steps is controlled by the user
Enhanced quality as the result from each step can be verified and visualised
Compatibility Constraints
None
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
132
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Structural Design / Block Division.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
133
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
14.2 Finite Element Modeller – Knuckled Panels *12.1.SP4*
Description
Knuckles in knuckled panels are now considered to some extent in idealisation and FE modelling.
When the bending radius is larger than 0.3 * intended element size the knuckle will be part of the
idealised or FE model. Smaller radii are neglected.
Benefits
Improved accuracy.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Structural Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
134
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
14.3 FEM – Folder in FEMWLD
*12.1.SP4*
Description
A folder is created beneath a FEMWLD element when it contains FEMIMGs.
Benefits
Improved structure of FEM related data.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here
Affected Programs
Hull Structural Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
135
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
14.4 RSO CSV format update
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP3*
Description
RSO information can be extracted to a CSV file and used for updating functional properties.
Furthermore, the same formatted file can be used to create new RSOs with the restriction that
definition is made in principle planes with one face only.
The boundary definition data is now specified in an unambiguous way on the second row of each
RSO. Definition data consists of an envelope name and bounding information given in a defined
order.
For a RSO in a X plane the order is SB, PS, TOP, BOT.
For a RSO in a Y plane the order is TOP, BOT, AFT, FOR
For a RSO in a Z plane the order is AFT, FOR, SB, PS
The previously existing limit data is not used when defining a new RSO anymore, this information is
only used when adding functional properties on limits.
Benefits
Definition data is now unambiguous
Compatibility Constraints
Old CSV files needs to be updated if the intention is to create new RSOs
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Structural Design / Batch Utilities / Extracting RSO Information and Hull
Structural Design / Batch Utilities / Updating RSO Information.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structure Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
136
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
14.5 Spaces in Structural Design Export
*12.1.SP3*
Description
Spaces from Space Management are now exported in the same way as compartments from Initial
Design.
Benefits
More complete data
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Structural Design / Function Overview / Functions in the XML Menu / Export /
Structural Design Export
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Structural Design.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
137
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
14.6 Patran Interface
*12.1.SP2*
Description
An interface to the pre- and postprocessor Patran has been created. Via the menu-item Analysis |
Export FE Model to Patran PCL FE models can now be exported as Patran session files using the
Patran Command Language. Processing this file in Patran will create the geometry, materials and
element properties and store them in the Patran database for further pre-processing and analysis.
Benefits
This interface provides a direct link to Patran and Nastran.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
138
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
14.7 New Options when Creating Envelopes
Description
The function Envelope has been updated with an option to define an envelope as an axis -parallel box
in space. The dialogue has changed as shown below:
When a new envelope is defined, the tick-box ‗Generate from Box‘ can be used. When ticked the
boundary list will be dimmed and the key-in fields for minimum and maximum points are enabled. If
data for general particulars is available, these will be fetched and added to the key-in fields when
using the function Box from GP. The fetched values are extended with one meter in all directions.
When the limits selected to generate an envelope generate more than one closed volume there is
now the possibility to select which one to use as the desired envelope, by specifying a point inside the
created envelope.
Benefits
The new possibility to generate envelopes enables RSO modelling to be made in a more flexibl e way.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design and Space Management.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
139
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
14.8 RSO Change Envelope
Description
A new function RSO Change Envelope has been added, which allows the user to move RSOs from
one envelope to another. When moved, the RSO is recreated in the target envelope. The following
dialog is presented when the function is activated:
When an envelope is selected from the drop-down list, all RSOs belonging to this envelope are
presented in the list. When a target envelope is selected, one or many RSOs can be selected and
added to the target envelope. The added RSOs are recreated in the new envelope by selecting Apply
or OK.
Benefits
Enables RSO modelling to be made in a more flexible way.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Structural Design / Functions Overview / Functions in the Project Menu /
Envelope and AVEVA Space Management / Functions Overview / Functions in the Project Menu /
Envelope.
Affected Programs
Structural Design
Space Management
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
140
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
14.9 RSO Recreate
Description
A new function ―RSO Recreate‖ has been added, which recreates the geometry of the RSO based on
the current definition of limiting objects and the envelope. The function is activated from the RSO
menu, when right-clicking a RSO or as a right-click menu option in the function ―RSO Property‖.
When the function is activated from the RSO menu, the user is asked to pick an RSO in the drawing.
By using the Option button, the user can select all RSOs within a view on the drawing.
When the function is activated within the function ―RSO Property‖, the user can select to recreate the
indicated RSO or all RSOs.
When the function is activated by right-clicking the geometry of an RSO, the indicated RSO is
recreated.
Benefits
Enables RSO modelling to be made in a more flexible way.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Structural Design / Functions Overview / Functions in the Functional Structure
Menu / RSO and AVEVA Space Management / Functions Overview / Functions in the Functional
Structure Menu / RSO.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design and Space Management
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
141
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
14.10
User Bulletin
RSO Rename
Description
A new function RSO Rename has been added, which renames a RSO, updates all panels located in
the renamed RSO and updates all other RSOs that are topologically dependent of the renamed RSO.
All other topological dependences are currently not updated, e.g. hull panels using the RSO as
boundary limit needs to be manually updated.
The function is activated from the RSO menu, when right-clicking a RSO or as a right-click menu
option in the function RSO Property.
Benefits
Enables RSO modelling to be made in a more flexible way.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Structural Design / Functions Overview / Functions in the Functional Structure
Menu / RSO and AVEVA Space Management / Functions Overview / Functions in the Functional
Structure Menu / RSO.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Space Management
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
142
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
14.11
User Bulletin
Naming of Multiply Copied RSOs
Description
The naming of multiply copied RSOs is improved in the following way:
If name XXX is given as target name and multiple copies are requested, then the copied RSOs are
named XXX, XXX1, XXX2, … XXXn
If name XXX10 is given as target name and multiple copies are requested, then the copied RSOs are
named XXX10, XXX11, XXX12, … XXXn
If name XXX10(10) is given as target name and multiple copies are requested, then the copied RSOs
are named XXX10, XXX20, XXX30, … XXXn
Benefits
More accurate naming can be defined.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See Hull Structural Design / Functions Overview / Functions in the Functional Structure Menu RSO /
Copy.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design and Space Management
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
143
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
14.12
User Bulletin
Pick Option Added in RSO KeyIn
Description
An option to pick limiting RSOs has been added in the function RSO KeyIn.
The dialogue is presented with new command buttons which will hide the dialogue and ask the user to
pick an RSO in the current drawing.
The command buttons are enabled when the function RSO KeyIn is activated from the RSO menu or
when right-clicking a RSO, but disabled when the function is activated from the RSO Property function
Benefits
Enables RSO modelling to be made in a more flexible way.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Structural Design / Functions Overview / Functions in the Functional Structure
Menu / RSO /Properties and AVEVA Space Management / Functions Overview / Functions in the
Functional Structure Menu / RSO / Properties.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design and Space Management
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
144
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
14.13
User Bulletin
Pick Option Added in RSO Edit
Description
An option to pick limiting RSOs has been added in the function ―RSO Edit‖.
The dialogue is presented with new command buttons which will hide the dialogue and ask the user to
pick an RSO in the current drawing.
The command buttons are enabled when the function ―RSO Edit‖ is activated from the RSO menu or
when right-clicking a RSO, but disabled when the function is activated from the RSO Property function
Benefits
Enables RSO modelling to be made in a more flexible way.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Structural Design / Functions Overview / Functions in the Functional Structure
Menu / RSO /Properties and AVEVA Space Management / Functions Overview / Functions in the
Functional Structure Menu / RSO / Properties.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design and Space Management
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
145
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
14.14
User Bulletin
Right Click Menu on RSO
Description
A right click menu with RSO functions has been added when right clicking RSO geometry in a
drawing.
The following menu is displayed and functions can be selected to operate on the indicated RSO:
Benefits
Enables RSO modelling to be made in a more flexible way.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Structural Design / Functions Overview / Right Click Contexts Menus and
AVEVA Space Management Functions Overview / Right Click Contexts Menus.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design and Space Management
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
146
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
14.15
User Bulletin
Stable Multi Face RSO Reference
Description
When positioning a plane panel relative to a multi face RSO either the face number or an axis aligned
ray (point) can be used. If e.g. the statement wizard is used to build up the panel and an RSO face is
picked via the graphical display the direct face number is added to the panel definition. In the panel
statement it shows as a clause of the form ―NO=<number>‖.
However if the RSO is modified it may be that the faces are renumbered and all the panels located by
the RSO may get the wrong face number reference giving unpredictable results when regenerating.
The other option to select a face within an RSO is to give a coordinate pair in the global coordinate
system, either (X,Y) or (X,Z) or (Y,Z). These coordinate pairs will geometrically describe a ray in
space. If this ray intersects an RSO face, that face will be used to define the panel plane. Using a ray
to select a face is more stable than a direct face number as it is insensitive to face renumbering.
From AVEVA Marine 12.1 the system will automatically update the panel definition provided the panel
plane is defined via an RSO face number on a multi face RSO. When st oring the panel a ray definition
will be created and added to the panel definition. The direct face number will be kept as information,
but the ray will take precedence.
At storing, if the face number is out of date it will be updated from the ray. Single face RSOs are not
affected by this development. If the ray hits multiple RSO faces, the direct RSO number is kept as the
primary definition.
Benefits
Panels with location defined by multi face RSOs will be insensitive to RSO face renumbering.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
147
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
14.16
User Bulletin
Seam from RSO
Description
A new way to define seams has been introduced. Seams can now be defined as an intersection
between an RSO and a surface.
A seam is defined by using the interactive function for creating seams. Select Surface/Surface type,
indicate the intersecting RSO.
Benefits
Enables seams to be defined as an intersection between surface and RSO.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
148
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
14.17
COR Keyword when Referencing RSOs and
Surfaces
Description
The result of using the COR keyword has been harmonised for panel, RSO and Surface references.
They now all work in the way planar panels have worked before.
Benefits
Consistency when modelling.
Compatibility Constraints
Panels created, before this release, with the COR keyword referencing RSOs and Surfaces might
change when recreated with this release.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Design and Structural Design.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
149
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
14.18
User Bulletin
Delete Surface Object from Design Database
Description
Object of type CSURF can now be deleted from database. In the administration dialog, ―Register
Surfaces‖, a new button, ―Delete‖, have been added. Selected surface will be deleted.
Note: It is not possible to delete a surface which have objects associated with it, e g the surface have
been used when creating curved hull objects.
Benefits
Improved administration of surfaces.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Structural Design / Functions Overview / Functions in the Project Menu /
Surfaces.
Affected Programs
Structural Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
150
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
14.19
User Bulletin
Block, Recreate All
Description
A new function, Recreate All, has been added to right-click menu in the Block Edit dialogue. When
activated, all blocks are recreated using the definition data stored with the blocks.
Benefits
Enables all blocks to be recreated in one operation.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Structural Design / Functions Overview / Functions in the Project Menu / Block
and AVEVA Space Management / Functions Overview / Functions in the Project Menu / Block .
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Space Management
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
151
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
14.20
User Bulletin
Right Click Menu on Blocks
Description
A right click menu showing the block edit function has been added when right clicking block geometry
in a drawing.
The following menu is displayed and the block edit or the recreate function can be selected to operate
on the indicated block:
Benefits
Enables block modelling to be made in a more flexible way.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design and Space Management
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
152
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
14.21
User Bulletin
Jumbo Panels Removed
Description
The functions handling jumbo panels have been either removed or modified to handle any kind of
planar panel. The functionality of the removed functions is covered by more recent concepts like
modelling panels on RSOs and the use of Design Panels. The term ―jumbo panel‖ is removed from
dialogs and messages and the data type (object code 1) interval previously assoc iated with them (800
– 899) is reserved for future use.
Benefits
Obsolete functions removed from the system.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
153
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
14.22
User Bulletin
FEM World for Idealised and FE Models
Description
A new top level element FEMWLD for FEM related items has been introduced. The FEM world can
contain idealised blocks (HIBLO), idealised plane (HIPAN) and curved panels (HICPAN), FE models
(FEMODL) and FE images (FEMIMG).
Idealised plane panels are now drawn in the 3D canvas according to the applied idealisation settings
(no thickness, stiffeners as lines…):
It is also possible to draw FE images in the 3D canvas for inspection purposes (example contains
shell and beam image):
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
154
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Benefits
All FEM related items can be found in one place.
Compatibility Constraints
Before running new idealisations in 12.1 a FEMWLD element needs to be created in a design
database. It is recommended to store all FEM related objects in a separate database.
Idealised models and FE models from AM 12.0 are not upgraded to AM 12.1. All FEM related objects
are deleted from the project under the upgrading process.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Structural Design /Finite Element Model.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
155
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
14.23
User Bulletin
FEM Additions
Description
Analysis | Idealise Model, Idealisation Settings:
The idealisation option *ignore if prof. height smaller than‘ has been added to filter stiffeners, pillars,
flanges and swages by their profile height.
The idealisation option ‗ignore if prof. area smaller than‘ has been added to filter stiffeners, pillars and
flanges by their profile area.
Analysis | Create FE Model:
All options to create images for investigation of FE models have been moved to the idealised block‘s
context menu. Only the options to create model images are left in the dialogue. Now two separate
images are created for beam and truss elements.
The check box Unwarp shell elements has been added. Previously unwarping was done
unconditionally. That makes it possible to create the FE model in steps applying one option after
another or in different orders. Unwarping can then be done in a separate step at the end of the
process.
Benefits
More flexible creation of idealised and FE models.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Structural Design /Finite Element Model.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
156
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
14.24
User Bulletin
FEM Improvements
Description
Handling of knuckled panels:
Knuckled main panels are now part of the idealised model. Before, idealised panels had been created
from the subpanels without creating a knuckled main panel. But then references to main panels where
no longer correct which has been solved now.
This means that a knuckled panel in the original model will be represented as a knuckled panel also in
the result from the XML Hull Steel Export as opposed to before when it was represented by the
individual subpanels exported as ordinary panels.
Symmetry issues of idealised subpanels have been solved.
Using a limiting box for idealisation:
Now the idealisation process uses the common Block Division facility for plane panels. Temporary
copies of the original panels are no longer necessary.
Benefits
Quality improved. Redundancies removed.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
157
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Hull Detailed Design
15.1 Production Support for Frameworks
*12.1.SP4*
Description
The production support for Outfit Steel models (frameworks and sub-frameworks) is improved in two
major areas:
The production support for Outfit Steel models is made using the Hull Production programs. In
AVEVA Marine 12.1SP4, this is done without using additional programs or functions. Instead
relevant programs (e.g. Automatic Generation of Parts, Weld Planning and others) are
accepting Outfit Steel models directly and production support functions within hull have got
additional functionality to select Outfit Steel models.
The automatic transfer of Outfit Steel models into hull production is now made with more
important features, e.g. bevel and excess, holes in profiles, etc. Details are given in the
documentation
Benefits
Production data for Outfit Steel is generated more easily and with more production features taken
care off.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design / PPM for Outfit Steel / Production Features for Outfit Steel .
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
158
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.2 Drag and Drop from Manu Explorer
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP4*
Description
It is now possible to drag and drop manufacturing items from the Manu Explorer into the 2D Canvas.
Benefits
The result from the plate part generation can easily be checked.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
159
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.3 Manufacturing Objects Presented in 3D Canvas
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Jig Pillar and Bending Template objects can now be drawn and be inspected in the 3D canvas. The
objects can be dragged from the manufacturing explorer and dropped into the 3D canvas. The Jig
Pillar and Bending Template objects are drawn in the coordinate system of the involved curved plates
or panels.
Benefits
The possibilities to visualize and inspect the produced manufacturing data have been improved.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
160
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.4 Show Scheme Update
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP4*
Description
The function Scheme – Show now also shows the subpanel schemes for a knuckled panel as the
Scheme – Edit function. The window now has a single Close button and also long schemes can be
scrolled all the way.
Benefits
Subpanel schemes also shown for a knuckled panel
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Only noted here
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design – Planar Modelling
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
161
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.5 Mixed FRP and Steel Project
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP4*
Description
It is now possibility to mix both FRP and Steel models within one project. This is done by setting the
variable SBH_GRP to Mixed. With this setting, it is possible to define separate Steel and FRP blocks.
When a panel, shell profile or plate is added to a FRP block the specific FRP values will be requested
in the same way as when defining in a specific FRP project.
The definition of FRP object containing set-up data is made using Inithull. This is the same for both
Mixed and specific FRP projects.
Benefits
The system supports mixed project with both Steel and FRP parts.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Setup, Customisation and Standards / (Fibre) Reinforced
Plastic Option (FRP) / Setting Up an FRP Project / Defining Block s as Steel or FRP.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design
AVEVA Marine Structure Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
162
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.6 Bevel Side Definition on Stiffeners
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP4*
Description
It has always been possible to define bevel side as -1 and +1 using the planar panel schema. The
value -1 denotes the mould side and the value +1 the material side. The Statement Wizard has now
been updated with keywords to support a similar easy definition. The new keywords Mtrl Side / Mould
Side can now be selected by the user in order to simplify the definition of bevel side. The system will
automatically calculate the direction (e.g. TOP, BOTTOM), which are the values that will be presented
when modifying the specific component.
Benefits
The users do not have to consider ship direction when defining bevel side, only material side.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structure Design
AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
163
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.7 Hole in Clips
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP4*
Description
It is now possible to define a standard hole in clips. The picture below shows the definition of these
holes using the Statement Wizard:
Benefits
The model is now more complete
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Detail Design / Planar Modelling / Design Language of Hull Modelling /
Cutout Statement.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
164
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.8 Hull Marks – User Interaction and Functionality
*12.1.SP4*
Description
User interaction of the hull mark projection function has been totally revised. Useful functionality has
been added as well.
The dialog for creation of hull marks has been remade from scratch. The improvements include the
following:
All fields have been assigned shortcut keys
Most dialog input is validated immediately
Graphical indicators per field provide help on erroneous or missing input
The text in the dialog has been revised for a more concise and user-oriented language
Hull text is selected from a list and a graphical preview of the currently selected text is shown
in the dialog
The originating position as well as the panel for projection can be picked in the current
drawing
Surface for projection is selected from a drop-down list
The auto-naming feature has been improved
Rotation is given as a single angle with the most common values in a drop-down list
A new hull text can be created without leaving the dialog
The dialog remains open until explicitly closed, making immediate adjustments easy
As an alternative to projecting along a principal axis, the text of a hull mark on a surface can be
projected in a direction varying with the surface normal at the position of each character or symbol in
the hull text.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
165
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
An existing hull mark can be modified after it has been projected. The new projection dialog allows for
subsequent adjustments directly after a hull mark is created. It is also possible to pick and modify a
hull mark previously created.
Benefits
The revised user interaction and possibility to modify a hull mark will enable much easier creation of
hull marks.
The variable projection direction for a hull mark on a surface allows for non-distorted texts also in
areas with a high degree of curvature.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Miscellaneous Functions > Hull Mark s.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structure Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
166
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
167
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.9 Parts Collection by Manufacturing Package *12.1.SP4*
Description
With additions to the parts menu dialog in plate nesting, it is now made possible to make the selection
of plate parts based on a given manufacturing package as shown in the picture below:
Benefits
Options to limit the search to a manufacturing package for finding the plate parts that are interesting
for the current nest job.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Nesting / Hull Plate Nesting / Nesting
System – Application Functions / Functions Overview / Nesting Functions / Parts Menu.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Plate Nesting application
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
168
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.10
Automatic Generation of Parts using Right-Click
*12.1.SP4*
Description
The automatic generation of parts is normally made using the Hull PPI for selection and then
background processing to actually create the parts with all production features. An additional
possibility, typically used to check the production output, is added by right -clicking on the object from
which parts shall be generated as illustrated by picture below:
The automatic part generation is made within the current process and the results can be visually
checked by simply dragging the parts from the MANU tree browser into the 2D canvas.
Benefits
The new functionality is simplifying the production design work.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Planar Modelling / User Guide / Interactive Planar Hull
Modelling Functions / Right Click .
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
169
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.11
Frame Selection in Bending Template
*12.1.SP4*
Description
In bending template application and generation of frame templates, the template are created in all
frame positions that intersect the shell plate.
New options are available in the bending template dialog ―Select frame positions‖, if this options is
marked in the dialog, the user will be able to choose which frame positions to use for creating frame
template on a shell plate or on shell plates in a curved panel.
Benefits
More flexible way to control their frame templates are created
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Aveva Marine Hull Design application
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
170
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.12
Cross-bending Template Additions
*12.1.SP4*
Description
New options have been added in the dialog for the creation of cross-bending templates. The new
options are used to control the creation of edge template and the ability to create a single template in
the U- or the V-axis.
A new output file has been added as a result of the cros s-bending template generation. The new
output is a CSV-file with corner points and distances between corner points in the developed plate
and the base plane for the template arrangement.
A new output drawing has also been added, generated if the template c alculation is made using the
new option for a single template in U- or V-axis. The drawing contains trace curves generated for the
templates that intersect the template defined as ―single template‖.
Benefits
More possibilities to control the template calculation and more production information are available.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Detail Design / Manufacturing / Curved Plates.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Bending Templates
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
171
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.13
New Options for Templates Marking
*12.1.SP4*
Description
New options for template marking have been added to control additional marking of curves on the
template and in the output sketch. The new options are controlled by three new IP‘s and also one new
statement in the input file for bending template.
New IP‘s:
•
LARGESIGHTLINEMARK – Large sight line mark on template
•
ENABLESIGHTLINEMA RK – Marking of sightline plane on developed plate
•
MARKCURVEONTEMPL – Additional curve marking on template
New statement in input file:
•
MARK_CURVE – Additional curve marking on trace curve drawing. If IP
MARKCURVEONTEMPL is set, marking of additional curves will be done on templates also.
Benefits
More possibilities to control the marking on bending templates.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Detail Design / Manufacturing / Curved Plates / Bending Templates for Shell
Plates / Running Environment / Control Information.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Bending Templates
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
172
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.14
Enhanced Part Table in Nesting Sketch
*12.1.SP4*
Description
In the Part Table in the Nesting Sketch it is now possible to add information from User Defined
Attributes (UDA).
This is controlled with the new Nesting $-value: 3131. The new $-value must be defined in the Nesting
form using the following syntax 3131:<User Defined Attribute Name> as shown in the example below:
Benefits
The contents of the Part Table are more customisable.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Nesting / Hull Plate Nesting / Initialisations
for Nesting / Forms in Nesting / Nesting Replace Texts .
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Nesting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
173
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.15
Improved Burning Sketch
*12.1.SP4*
Description
The generation of the automatic Burning Sketch in Nesting has been improved to minimise overlap
between the texts/symbols.
Benefits
The time for correcting overlapping texts/symbols in the Burning Sketch will be considerably
decreased.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Aveva Marine Hull Nesting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
174
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.16
Direction Texts During Nesting
*12.1.SP4*
Description
It is now possible to add direction texts to the parts during the nesting activity. The direction texts are
presented together with the plate part position number and are available while nesting, but not
presented on the burning sketch. The texts are not stored, but recreated if the nesting is brought up
for modifications. The presentation is controlled with the Nesting Default parameter
NEST_ADD_DIRTE XT (No/Yes).
Benefits
The orientation information of the parts is available during nesting.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Nesting / Hull Plate Nesting / Initialisations
for Nesting / Defaults.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Nesting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
175
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.17
Resorting Manufacturing Data
*12.1.SP4*
Description
There are two new functions for resorting/reordering production items in the manufacturing database.
Collections of production items can be moved and stored in a different manufacturing package and in
a different database within the current MDB. The functions are available via context menus activated
from the manufacturing tree view.
The function ―Resort all manufacturing items‖ collects all production items within the
manufacturing database and eventually moves the production items into new manufacturing
packages. The selection of manufacturing package is made using the rules attached on each
manufacturing packages.
The function ―Resort manufacturing items‖ collects all production items within a manufacturing
package and eventually moves the collected production items into new manufacturing
packages.
During the resorting operation, the rules on manufacturing packages are evaluated. If a manufacturing
parts is missing a corresponding design element, then the production items itself is used to find an
appropriate manufacturing package.
Benefits
The ability to resort the production items within the manufacturing database has been improved.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull in Dabacon / Hull Manufacturing Data.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Design application.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
176
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.18
Default Bracket Profile Position Number
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Default position numbers are calculated when Plane Panel Parts Generation is performed on brackets
with profiles where position number is not explicitly defined. An unset position number is then set to
the running number of the profile. If the profile is a stiffener the number of flanges on the bracket is
added to the position number.
There has been felt a need to alternatively set the bracket profile part position number to the position
number of the bracket. To give the user the opportunity to choose how to calculate unset bracket
profile position numbers the logical name SBH_BRACKET_PROF_POS NO has been invented. It can
take on one of the two values USE_BRACKET_POSNO and RUNNING_NO.
SBH_BRACKET_PROF_POS NO set to RUNNING_NO means that unset position numbers are
calculated as running numbers. This setting is default.
SBH_BRACKET_PROF_POS NO set to USE_BRACKET_POSNO means that unset profile position
numbers are replaced by the bracket position number.
The setting of SBH_BRACKET_PROF_POSNO has also impact when part names are determined
before panel parts have been generated.
Benefits
Flexibility.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Manufacturing of Plane Panel Parts / Plane
Panel Parts / Set-up of Program / Environment Variables.
Affected Programs
Hull Design.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
177
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.19
Extended Curve Flange
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Previously, the extension of a curved flange modelled on a panel boundary defined by a surface and
a displacement (CORR) was extended along the tangent of the boundary. Now the curved flange is
extended along a curve parallel to the surface.
Benefits
The extended flange endpoints will be located on a distance from the surface which is equal to the
panel boundary it is placed on.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
178
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.20
Automatic Position Numbering for Shell Stiffener
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Position number definition for shell stiffeners is improved. It is now possible to use incremental
repetition term in the format of
e.g. 1()10, 1(2)9, 1-9, 12-8 , 100(-2)92 as shown in picture below:
Benefits
When modifying several shell stiffeners, the position numbers can be automatically numbered using a
repetition term.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See the documentation Curved Modelling -> User‘s Guide Interactive -> Interactive Functions, Curved
Hull Menu -> The Model Submenu ->Modify -> Modifying Shell Stiffeners
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design
AVEVA Marine Hull Structural Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
179
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.21
Shell Plate Dialog – Inside and Outside for
Material Thickness
*12.1.SP4*
Description
The default value of Mat./Pos. Side is now "From Plate" instead of empty.
Changing this value will also change the lables for thickness and laminate accordingly. There is also a
tool tip on the "Mat./Pos. Side" drop down explaining the current choice.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
180
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.22
Comment Statements Available via Statement
Wizard *12.1.SP4*
Description
It is now possible to create, edit and delete comment statements (COM) using the statement wizard.
Benefits
There is no longer a need to switch to the schema editor to add comments when working with the
statement wizard.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
181
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.23
Split Shell Stiffeners with RSO
*12.1.SP4*
Description
It is now possible to split a shell stiffener with an RSO. If the RSO has panels associated with it, the
relevant material thickness will be used, resulting in a gap in the same way as splitting with the actual
panel would.
Benefits
A more robust reference for splitting shell stiffeners can be used. When the RSO is associated with a
panel which affects the split point, the relevant information is used without any change needed to the
definition of the shell stiffener.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Detail Design / Curved Modelling / User’s Guide Interactive / Interactive
Functions, Curved Hull Menu / The Model Submenu / Shell Stiffener / Split.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
182
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.24
Turn Off Profile Generic Data
*12.1.SP4*
Description
The Profile Sketch and List and the Profile Cutting Interface programs normally create generic files
and mounting data files. Some customers do not need these files.
Two new keyword with the purpose to turn off writing of generic files and mounting data files have
been invented. The following keywords should be included in the file defined by
SBH_PROF_RESTRICT.
PGEN=YES/NO
When PGEN is set to NO generic files will not be created by Profile Sketch and List. On the other
hand when PGEN is set to YES or when the keyword is omitted generic files and mounting data files
will be written.
CGEN=YES/NO
When CGEN is set to NO creation of generic files and mounting data files by Profile Cutting Interface
will be turned off. Generic files and mounting data files will be written when the keyword is omitted or
set to YES.
Benefits
Flexibility.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Setup, Customisation and Standards / Setup for Production /
Set-Up for Profile Production / Restriction File.
Affected Programs
Hull Design.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
183
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.25
Turn Off Profile Bending Sketch
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP4*
Description
When the Profile Sketch and List program draws shell stiffeners, inverse bending sketches are
included as a part of the drawing. Some customers do not need the inverse bending sketches. Neither
do they need the small additional sketches showing how bent planar stiffeners should be bent.
A new keyword in the SBH_SKETCH_RESTRICTION file with the purpose to suppress inverse
bending sketches and sketches of bent planar stiffeners has been implemented.
BENDING_SKETCH=YES/NO
When BENDING_SKETCH is set to NO plotting of inverse bending sketches and sketches of bent
planar stiffeners will be turned off. With this setting curved stiffener may be combined with planar
stiffeners into one drawing when the keyword COMBINE_PLOTS is set.
On the other hand when BENDING_SKETCH is set to YES or when the keyword is omitted all
sketches will be drawn.
Benefits
Flexibility.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Profile Manufacturing / Production Output
Profiles / Automatic Generation of Profile Sk etches / Creating Profile Sk etches / Restriction File
Affected Programs
Hull Design.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
184
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.26
Attachment Angles on Curved Plates
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Marking of attachment angles on plane plate parts for components not perpendicular to the plate has
been possible to create via the Plane Part Generation (Ppanparts) function. Now this is possible also
for curved plates using the Curved Part Generation function (Cpanparts).
Benefits
Information for assembling of parts on curved panel plates is improved.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See documentation User Guide Hull Detail Design ->Manufacturing -> Automatic Generation of
Curved Parts -> Release of Curved Parts for Production -> Setup of Program -> Default File.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
185
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.27
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
186
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.28
Interactive Jig Pillar Enhancements
*12.1.SP3*
Description
The interactive Jig Pillar application is enhanced. The main areas of improvements are:
All definition data is stored with the jig object to be able to recreate a Jig Pillar arrangement at
a later stage.
Adjustments to the assembly plane are enhanced with more relevant options.
Ensuring that the same Jig Pillar arrangement is obtained both from the PPI Hull function and
from the interactive application.
A possibility to place the Jig arrangement of the other side of the surface
Benefits
The enhancements made to the interactive Jig Pillar application will make the designing of the Jig
Pillar arrangement easier to produce and modify. It is also possible to bring in Jig Pillar arrangements
made in the batch program to make modifications interactively.
Compatibility Constraints
Old Jig Pillar objects, made in previous releases, do not contain all definition data. They are not
possible to bring in for updates or to recreate.
For More Information
See user Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Curved Plates / Interactive Jig Pillars.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Design.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
187
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.29
Hull Mark Update
*12.1.SP3*
Description
Hull Marks are now stored in the data base as one object containing all relevant curves and plates. All
Hull Marks are stored below a node in the data base structure, a Hull Mark world, which needs to be
defined prior to any definition of new Hull Marks. The syntax of the command to create the Hull Mark
world is:
NEW HMKWLD
/<name>
DB
<team>/<dbname>
Benefits
A Hull Mark object is now acting as a container for all relevant hull mark information and can be used
as any other objects e.g. to drag into the canvas for display. Parts generated from Hull Marks are
linked to the Hull Mark object.
Compatibility Constraints
Old Hull Mark objects are not converted into the new format, but can be used as before when e.g.
marking on plate.
The naming of Hull Mark plate objects is changed. They are now named in the following way:
<Hull Mark name>-<running number>
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Miscellaneous Functions / Hull Mark s
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structure Design
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
188
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.30
Reporting Tool Available in Hull Design
*12.1.SP3*
Description
The Reporting add-in is now available for productive use in AVEVA Marine Hull Design. Any available
report can be run directly from the Tools menu. The same menu also gives access to the report
designer, which allows creation of new reports or modification of existing ones.
Quick reports can be generated by right-clicking in the search results of the search utility.
A report may include any content which is exposed as an element or attribute in the database, as well
as graphical elements (lines, images etc).
The reporting tool is very powerful and allows data to be sorted, grouped and summarised as desired.
The graphical layout can be fully customisable, and generated reports may be saved to text files or
other common formats such as PDF or HTML. Additional functionality may be added by using
calculated expressions or code in e.g. C# that runs when the report is being generated.
As a part of the integration of the reporting tool in Hull Design a number of new attributes have been
added, mostly on elements in the MANU database. Some of these allow better possibilities to use
PML expressions to collect information from several related elements, such as a nest and plates that
are nested on it.
Obviously, there are many advantages in upgrading existing customised reports that use Data
Extraction to reports using the reporting tool. To simplify such a process, new attributes have been
added to cover more of what can be extracted by Data Extraction. A translation table has been added
to the user documentation, mapping Data Extraction keywords to elements and attributes.
A number of reports come with the MAR project that is included in the installation. Some of these
reports can be used as direct replacements for a number of built-in listing or reporting functions, such
as parts lists and WCOG lists. The reports can also be used as examples and act as a starting point
for further development of customised reports.
Benefits
Using a common tool for reporting all over the system is a benefit in itself.
This tool also provides extensive possibilities for customisation of contents as well as layout of
reports.
The reports produced by the reporting tool can replace many built -in listing and reporting functions,
e.g. PPI functions such as parts lists and WCOG lists. Customised reporting solutions using legacy
products such as Vitesse and Data Extraction may be upgraded to use the common reporting tool.
Many different users and roles can benefit from the reporting tool, e.g. in early or detailed design as
well as in the production area.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
The reporting tool in general is described in User Guide Design / Reporting.
Mapping of Data Extraction keywords to elements and attributes as well as general descriptions of all
attributes can be found in User Guide Database and Data Management / Data Model / Reference
Manual.
Affected Programs
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
189
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
AVEVA Marine Hull Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
190
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.31
Minimal Bending Templates
*12.1.SP3*
Description
A new type of bending template shape has been introduced, minimising the material needed for the
template.
A minimal template has a ―free‖ edge that is parallel to the one along the plate instead of a straight
line. The height of the template, i.e. the distance between the edge along the plate and the opposite
one, is controlled by the new IP MINIMALTEMPLSHAPE.
Benefits
End users have the ability to configure how the resulting templates should be produced and minimise
the material consumption.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Curved Plates.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Bending Templates
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
191
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.32
Cutouts in Cross Bending Templates
*12.1.SP3*
Description
Cutouts can now be generated in intersecting cross bending templates.
Creation of the cutouts is activated by setting the new IP THICKNESSOFTEMPLA TE to the thickness
of the bending templates. If the thickness is greater then zero cutouts are generated for bending
templates at intersections with other bending templates.
Benefits
End users have the ability to configure how the resulting templates should be produced. No manual
work needed to create cutouts to be able to fit cross bending templates together.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Curved Plates.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Cross Bending Templates
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
192
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.33
Bent Plates in PPM
*12.1.SP3*
Description
In the Production Preparation Model (PPM) it is now possible also to transfer bent plates. The plate
will be recognised as a bent plate if the attribute PURPOSE is set to BPLT. The attri bute DESPARAM
should contain the plate thickness.
Knuckled panels will be created in the DESI database for the transferred bent plates.
Benefits
A more complete Outfitting Steel model can be transferred to Hull Production.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / PPM for Outfit Steel
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Detailed Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
193
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.34
User Bulletin
Labelled Texts and Symbols *12.1.SP3*
Description
In the function Part Checking, it is possible to define labelled texts and symbols containing
production information to be stored with the panel.
These labelled texts and symbols are now automatically added to the nest when a plate part affected
by the labels is nested.
Benefits
Enables the user to automatically handle the labelling texts and symbols in Nesting.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Planar Modelling / Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Functions /
Hull Tools / Part Check ing
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Hull Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
194
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.35
Enhanced Dimensioning in Profile Sketches
*12.1.SP3*
Description
The user may create end cut dimensioning for profile sketches by using methods in class
KcsSketchDimensioning.DimensionSet. The default height of these created dimensioning text is 1.5
mm.
Keyword DIMENSIONING_TE XT_SIZE=<text size> has now been added to the profile sketch
restriction file (SBH_SKETCH_RES TRICT) so that the user may define the text height to any value.
Dimensioning of the length needed to be cut off by the end c ut angle is automatically done in profile
sketches. Since the user may create such dimensioning himself a possibility has been added to turn
off the automatic dimensioning.
The new keyword SUPPRESS_CUT_DIMENS IONING=YES/NO in the profile sketch restriction file
suppresses automatic dimensioning when set to YES.
Benefits
Flexibility.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Profile Manufacturing / Production, Output
Profiles / Automatic Generation of Profile Sk etches / Creating Profile Sk etches / Restriction File
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Profile Sketch and List and Profile Cutting Interface.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
195
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.36
User Bulletin
New GSD Corner Distance Keywords *12.1.SP3*
Description
GSD:s are used to correctly align parts to each other in the assembly process. One type of GSD
marking is markings put at a distance from the corner of a part. This distance is defined by GSD
keyword CORNER_DIS T.
Support is now added for putting corner GSD:s at different distances on different ty pe of parts. To
enhance flexibility the following GSD keywords have been introduced:
BRA_CORNER_DIST
Distance from corner of bracket to GSD.
FLA_CORNER_DIST
Distance from corner of flange to GSD.
STI_CORNER_DIST
Distance from corner of stiffener to GSD.
BUILT_STI_CORNER_DIST
Distance from corner of built profile flange to GSD.
The default value for all these new keywords is the value of the old keyword
CORNER_DIST. The keywords are all defined in the GSD default file.
Benefits
Flexibility.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design-> Setup and Customisation->
Alignment Mark ing->Mark s for Assembly (GSD)->GSD Customising->Control of GSD:s via a Default
File.
Affected Programs
Plane and Curved Parts Generation and Profile Sketch and List.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
196
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.37
User Bulletin
Enhanced Control of Profile Sketches *12.1.SP3*
Description
Previously the profile restriction file keyword PSKETCH was used to activate the profile sketch
function both when running Profile Sk etch and List and Profile Cutting Interface.
Now a separate control facility for those two programs has been added.
The three old keywords PSKETCH, PSKETCH_BEND_SIMPLE and PSKETCH_BEND_COMP LE X
are now reserved for activating the profile sketch when running Profile Sk etch and List.
Three new keywords CSKETCH, CSKETCH_BEND_SIMP LE and CSKETCH_BEND_COMPLE X
have been added to the profile restriction file.
They are used only to activate the profile sketch function from Profile Cutting Interface.
CSKETCH= YES/NO
Default is NO so it needs to be set to YES if profile sketches in general should be created.
CSKETCH_BEND_SIMP LE= YES/NO.
Default is NO.
Used to activate profile sketches for simple bending curves but not for straight profiles.
CSKETCH_BEND_COMPLE X= YES/NO.
Default is NO.
Used to activate profile sketches for complex bending curves but not for straight profiles.
Benefits
Flexibility.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design-> Setup and Customisation->
Setup for Production-> The Restriction File-> Keywords in the General Section
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Profile Sketch and List and Profile Cutting Interface.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
197
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.38
User Bulletin
Deprecated Environment Variable
*12.1.SP2*
Description
The environment variable SBH_NO_IND_SYMPARTS is removed from the system. Plate and profile
parts generated from symmetrical structures are always stored individually, with one instance on
portside and one on starboard.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
198
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.39
Holes in Brackets
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP2*
Description
It is now possible to define holes in brackets.
The available hole types to use is limited to standard holes,
Benefits
You are able to create hole in Brackets…
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
See User Guide Planar Modelling / Deign Language of Hull Modelling / Brack et Statement / Common
Input for Syntaxes 1 to 7.
Affected Programs
Hull Detailed Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
199
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.40
Labelled Texts
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP2*
Description
In Nesting the labelled texts have previously been defined as free texts and for texts containing
production information there has not been any information to which part a labelled text belongs.
This has now been improved so the missing part reference has been added for all production related
labelled texts. This will mean that all texts belonging to a certain nested part will be deleted when the
part is deleted, and transformed when the part is transformed.
Benefits
Simplifies
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here
Affected Programs
Hull Detailed Design
Mar.dll
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
200
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.41
Parts Menu Display
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP2*
Description
The parts menu in plate nesting can now display either the object name or the part name of the listed
plate parts.
A new nesting default parameter, PARTS_MENU_NAME, controls which name to display. By default,
the object name is displayed.
In the part name control settings, the module named PARTMENU_NEST2A X controls the
configuration of the part name to be displayed in the parts menu.
Benefits
End users have the ability to configure which plate part names are displayed in the parts menu.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing Nesting / Hull Plate Nesting / Nesting System –
Application Functions
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Plate Nesting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
201
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Separate Handling of Auto Bevel for Stiffener End Web and Flange
Description
Today bevels can be defined automatically at a stiffener end by defining a bevel set in the bevel
default file and then specifying that the set is to be valid for stiffener end in the bevel set file. The
bevel is then automatically defined for both flange and web. It is possible to prevent auto bevel for the
stiffener end by giving the key word NABE in the stiffener statement.
It is now possible to prevent bevel for the web or flange separately. Two new keywords have been
added NABF and NABW for the stiffener statement, deactivating auto bevel for stiffener end flange or
web respectively.
Benefits
Makes it possible individually control the use of automatically defined bevelling for the web and flange
at a stiffener end.
Compatibility Constraints
None, the keyword NABE remains and has the same meaning as before.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Planar Modelling / Design Language of Hull Modelling /
Stiffener Statement / Stiffeners Except Connection Stiffeners.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
202
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.42
User Bulletin
Bevel Chamfer Option
Description
Previously when no bevel was set for a seam or boundary, the system to some extent assumed a
bevel type 10 (square butt welding). The benefit here was that chamfer was taken in to consideration
when such an edge was included in an abutting boundary.
When the option 99 was introduced to the CHAMFER_ADJUST default keyword this faulty way of
handling edges without any bevel was removed. This has caused problems when reusing old designs
since the behaviour now is different.
In order to get this default behaviour back in older designs, an environment variable,
SBH_DEFAULT_BEVEL, has been introduced and should preferably be set to a tight butt bevel type
that is defined in the bevel control object.
Behaviour when SBH_DEFAULT_BEVEL is defined (as a tight bevel code of type 10)
Default behaviour.
Behaviour when SBH_DEFAULT_BEVEL is defined (as a tight bevel code of type 10)
Benefits
Old designs are still presented with correct chamfer information.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
203
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.43
User Bulletin
Bevel for Shell Stiffener Ends
Description
The handling of automatic definition of bevel for shell stiffener ends has been harmonised with the
corresponding functionality for planar panel profiles. Therefore it is no longer controlled by the
environment variable SBH_PROF_TIGHT but by settings in the file as defined by the environment
variable SBH_BEVEL_SETS.
Benefits
Unified automatic bevel setting for all profiles.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See also User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Setup and Customisation / Bevel Excess and Weld /
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine / Customer Set-up of Bevel Standards / Automatic Bevel Definition.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
204
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.44
User Bulletin
Position of Upper and Lower Cutting Curve
Description
The upper and lower material curves of a plate edge are calculated from the plate thickness of the
bounding plate, i.e. the e-measure of the current bevel. This means that the upper material curve
ends according to the point D in the upper view in the figure above. This is also the position of the so
called bump contour.
However, since the chamfer defined by the variants is cut (or grinded) off after the normal end cutting,
the nested plate parts might be positioned to close to each other.
A more correct way to calculate the upper and lower material curve is to take the current plate
thickness and the current variant into consideration when calculating the curves. This means that the
upper material curve will be positioned according to the point D in the lower sketch in the figure
above.
The environment variable SBH_ADJUST_FOR_BEVEL_VA RIANT can now be used to switch to the
new way of calculating the material contours. By giving the variable the value YES, the new method
will be used. In any other case, the old method is still applied.
Benefits
This development enables the user to control the size of bump contours of plates when variants are
involved, avoiding potential problems with plates being nested too close too each other.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
See also User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Setup and Customisation / Bevel Excess and Weld /
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine / End User Handling of Bevelling / Bevel and Extraction of Parts.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
205
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Plane Parts Generation
15.45
Position Control of Shell Profile and Plane Panel
Stiffener
Description
The figure above is showing a plane view with two longitudinals, one with the material pointing
upwards (the red one), one pointing downwards (the black one).
In this example, the Automatic Bevel box in the Profile section of the Shell Stiffener has been given
the value No. The intersection point of the mould plane of the Shell Stiffener and the hull curve in the
panel plane is the same.
In the plane view two different panels have been defined. Each of them containing a stiffener abutting
one of the longitudinals and a cutout for the same longitudinal.
The figure below shows two other longitudinals where the value Yes has been given in the Automatic
Bevel box.
Here the automatic bevel defined in the Shell Stiffener is considered. This means that the intersection
point of the mould plane of the Shell Stiffener and the hull curve in the panel plane will be modified to
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
206
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
accept tight connection at the trace of the Shell Stiffener. When modelling plane panels, components
(e.g. stiffeners, cutouts) referring such a Shell Stiffener, will be adjusted to meet this modification.
When creating profile parts of these Shell Stiffeners, there are no problems with the profile size.
When creating plate parts of the Shell Stiffeners, via a control file defined by the logical name
SBH_PROF_TO_PLDB, there are no problems with the profile size of the web plate when the
inclination angle, seen from the mould edge of the Shell Stiffener, is positive, i.e. for the lower profile
in the figure above.
However, if the connection angle, when seen from the mould edge of the Shell Stiffener, is negative,
the current solution in the system will result in a too big profile part.
The first step when creating the plate part of the web of the profile is to build up the geometry in the
profile plane. The upper part of the web plate is positioned at a distance, equal to the web height,
away from the trace part.
Next step is to calculate the dotori angles along the trace curve of the plate and to create a guiding
contour. In this step the plate part is made wider and wider. There is no problem with the material size
because the plate part is cut from a bigger plate, but the final web plate part will be too big and the
position of the flanges in the figure above will coincide, except for the web thickness. This means that
e.g. an abutting stiffener will be to wide and a cutout maybe to small.
Since the described process for converting profile parts to plate parts has been the same for a long
time, some customers may have found their own workarounds to meet this problem.
Therefore this functionality is now enhanced to give the customer a possibility to have the profiles
positioned as shown in the first figure. By setting the Environment Variable
SBH_CHECK_PROF_TRA CE to any arbitrary value, further checks will be done. If the profile to be
examined fulfils the criteria to be converted to plate part according to the rules given in the file
assigned to SBH_PROF_TO_PLDB, calculations of connecting components like stiffeners, brackets
and cutouts will be performed according to the first figure.
Inclined plane panel stiffeners will be examined and treated in the same way as described for the
shell stiffeners.
Another way, already in the system, to control the position of inclined profiles is via the Environment
Variable SBH_PROFPT_ADJUS T. However, automatic bevel selection via SBH_BEVEL_SETS will
always be the first choice.
Benefits
Enables the user to control the position of inclined profiles, curved as well as planar.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See also User Guide Hull Model Concept / Run Mode Control / Control on Application Level /
Reference Point of Profile Section.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Structural Design
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
207
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.46
User Bulletin
Compensation for Shell Plate Thickness
Description
For each shell profile, an additional trace is calculated considering the actual surface of shell plates
over which the profile extends. This may be important in areas of heavy curvature along the profile
trace if the profile and shell plates are located on the same side of the moulded surface, and in
particular in areas with thick plates.
In Inithull it is possible to specify per surface whether to compensate for shell plate thickness. This
setting is done separately for planar panels and shell profiles.
Benefits
This development means that views will be more accurately drawn and production output such as
profile sketches and weight and centre of gravity calculations will be more accurate.
Compatibility Constraints
For a project first created in an earlier AVEVA Marine release, plate thickness options should be
setup in inithull before further modelling work is done. Shell profiles must be regenerated before plate
thickness is considered. Planar panels must be regenerated if thickness settings for surfaces differ
compared to before (i.e. thickness should be considered for some surfaces but not for others).
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Model Concept / Run Mode Control / Control on Application Level /
Compensation for Thick ness of Shell Plates.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
AVEVA Marine Production Programs
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
208
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.47
User Bulletin
Top View of Stiffener Improved
Description
There is as an option in ‗detail view stiffener‘ which makes it possible to define the view looking from
the top if the stiffener has a flange. The function has now been adjusted to always look at the chosen
profile from above the flange.
Benefits
The function always displays the stiffener the same way
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For more information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Planar Hull.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
209
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.48
User Bulletin
Weld Built Profiles before Bending
Description
When built profiles parts are manufactured, the lengths of the web and flange parts are, by default,
calculated to satisfy a manufacturing process where parts are first bent and then welded together. By
setting the new ip WELD_BEFORE_BEND in the curved panel parts generation ip-file cpanparts.ip,
the lengths will be calculated to fit a manufacturing process where web and flange parts are first
welded together and then bent.
Benefits
Support for a manufacturing process where built profile parts are first welded together and then bent.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Automatic Generation of Curved Parts /
Release of Curved Parts for Production / Set-Up of Program / Default File.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Production Programs.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
210
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.49
User Bulletin
Weight Unit in Profile Sketches
Description
It will now be possible to choose if the approximate weight of profiles should be presented in tons or
kilograms in profile sketches. This is accomplished by setting the new keyword WEIGHT_UNIT in the
restriction file identified by the logical variable SBH_SKETCH_RESTRICT. Possible settings are
WEIGHT_UNIT=KG and WEIGHT_UNIT=TON, where the latter setting is default.
Benefits
More possibilities to customise output data.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Profile Manufacturing / Production, Output
Profiles / Automatic Generation of Profile Sk etches / Creating Profile Sk etches.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Production Programs
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
211
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.50
User Bulletin
Generic File Viewer
Description
The generic files of type 2AXIS and 3AXIS generated in Plate Nesting and Plate Interface, can now
be viewed graphically using the new function ―GenFile Viewer‖ in the function Hull Tools
> Part Checking.
Benefits
The viewer is an easy and fast function for visually controlling the data in the generic files. All
geometric data and production information texts can be displayed with different colours and line types
for different kinds of geometry (burning with bevel, burning without bevel, marking etc). The colours
and line types are user-controlled and defined in the Nesting default file.
Compatibility Constraints
None
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
212
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Planar Modelling / Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Functions /
Hull Tools / Part Check ing.
Affected Programs
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
213
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.51
User Bulletin
Looking Field Changed for Hull Mark Projection
Description
When a hull text is to be projected on a planar panel or surface, the orientation in space of the hull
text in space before projection is defined by several fields in the dialog. One of these is ―Looking‖,
which replaces ―Looking from‖ in previous versions. This means that the opposite value compared to
earlier versions should be set to get the same result. For example, a ―Looking‖ value of PS is
equivalent to the previous ―Looking from‖ value of SB.
Benefits
This change aligns the way looking direction is defined with that of other functions, e.g. for creating
symbolic hull views.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Miscellaneous Functions / Hull Mark s.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
214
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.52
User Bulletin
Control of Marking Gap at Holes
Description
When creating plane panel parts via the Plane Part Generation (ppanparts) functionality, the user has
the possibility to set a default parameter value, MARKGAP, that controls the distance marking lines
will be cut off at the outer contour of the plates. If a marking line ends at (or crosses or is close to) a
hole, no check on any marking gap has been done so far.
However, there is one exception. Marking lines defined via the MARKING statement in the Hull
Modelling will be cut off at holes using the parameter MARKGAP.
Because of possible plate damage when burner cutter crosses a marking line, the possibility to
reduce other type of marking lines have been implemented.
Three new default parameters have been entered into the ppanparts function. The names of the
parameters are:
REDUCE_MARKGAP_OF_S TI_A T_HOLES,
REDUCE_MARKGAP_OF_PLA NE_A T_HOLES,
REDUCE_MARKGAP_OF_PANE L_A T_HOLES,
By giving REDUCE_MARKGAP_OF_S TI_A T_HOLES, marking lines of the mould lines of stiffeners
(default parameter STI must be given) will be checked for and reduced if the conditions mentioned
above is fulfilled.
By giving REDUCE_MARKGAP_OF_PLA NE_A T_HOLES, marking lines of the reference planes
(default parameter REFPLANE must be given) defined in Hull Modelling will be checked for and
reduced if the conditions mentioned above are fulfilled.
By giving REDUCE_MARKGAP_OF_PANEL _A T_HOLES, marking lines of abutting plane panels
(default parameter PAN must be given) will be checked for and reduced if the conditions mentioned
above are fulfilled.
Benefits
Enables the user to control the extension of marking lines around holes.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See also User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Manufacturing of Plane Panel Parts /
Plane Panel Part / Set-up of Program / Set-up of the IP File.
Affected Programs
Sf416d.exe
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
215
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.53
User Bulletin
GSD Marking of Built Profiles
Description
When assembling built profiles there is a need for marking the flange and the web parts so that they
may be correctly aligned to each other. This may now be done by setting the new keyword
BUILT_FLA_SHAPE in the GSD default file.
BUILT_FLA_SHAPE may be assigned three different values giving different options for the marking of
the flange part.
BUILT_FLA_SHAPE=THICK NESS will mark the flange with two parallel lines indicating the web
thickness. This is the default option.
BUILT_FLA_SHAPE=HOOK will mark the flange with a hook.
BUILT_FLA_SHAPE=HOOK_THICKNESS will result in a marking which is a combination of the
thickness and hook marking, where a line and the hook together indicate the web thickness.
The generic files created by the Plate Interface and the Profile Sketch and List programs will contain
the new marking types FACE_PLATE_ALIGNME NT.
Benefits
Increased accuracy when assembling built profile parts.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Setup, Customisation and Standards / Alignment Mark ing /
Mark s for Assembly (GSD) / GSD Customising / Control of GSD:s via a Default File.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Production Programs.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
216
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.54
User Bulletin
Mark Reference Plane on Both Sides of Profiles
Description
If REFPLANE is defined in the ppanparts.ip then reference plane markings will be added to plate and
profile parts when running Plane Panel Parts Generation. Profile parts will however only be marked
on the moulded side.
By defining REFPLANE, BOTH_SIDES, in ppanparts.ip profile parts will be marked on both sides of
the profile web.
Benefits
Increased marking possibilities.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Manufacturing of Plane Panel Parts / Set-up of
Program / Set-up of the IP file.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Production Programs.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
217
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.55
User Bulletin
Nest Profiles without Rest
Description
It will now be possible to nest profile parts on raw profiles without creating rest profiles.
To accomplish this do the following two steps:
Define a raw profile with type and dimensions the same as the profile part that should be
nested. Define the length as zero.
Insert the new keyword NEST_WITHOUT_RES T=YES in the general section of the profile
restriction file, as defined by SBH_PROF_RESTRICT.
Nesting will now be performed as if the length was the maximum length for the profile type. When
nesting is completed the length will be set to the exact length needed, so that no rest part will be
created.
Benefits
Flexibility.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Setup and Customisation / Setup for Production / The
Restriction File / Keywords in the General Section of the Restriction File.
Affected Programs
Profile Nesting.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
218
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.56
User Bulletin
New Nesting Default Parameters
Description
The following additions/changes have been made for the Nesting/PLCM defaults:
SYMB_HEIGHT_E XCESS
Symbol height for excess text in burning sketch
DISPLAY_EXCESS_SYMBOL
Code for displaying the excess symbol in the burning sketch:
0 = No display
1 = Display
MULTIPLE_NEST_NCOL (Nesting only)
The number of nests in each column for multiple nest.
LABEL_AUTO_POSNO_ME THOD (PLCM only)
The method used for presenting labelled position numbers:
None = label posno as given
Partname = label posno via partname control
CVBA_SKETCH_ANGLE
The code for the cvba angle display in the burning sketch:
Along
=
End angle in burning direction
Maximum =
The maximum of the start and end angles
Minimum =
The minimum of the start and end angles
Average
The average of the start and end angles
=
AUX_VALID_S TART_POS
Text presented for auxiliary functions valid in the starting position
AUX_VALID_END_P OS
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
219
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Text presented for auxiliary functions valid in the ending position
EDIT_PRODUCTION_TE XTS
Code for editing production texts in burning sketch using Right-Click:
No = Editing not possible
Yes = Editing possible
DRAW_RAW_PLATE_CORN
Code for drawing the raw plate corners in the burning sketch:
No = Do not draw
Yes = Draw
MOVE_START_CONFIRM_OPPSITE
Code for confirmation when a marking start is moved to a marking line valid only
on the opposite side:
No = No confirmation
Yes = Confirmation
MARK_AUTO_OPPOSITE
This default is now valid also in PLCM.
CUTSEQ_MIN_AREA
Minimum area of plate for which cutting sequence information are added to the
sketch.
ALL_STARTS_TYPE
The type of starts to be treated when the start sequence is added in the burning
sketch:
All starts
All burning starts
ALL_STARTS_COLOUR
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
220
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
The colour for the start sequence information in the burning sketch.
ALL_STARTS_HEIGHT
The text height for the start sequence in the burning sketch.
AUTONEST_ASSEMBLY_LEVEL
The assembly level for the parts. Ignored if zero.
AUTONEST_CUS TNAME_CTRL
Customised part name control:
= No
Do not use customised part name
= Yes
Use customised part name
AUTONEST_PART_SELE CTION
The minimum area in mm2 for the parts to be nested ‗large parts first‘. If < 0, the ‗
Parts are not nested by area.
AUTONEST_ROTA TION_CTRL
Rotation control:
= No
No control, any rotation angle can be used
= Yes
Only rotation angles which are a multiple of 90 degrees are used
AUTONEST_STOP _MULTIPLE
The time limit in milliseconds for a multiple nest
AUTONEST_STOP _SINGLE
The time limit in milliseconds for a single nest
Benefits
Improved configuration possibilities.
Compatibility Constraints
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
221
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
None
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Nesting /
Hull Plate Nesting / Initialisations for Nesting / Defaults .
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Plate Nesting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
222
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.57
User Bulletin
Nesting Plug-In Interface
Description
In the Nesting Plug-In Interface, additional parameters have been added to some of the interface
modules. The new parameters have been defined as Nesting Defaults.
Benefits
The new parameters will make it easier to control any external pattern generator.
Compatibility Constraints
The new parameters must be added in all applications using the Plug-In Interface.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Nesting / Hull Plate Nesting / Nesting Plug-In /
Plug-In Interface and Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Nesting / Hull Plate Nesting /
Initialisations for Nesting / Defaults.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
223
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.58
Storing Changes after Running Production
Programs
Description
The production programs are not updating any data in design databases (DESI) anymore.
Furthermore, some objects previously stored in manufacturing databases (MANU) are not stored at
all.
Bracket panels have until now been split and stored as plate parts in MANU. The brackets pointing at
that bracket panel have been stored without geometry, but with a reference to the bracket panel plate
part. From now on the information stored in the bracket panel plate part is copied into the bracket
plate part and the bracket panel plate part will no longer be stored.
Sub panel plate parts have until now been split and stored as plate parts in MANU. Since the main
panel plate parts are either referring to a single sub plate or to two or more sub plates and the main
panel plate parts are built up by these parts, there is no need to have the sub panel parts stored in
MANU.
When creating bending templates for a curved plate, previously the sight plane and sight line plane
were stored in the plate in DESI. This information will from now on be stored in the plate templates in
MANU.
When creating plate jigs for curved panels, previously the calculated assembly plane and some
additional information about the orientation of the plate jigs were stored in the curved panel in DESI.
From now on this information is stored in the plate jigs in MANU.
When creating jig pillars for curved panels, previously the jig pillar was stored in DESI. The jig pillar
contains information similar to that stored in the plate jigs. From now on the jig pillars are stored in
MANU and the orientation information is no longer copied to the curved panel.
Benefits
This change means an improved structure of stored data, and is beneficial for projects using Global.
Compatibility Constraints
Projects created in an earlier AVEVA Marine release needs to be upgraded before continued use with
AVEVA Marine 12.1. The upgrade will change the storing of selected objects as described above, as
well as reorganise the MANU contents (described in another release note).
For More Information
Further details of the upgrading of old projects are given in the 12.0 to 12.1 Upgrade manual.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Production Programs
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
224
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.59
User Bulletin
New MANU Data Model
Description
In AVEVA Marine 12.0 the manufacturing data base (MANU) reflected the design and for each design
block (BLOCK) the corresponding block (MBLOCK) was automatically created when the production
parts where created. Below each MBLOCK, MPANEL elements were created and the production
parts were stored below the MPANEL element. The production part elements are MPLATE for planar
and curved plates, MPROF for planar and curved profiles and MBPRO for built profiles.
In AVEVA Marine 12.1, the MBLOCK and MPANEL elements are obsolete and the production parts
are stored in manufacturing package elements MANPKG. These elements contain a filter element
(MPKGFT) as well as one or more manufacturing package folders (MPKGFL). The rules defined in
the MPKGFT elements determine in which manufacturing package the production parts will be stored.
Each folder within a manufacturing package has a rule which makes it possible to e.g. store different
types of plate parts in different folders.
Examples of rules are:
MATCHWILD ( ATTRIB NAMN, ‗ER5*‘)
ATTRIB TYPE EQ ‘MPLATE‘
ATTRIB TYPECD EQ 91
MATCHWILD ( ATTRIB QUATXT OF FIRST MPLRWI, ‘A*‘)
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
225
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
ATTRIB NAMN OF OWNER INSET( ‗ER2‘, ‗TEST‘)
TRUE
The last rule can be used in a last folder to ensure that there always is a folder to put the production
part in. This folder should normally be empty.
Benefits
Easier to use
Easier to find information
Easier to distribute
Compatibility Constraints
Old projects must be upgraded to 12.1 using the Upgrade tool in the new ManuConfig addin.
For More Information
Further details of the upgrading of old projects are given in the 12.0 to 12.1 Upgrade manual.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
226
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.60
User Bulletin
Automatic Naming of Production Sketches
Description
Hull production programs running in batch can create receipt sketches which are given automatically
generated names. With this release a new set-up tool is introduced for a uniform customisable
naming of production sketches.
Users may now define how the sketch names should be put together by a set of rules. The naming
rules are stored in a file referenced by the logical variable SBH_DWGNAME_RULES. Naming rules
are defined individually for a number of applications. Each rule consists of a keyword identifying the
application, followed by a number of attributes defining how the name is built up.
The naming rule attributes are applied in the order they are given. Only rule attributes vali d for the
application may be given. First rule attributes are interpreted and the resulting values for each
attribute are concatenated to form a sketch name. The rules are of mainly three types:
5.
Names (Current object name, part names, block name and computer name).
6.
Numbers (Next global sequence number for the application, job numbers and counters local
for the application)
7.
Other (Free text, page number)
Benefits
Naming of production sketches may be customised in a uniform way.
Compatibility Constraints
Old techniques for generating automatic sequence numbers for the Parts List and WCOG applications
are not valid any more. The keyword NAME_METHOD in the profile restriction file may not be used
anymore and should be removed.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Production Program Interface / Automatic
Naming of Production Sk etches.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Production Programs.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
227
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.61
User Bulletin
Find Documents Related to Production Parts
Description
A large number of different reports and sketches are created by production programs.
To be able to easily view documents valid for a specific production part, production programs will now
create links from parts to relevant reports and sketches. The user will be able to view related
documents in the Linked Documents dialog in Hull Design.
This is done by the following steps:
1.
Bring up the Linked Documents dialog and mark Follow CE (current element).
2.
Indicate a production part in the Manufacturing Explorer and related reports and drawings for
the indicated part will appear in the Linked Documents dialog. The reports and drawings may
then be opened by right-clicking on the displayed link.
Benefits
Reports and sketches related to a specific production part may be easily viewed.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Production Program Interface / Hull
Production Program Interface / Link s to Documents from Related Production Parts.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Production Programs.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
228
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.62
User Bulletin
Naming of Curved Plates and Stiffeners
Description
Handling of names is slightly changed for shell plates and stiffeners in DESI databases and curved
plate parts in MANU databases.
It is no longer possible to have shell plates and stiffeners automatically renamed when adding them to
a curved panel. This option (controlled by the environment variable SBH_CPAN_RENAME_PARTS)
was a legacy from much older versions of the system and might cause problems if used wrongly.
Shell plates and stiffeners will now always keep their initial name even after being added to a curved
panel.
Secondly, it is possible to control how curved plate parts are named in MANU by use of the above
mentioned variable.
In earlier versions, after parts splitting, the names of curved plate parts belonging to a CL panel have
ended in SP even for PS/SB specific or symmetric plates.
It is now possible to control the plate part names in such cases, optionally having the names reflecting
the actual plate symmetries.
The old naming for a panel BLOCK1-2SP with one CL-plate and one symmetrical plate (both PS and
SB) was:
BLOCK1-2SP-1SP
BLOCK1-2SP-3SP
BLOCK1-2SP-4SP
The new naming will be:
BLOCK1-2SP-1SP
BLOCK1-2SP-3P
BLOCK1-2SP-4S
To use the new naming rules for plates belonging to a CL panel, set the environment variable
SBH_CPAN_RENAME_PARTS to ‗CL‘.
Benefits
Project administration becomes easier due to increased consistency in naming of shell plates and
shell stiffeners as well as production parts. The plates and stiffeners will keep the names as given by
the user even after they have been added to a curved panel.
The naming of curved plate parts after parts splitting will reflect the individual storing.
Compatibility Constraints
The new naming should not be mixed with the old one in an on-going project.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Model Concept / About Naming / Specific Name Rules .
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
229
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
AVEVA Marine Production Programs
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
230
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.63
Parts
User Bulletin
Function to Find and Remove Dangling MANU
Description
When a panel (planar or curved) is removed from the model, any corresponding production parts are
automatically removed. If this, e.g. due to a restricted database access, cannot be done, the result will
be dangling plate and profile parts which should not be manufactured.
A PML function has been developed to clean up the database and take care of this situation. The
function searches for elements of type MPLATE, MPROF and MBPRO and removes all those for
which a corresponding panel does not exist.
The function, hullDeleteUnrefMANUParts, can be found in the installation directory, under
PMLLIB\hulldesign\functions.
Benefits
The risk of manufacturing unnecessary parts (and thus increasing production cost) is reduced.
The function does not need any parameters when called and is quite easy to use. All parts to be
removed will be found automatically, which is more efficient than searching for them manually.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
None.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
231
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.64
Enhancement in Dialogue for Automatic Position
Number Definition.
Description
The automatic definition of position numbers is controlled by an Autopos control object with different
cases for position number definition. It may be relevant to have more than one Autopos object, e.g.
when defining both with and without the option to treat symmetrical parts equally.
The dialog for Automatic Position Number Definition has been enhanced to present all available
Autopos control objects in a drop-down list. The cases available in the highlighted control object are
presented in a list. When switching to another Autopos Control Object by selecting it on the dropdown, the user must click the ‗Update‘ button to list the relevant cases for the selection.
Benefits
No need for the user to remember the names of cases and objects
Compatibility Constraints
None
For more information
See User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Manufacturing / Automatic Position Number Setting.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
232
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
15.65
Reflection in Hull Element Names and Hurefl
Attribute
Description
Slightly changed naming rules apply for hull elements created in the Design database by Planar and
Curved Hull:
For any non-symmetric object there will be only one element. The name of this element will
be equal to the object name as given by the user (or in some cases automatically by the
system).
For a symmetric object there will be two elements. One of these will be named as the object
and one will have a name composed by the object name and a _R suffix (R meaning
―reflected‖).
For a symmetric object with the geometry defined on PS, the PS element will have the shorter
name and the SB element will have a _R suffix.
For a symmetric object with the geometry defined on SB, the SB element will have the shorter
name and the PS element will have a _R suffix. Currently only planar panels can be
symmetric and have their geometry defined on SB.
The Hurefl attribute will strictly answer the question ―Is the current element in its reflected position
relative to where the geometry is defined?‖ This implies two things:
Even a non-symmetric element may have a Hurefl value of True.
The Hurefl value (True/False) and the element name (with or without _R suffix) will not always
match.
Benefits
There will be less confusion regarding element names for non-symmetric objects, and there will for
certain always be an element with the object name as given by the user. This solution is more intuitive
and customised development may be simpler as well. Still functionality using the Hurefl at tribute, e.g.
weld detection, will work properly.
Compatibility Constraints
Objects generated in AVEVA Marine 12.0 that are valid on one side but with the geometry on the
other must be recreated before the new rules for element name and Hurefl fully apply. Note in
particular that this applies to SB specific curved panels, which internally have their geometry reflected
to PS. The objects are recreated via the Recreate functions in the Planar Hull and Curved Hull
menus, respectively.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
233
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.66
User Bulletin
FRP Additions
Description
Laminate can be given not only for planar plates and stiffeners, but also for flanges.
The old term GRP (Glass fibre Reinforced Plastics) has been replaced by the more general term FRP
(Fibre Reinforced Plastics). As a consequence, two attributes in the TIL input file when setting up FRP
has been renamed. PERCENT_OF_GLASS is now PERCENT_OF_FIBE R and GLASS_WEIGHT has
been renamed to FABRIC_WEIGHT.
Benefits
This development means better support for production with laminate technique.
Compatibility Constraints
Old TIL input files for FRP settings must be modified, adapting them to the renamed attributes.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Setup, Customisation and Standards / (Fibre) Reinforced
Plastics Option (FRP) / Definition of the FRP Object / Laminate Plate Statement .
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Detail Design
AVEVA Marine Production Programs
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
234
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
15.67
User Bulletin
Tribon 5 Curved Hull Input Data
Description
In the Tribon M series there is an option to convert Tribon 5 Curved Hull Input data for Seamgen,
Profgen and Cpangen. This option existed only so that users could more easy migrate from Tribon 5
into Tribon Mx version. The way of creating data in Tribon 5 format does not exist anymore and is not
described anywhere in the documentation. This option to convert old data files into newer XML format
will in AVEVA Marine 12.1 be deprecated and finally removed in a future release of AVEVA Marine.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
235
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
16.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Hull Weld Planning
16.1 Improved Edit Welds Function
*12.1.SP4*
Description
User defined attributes defined for welds and weld joints are now possible to view and modify through
the Edit Welds dialog.
Welds and weld joints that are displayed on the current drawing will be highlighted and set as current
database element if selected in the dialog.
Benefits
User-defined data can be presented in the Edit Welds dialog.
Simplified process when identifying and updating welds.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Weld Planning / Edit Welds.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Weld Planning
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
236
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
16.2 User Defined Rules for Weld Suspension
*12.1.SP3*
Description
User defined rules can be setup to control the suspension length for plates and profiles in weld
calculations. If no rules are defined the suspension length calculations are based on a factor (as in
earlier releases).
The effects of weld suspension is now visible when welds are drawn in the 3D view and weld reports
have weld lengths and weld suspension calculated as defined by the user.
Benefits
End users have the ability to configure the calculation of weld suspension.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Weld Planning / Weld Planning Setup / Weld Suspension Rules.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Weld Planning
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
237
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
16.3 Weld Calculation Curved Panels
Description
The calculation of welds on curved panels with holes crossing seams, is now excluding the part of the
plate boundary that represents the hole.
Benefits
The result of the weld calculation is more accurate
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Weld Planning
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
238
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
16.4 Weld Calculation Shell Profiles
Description
The calculation of welds on shell profiles with notches is now excluding the part where the notch is
defined.
Benefits
The result of the weld calculation is more accurate
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Weld Planning
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
239
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
17.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Design Reuse
Description
Design Reuse is a tool to simplify the work required to copy design data between projects and thereby
reuse design work. Design data that is copied is re-generated and adapted to the design context of
the target project. Copying design data follows an export/import scenario with an intermediate storage
in a Transfer Set. The functionality provided is accessible through the command line and through a
graphical user interface. Design Reuse is made as a so-called addin and is hosted by the Hull Design,
Outfitting Design and Marine Drafting modules.
Design Reuse requires a specific license.
Benefits
Very useful for design reuse between ships. The design is copied from one ship to another,
and adapted to the second ship. The model is re-generated and adapted to the design
context of the second ship.
Support for different naming conventions by fully customisable name substitution rules.
Maintains the references within the model as well as between drawings and models by
reference adaptation at import to the second ship.
Drawings keep their associations and are updated at import.
GUI for interactive usage inside Hull Design / Outfitting Design / Marine Drafting.
Commands supporting all available functions.
Provides high level customisation through trigger functions.
Sisterships can be synchronized by customer written automation scripts executed at regular
intervals.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Design Reuse.
Affected Programs
Hull Design, Outfitting Design, Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
240
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
17.1 PML Triggers
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Design Reuse is enhanced to support Distributed Attributes attached to model data. Model data
handled as transfer item in Design Reuse will take information stored as Distributed Attributes into
consideration in the transfer process. User owns the possibility to switch on/off the consideration of
Distributed Attributes, per transfer item type, via the ItemSettings.xml file.
Benefits
Information attached to model data via the concept of Distributed Attributes is handled and copied as
any ordinary attributes. The definitions of Distributed Attributes stored in dictionary databases are not
transferred by Design Reuse but have to be setup in target project in beforehand by the lexicon
module.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Rfere to User Guide Design Reuse / Transfer Item Details.
Affected Programs
Design Reuse Addin
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
241
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
18.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Assembly Planning
18.1 Assembly Drawings & Parts List
*12.1.SP4*
Description
The assembly parts lists generation within the Assembly Auto Drawing Production (Assembly ADP)
has been given a possibility to expand a collected part to include its subordinate parts in parts list files
and in parts lists of drawings.
Benefits
Possible to extend the parts lists to show information from parts subordinate to parts actually collected
to an assembly. I.e. an assembled Hull Bracket can be extended to show also Bracket Stiffeners and
Bracket Flanges in parts lists.
Compatibility Constraints
A new PML functions assyexpandsubparts.pmlfnc is provided and stored in
%PMLLIB%\assembly\userfunctions. This function controls the mechanism of expanding parts and is
by default expanding Hull Brackets.
For More Information
User Guide
Affected Programs
Assembly Auto Drawing Production functionality (Assembly ADP , located in \PMLLIB\assembly\…)
hosted by the Marine Drafting and Outfitting Draft modules.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
242
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
18.2 Material side
*12.1.SP3*
Description
Through the assembly properties dialog, when the predefined orientation is set to ―Specific Panel‖ or
―Automatic‖ the selected panel defined the orientation of the assembly by calculating the side of panel
with most material, stiffeners brackets etc. Added to this mechanism is now the possibility to decide if
the material side should be oriented up or if it should be down. The attribute holding this information is
named ASBUSY.
This has an immediate affect to drawings generated by Assembly ADP.
Benefits
Possible to decide if material of assembly base panel should be up or down.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Assembly Planning / Graphical User Interface / Context Sensitive Menu Functions .
Affected Programs
Assembly Planning
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
243
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
18.3 Assembly Drawing & Parts List
*12.1.SP2*
Description
The assembly parts lists generation within the Assembly Auto Drawing Production (Assembly ADP)
has been given a possibility to accumulate identical design parts and get them represented as one
single item with an amount figure. This is provided as an optional alternative configuration to the
current solution where all design parts within an assembly are enumerated as individual items in parts
lists. The mechanism is applicable for both parts lists generated as files and parts lists put as tables in
drawings.
A new drawing template and a new parts list template are provided that includes the required
configurations for identical design part accumulation. These are
Standard Assembly Drawing AD-001-SUM
Standard Parts List PL-001-SUM
How to load the templates:
New project: Follow the User Guide - installation of Assembly ADP library in a new
project.
Current project with an existing Assembly ADP library: Append the templates to your
library by running one of the following macros from Command Window:
 $M /\PMLLIB\assembly\data\assembly_adp_library_acc.txt (for projects with metric
units)
 $M \PMLLIB\assembly\data\assembly_adp_library_imperial_acc.txt (for projects with
imperial units)
Benefits
Possible to make plain and condensed assembly parts lists reduced by unnecessary information. This
is of particularly interest for parts lists presented as tables in drawings with limited area.
Compatibility Constraints
Some PML functions stored in %PMLLIB%\assembly\userfunctions have changed their required
arguments. The PML functions located in the subdirectory userfunctions are meant for users to
customise. If such customisation has been made, or if additional customised PML functions are
added, a survey of the functional arguments is required. This is valid only for PML functions used by
the parts list handling, i.e. following files are changed as described below:
assycog.pmlfnc
assycomment.pmlfnc
assydesc.pmlfnc
assymq.pmlfnc
assyname.pmlfnc
assyposn.pmlfnc
assyptype.pmlfnc
assyqty.pmlfnc
assyweight.pmlfnc
If you have your own variants of the files above or added your own functions, you need to make sure
that the first argument earlier passed as DBREF now is of the type ASSYPART.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
244
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Old style
define function !!assyPtypes(!elemRefe is DBREF, !asitem is DBREF)
is STRING
New style
define function !!assyPtype(!assyPart is ASSYPART, !asitem is
DBREF) is STRING
-- get the DBREF from ASSYPART
!elemRefe = !assyPart.partRef()
For More Information
User Guide Assembly Planning / Assembly Drawing and Reports / Drawing Template / Task Element
where you find more about e.g. following:
How to alter individual/accumulation mode.
What is that makes a design part considered for accumulation (attributes used to determine
identical items).
Affected Programs
Assembly Auto Drawing Production functionality (Assembly ADP, located in \PMLLIB\assembly\…)
hosted by the Marine Drafting and Outfitting Draft modules.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
245
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
18.4 Assembly Reports
*12.1.SP2*
Description
The Assembly Reports submenu is moved from the Utilities menu of Outfitting into the context menu
of Assembly Planning. Through this the functions are available from the modules hosting the
Assembly Planning addin and not only from Outfitting. The functions are adjusted to act on selections
made in the Assembly Planning GUI instead of CE.
Benefits
A more proper an intuitive placement of assembly planning related functions.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
User Guide Assembly Planning / Reporting
Affected Programs
Hull Design, Outfitting, Assembly Planning
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
246
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
18.5 Assembly Selection
*12.1.SP2*
Description
A new AssemblySelection PMLNET object is introduced to enable PML developed functionality to act
on selections made in the Assembly Planning GUI. Selections made in the assembly tree and list
views are exposed to PML through this new object. The object also provides an event mechanism to
expose when a selection in Assembly Planning has changed.
Benefits
Enables for PML developed functionality to operate on elements currently selected in Assembly
Planning GUI.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
User Guide Assembly Planning / Graphical User Interface / Context Sensitive Menu Functions
Affected Programs
Hull Design, Outfitting, Assembly Planning
Aveva.Marine.AssemblyPlanning.Utilities.dll (new)
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
247
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
18.6 Assembly Planning Context Menu
*12.1.SP2*
Description
The Assembly Planning addin has now got its own dedicated UIC file. The purpose is in first hand to
enable for users to append customised functions to the Assembly Planning context menu.
Benefits
Assembly Planning earlier shared UIC information with its hosting module whic h not was possible
when hosted by Outfitting module with new UIC file.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
User Guide Assembly Planning / Graphical User Interface / Context Sensitive Menu Functions
Affected Programs
Hull Design, Outfitting, Assembly Planning
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
248
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
18.7 Curved Hull Panel as Base Panel for Assembly
Orientation
Description
Through the assembly properties dialog, when the predefined orientation is set to ―Specific Panel‖, it
is now possible to select curved panel from the enumeration list of hull panels. The orientation of the
selected curved hull panel is calculated and assigned as the orientation of the assembly.
The method to calculate the orientation of a curved hull panel utilizes a plane derived from the corner
points provided by the seam limits, the same method as used by the Jigs calculations.
Benefits
Can use curved hull panels as base panel for assembly orientation.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Assembly Planning / Graphical User Interface / Context Sensitive Menu
Functions / Properties.
Affected Programs
Assembly Planning
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
249
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
18.8 Clean Up Assembly References
Description
Any type of element deleted is captured for an assembly specific evaluation to see if the element is
referenced from any assembly node, and if so then the reference is deleted too. However, this follow
up mechanism works only when it is the precise element specified for deletion that also is referenced
from an assembly. I.e. it is not working if the element deleted holds a subst ructure into which
assembly references are made. E.g. if a hull plate is assembled the assembly reference will be
deleted if the plate is specifically deleted. But, if the hull panel is deleted the assembly reference is
kept as an invalid reference and is denoted as <Missing> in assembly planning. To extend this
general follow up mechanism with more assembly specific code would slow down the system as it is
acting generally for all delete operations.
As a solution an assembly planning specific core command is created that top down from the
assembly selected will remove all references to parts no longer existing. This core command is at
delivery not available from the Assembly Planning context sensitive menu, but can be added through
the ordinary customise function. I.e. you can add your ―Clean invalid part references‖ function and
connect the command "AVEVA.Marine.AssemblyPlanning.Clean" to it. The reason why it not is added
from start is that it is a quite powerful command and should be used with caution and is better
configured per user.
Benefits
Remove invalid assembly references.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Assembly Planning
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
250
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
18.9 New Drawing Type for Assembly ADP Drawings
There is a new drawing type in 12.1, ―Assembly ADP drawing‖ dedicated for drawings created by the
Assembly Automatic Document Production application. You can see that there is a new drawing type
in the open/save drawing dialogues:
If you want to handle the new drawing type in your project you need to assign two new logical names
in your marine project setup file (D065<proj>.sdb):
SB_ASSADP_PDB
SB_ASSADP_PDB
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
251
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
SB_ASSADP_PDB_PADD
User Bulletin
<name_of_dept>;<name_of_regi>
This is for the system to recognize the type.
This defines the name of the DEPT and then REGI where you want Marine Drafting to find your
Assembly ADP drawings.
Benefits
To make a distinction between general assembly drawings and drawings generated by Assembly
ADP.
Compatibility Constraints
Assembly Drawings created in earlier versions will still have the old drawing type (Assembly Drawing)
and will thus not be listed as an Assembly ADP Drawing but as an Assembly Drawing.
For More Information
Only noted here,
Affected Programs
Assembly Planning
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
252
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
18.10
User Bulletin
Multiple Select
Description
A very useful method for user to populate the assembly structure by design parts is provided by the
drag & drop facilities. However, collection elements from Design Explorer only allow single element
selection. With the EditElements addin, now available in the Hull and Outfitting Design modules,
multiple element selection is enabled e.g. for collecting elements to assembly.
This addin is enabled in Hull and Outfitting Design only for the purpose to facilitate multiple select.
Additionally the addin exposes a general function to an edit element, such as create and delete.
Please note that, although the addin is called Edit Elements, it must never be used to edit any
elements in Hull. In Hull it is useful for listing members, making selections etc.
Benefits
Extended possibilities to make element selections for e.g. drag & drop operations.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Outfitting Design
Assembly Planning
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
253
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
18.11
View
User Bulletin
Change Projection of an Assembly ADP Drawing
There are some improvements when using the Marine Drafting function Tools > Model view >
Change Projection in an Assembly ADP drawing. Before there was a problem that labels and
bounding box were not updated to fit the new projection. This is now taken care of. If the drawing is of
type ‗Assembly ADP Drawing‘ then the user will be asked if he wants to regenerate the labels and
bounding box.
Limitations:
This will only work for drawings that are of the new drawing type ‗Assembly ADP drawing‘.
Assembly ADP drawing generated in previous program versions will not be handled since they are of
another type.
The utility doing the label and bounding box calculations is a part of the Assembly ADP application.
Therefore this function will only work in Marine Drafting, not in Hull Design.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
254
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
18.12
User Bulletin
POS attribute available for ASMBLY Elements
Description
The ASMBLY element has been given a POSition attribute. The attribute is not yet used in any
specific functionality but added for future purposes and to facilitate for some general (draft)
functionality.
Benefits
None.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Assembly Planning
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
255
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Marine Drafting
19.1 Staggered Views
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Staggered views are symbolic views in hull combined from a selection of restricted planes. The
definition of the staggered view is made using a RSO with faces representing each restricted plane of
the view to be defined. Each plane within the view will be given the defined view depth and the main
plane of the view is defined by selecting a face number within the RSO (Component no in the
dialogue below). Below is shown two examples of symbolic views defined using a RSO. The
staggered view is creating in the second example below:
Benefits
Staggered symbolic views can be made.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
256
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Hull Detail Design / Planar Modelling / User Guide / Interactive Planar Hull
Modelling Functions / Model Generation and View Functions / View / Create.
Affected Programs
All Marine Drafting based applications
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
257
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.2 Folders in HCMWLD
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Folders have been added below the surfaces in the node HCMWLD of the database browser. The
folders contain all plates, profiles seams and curves that are associated with the surface. The folder
names are shown in the picture below:
Benefits
Easier to find information
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here
Affected Programs
All AVEVA Marine Drafting based applications
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
258
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.3 Colour Coding of Curved Plates
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Curved plates are colour coded when drawn in the 2D canvas. The coding is based on if the plates
are assigned to a panel or not:
Plates not belonging to a panel are coloured blue
Plates belonging to a panel are coloured green (the panel colour)
Benefits
Visual check made possible
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here
Affected Programs
All AVEVA Marine Drafting based applications
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
259
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.4 Presenting Welds in Model and Symbolic Views
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Welds calculated and stored using Weld Planning are now possible to draw and identify in model and
symbolic views. Once added to a symbolic view welds are possible to switch on and off using t he
View Properties function.
Benefits
The addition has made it easier to put annotation on weld and it also allows for more automatic
drawing production.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
All AVEVA Marine Drafting based applications
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
260
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.5 Excess Line Type and Colour
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP4*
Description
It is now possible to set up line type and colour for limit lines, which (limit) has excess of different
types, e.g. Erection or Assembly. The line type and colour can be set in the keyword for the five
excess types. See below for an example of the default file.
EXC_TYPE_1
= PANEL,80,,CORAL,SYSTEM26
EXC_TYPE_2
= ASSEMBLY,83,,PINK,SYSTEM24
EXC_TYPE_3
= ERECTION,84,,ROYALB LUE,SYS TEM27
A new default value, DRAW_EXC_LINE TYPE, has been implemented. The value controls if the line
type and colour should be drawn or not. This symbolic information can also be set visible/invisible in
the Display Option of Symbolic View Hull Properties.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
261
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Benefits
A better visual drawing interpretation of the different types of excess on boundaries and seams in
symbolic views
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
All AVEVA Marine Drafting based applications
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
262
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.6 Improved Functionality for Editing Evaluation of
Dimension Text *12.1.SP4*
Description
When editing a text in a persisted dimensioning, the change will be persisted when using the
―persisting‖ functions Modify/Dimension/Text Value or the Edit/Text (or Right Mouse Button/Edit)
when the Drafting default keyword DENY_UPDATE_OF_NON_PE RSIS TE D_GEOM set to "Yes‖. The
problem here is that the ―intelligent‖ text will initially be presented in the Edit Text dialog; there is no
way for the user to say that he wants to edit the evaluation of the text instead.
To get the evaluation of the text initially presented in the dialog, the ―non-persisting‖ function Edit/Text
(or Right Mouse Button/Edit) can be used together with the Drafting default keyword
DENY_UPDATE_OF_NON_PERS IS TE D_GE OM set to "No". However, since the modified text is not
persisted, a subsequent evaluation of the dimensioning will overwrite the modification, something that
might irritate the user.
Marine Drafting 12.1 SP4, the functionality has been improved in two ways:
Using the “persisting” functions to edit the dimensioning text:
When editing a dimension text, it is possible to flip between the ―intelligent‖ (original) text and the
evaluated text as predefined value in the Edit Text dialog by pressing the Options button. Note that
Options button will be enabled only if a) the modification is done on ―part level‖ and b) the evaluated
text differs from the ―intelligent‖ text. For consistency reas ons, the choice ―Text value‖ in the
Modify/Dimension dialog has been changed to ―Edit Dimension text‖.
Using the “non-persisting” function to edit the dimensioning text:
To prevent the modified dimension text to be overwritten after a subsequent evaluation of the
dimensioning, it is now possible to remove the dimensioning from PADD before modifying it. This is
done by invoking the "Remove Dimensioning from PADD" subfunction in the Tools/Inspect Drawing
dialog (the corresponding MarApi and Vitesse functions were introduced in 12.SP3.1).
Removing the dimensioning from PADD makes it possible for the user to ―freely‖ modify the
dimensioning component without losing the changes when later using the Drafting Modify/Dimension
functions 'Move Dimension Line' and 'Slant Witness Line'.
There are two drawbacks with de-persisting:
1.
The dimensioning loses its associativity
2.
The Drafting Modify/Dimension functions ‖Text Properties‖ and ―Edit Dimension Text‖ cannot
be used
Note also that de-persisting a dimensioning component is NOT reversible.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
263
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Benefits
Improved functionality to modify dimension text evaluation.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Draft / Marine Drafting / Operator’s Instructions / Tools / Inspect Drawing.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
264
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.7 Controlling the Prefix for Longitudinal Annotations
*12.1.SP4*
Description
In Marine Drafting 12.1 SP4 it is possible to control the prefix for longitudinals in the Annotate/Position
Ruler function.
A new Drafting Default keyword RULER_LONGITUDINA L_P REF has been introduced for this
purpose.
Keyword:
RULER_LONGITUDINAL_PREF
System default value:
"L"
Explanation:
Controls prefix for longitudinals in the Annotate/Position Ruler function
Legal values:
Any string
Benefits
Better control of layout for longitudinal annotations.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Draft / Marine Drafting / User Guide / Appendices / Drafting Default File
Keywords.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
265
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.8 Deleting Labels Generated via Autotagging *12.1.SP4*
Description
In Marine Drafting 12.1 SP4, it is now possible to delete labels created via autotagging.
No warning will be given. Please be aware of that an "update autotagging" command will bring the
label back.
Also, note that deleting autotag-generated labels in old drawings will not work: these labels are still
marked as "undeletable" in the Marine drawing. To make them possible to delete, You have to rerun
the autotagging command.
Benefits
Possible to delete labels created via autotagging.
Compatibility Constraints
Not applicable.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
266
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.9 Dynamic Highlighting when Inserting Parallel Curve
*12.1.SP4*
Description
In Marine Drafting 12.1 SP4, dynamic highlighting has been introduced in the function Insert/Parallel
Curve. This means that the resulting curve will be highlighted dynamically as the user moves the
cursor for identification or ―pass-through‖ point.
Benefits
Improved user interface. The resulting curve is previewed.
Compatibility Constraints
Not applicable.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
267
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.10
New Style Dialogs
*12.1.SP4*
•
Description
In Marine Drafting 12.1 SP4, two ―old-style‖ dialogs have been modernised.
The first one is used in the Modify/Dimension/Presentation function to select a layout for the arrows
and text placement.
The second one is used in the Tools/Model View/Explode to set the Panel status, i.e. control if
stiffeners, flanges etc should stay on panel or be part of the explode process
Benefits
Improved user interface.
Compatibility Constraints
Not applicable.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
268
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.11
Render “Fill-styled” Items First
*12.1.SP4*
Description
When creating fillstyles (especially solid fill) the fillstyle evaluation might obscure other entities on the
display. This depends on the order in which the content of the drawing is rendered and occurs for all
entities that are rendered before the fill style. This order depends primarily on the colour of the fillstyle
and secondarily on traversal order for that colour, something that has not been possible to control by
user.
In Marine Drafting 12.1 SP4 it is possible to force ―fill=styled‖ contours to be rendered before any
other entities in the drawing, thus ensuring that they will not obscure any other information. Note that
the order in which the ―fill-styled‖ contours themselves are drawn is still out of user-control (i.e. ―fillstyled‖ contours will obscure each other).
A new Drafting Default keyword FILL_STYLE_SEND_TO_BACK has been introduced for this
purpose.
Keyword:
System default
value:
Explanation:
Legal values:
FILL_STYLE_SEND_TO_BA CK
―Yes‖
Controls if contours
with fill style should
be drawn first
"No" - The rendering
order is determined
by the system
(depends primarily
on colour and
secondarily on
traversal order)
"Yes" - Contours
with fillstyle will be
drawn first, thus
making sure nothing
else is obscured by
the fillstyle
evaluation.
Note 1: using this feature might slow down performance slightly (about 15%) during repaint
operations.
Note 2: solid-filled contours in system components (e.g. leader line terminator arrows in label
components) will not be drawn first.
Benefits
Possibility to avoid contours with fillstyle to obscure other entites.
Compatibility Constraints
None
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
269
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
For More Information
Only noted here
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
270
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.12
Blanking behind Labels and Dimensionings
*12.1.SP4*
Description
In Marine Drafting 12.1 SP4 the blanking functionality has been implemented for labels and
dimensionings. Blanking means that all model geometry behind a certain system component will be
―blanked out‖ (invisible) during a repaint of the drawing.
A number of Drafting Default keywords controlling the blanking concept have been introduced for this
purpose.
Keyword
System
default value
Explanation
Legal values
LABEL_AUTO_BLANKING
―Yes‖
Holds the modal
blanking flag during label
creation
"Yes" - Blank-out model
geometry obscured by
the label
"No‖ - Do not blank-out
obscured entities
LABEL_BLANKING_MARGIN
0.0
Holds the modal
blanking margin during
label creation
Non-negative
DIM_AUTO_BLANK ING
―Yes‖
Holds the modal
blanking flag during
dimensioing creation
"Yes" - Blank-out model
geometry obscured by
the dimensioning
"No" - Do not blank-out
obscured entities
DIM_BLANKING_MARGIN
0.0
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
Holds the modal
blanking margin during
dimensioning creation
Non-negative
271
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
RENDER_AUTO_B LANK ING
User Bulletin
―Yes‖
Controls globally
whether auto-blanking
should be applied during
repaint.
"Yes" - Blanking
enabled
"No" - Blanking disabled
Benefits
Improved way of visualize labels and dimensionings
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Draft / Marine Drafting / User Guide / Appendices / Drafting Default File
Keywords.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
272
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.13
Default Initial Point Mode
*12.1.SP4*
Description
In Marine Drafting 12.1 SP4 it is possible to control the initial 2D point definition mode when invoking
a geometry definition function
A new Drafting Default keyword DEF_POINT_MODE has been introduced for this purpose.
Keyword:
DEF_POINT_MODE
System default value:
2 (Cursor position)
Explanation:
Controls the initial 2D point mode when invoking geometry definition functions
Legal values:
The wanted 2D point definition mode is given as an integer:
= 1 Key in
= 2 Cursor position
= 3 End or node point
= 4 Existing point
= 5 Symbol connection
= 6 Auto point
= 7 Point on arc at angle
= 8 Arc centre
= 9 Point at distance along
= 10 Mid point
= 13 Intersecting point
= 21 Closest segment point
= 22 Centre of gravity
= 23 Event point
Benefits
Possibility to control ―initial 2D point definition mode‖
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Draft / Marine Drafting / User Guide / Appendices / Drafting Default File
Keywords.
Affected Programs
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
273
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
274
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.14
Labels
*12.1.SP4*
Description
In 12.1.SP4 there are many improvements for creating and modifying labels. Above all, the user
interface is completely new and offers a whole new experience when working with labels. Some of the
new features are:
Support for symbolic templates: you can now create labels based on symbolic template, which can
be much more advanced that the general labels.
Much fewer “clicks” to create labels: you will now start by selecting all properties of the label. You
can then place this label for many models.
Better support for intelligent texts: it is now possible for the system administrator to create a
predefined set of intelligent texts with descriptions. The user can then select from this list and does
not need to know how to form the expressions.
Move the leader line start position: for existing labels, created manually or via autotagging, you can
now modify the leader line start position with the new functi
Label placement
intelligent placement of a selection of labels. The labels can be spread with ―remote placement‖ or
―local placement‖ with a number of options.
Delete labels created by autotagging
delete also labels created via autotagging. (Please note that this only works if you have run
autotagging in 12.1.SP4.)
Benefits
Labels can now be created in an easy and efficient way.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Please see the documentation:
Refer to User Guide Draft / Marine Drafting / Operator’s Instructions / Annotate / Label,
Draft / Marine Drafting / Operator’s Instructions / Modify / Label and Draft / Marine Drafting /
Operator’s Instructions / Modify / Label Placement.
Affected Programs
Marine Drafting/Hull Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
275
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.15
Distribute Drawings Across Several DEPTs
*12.1.SP4*
Description
There is a new attribute on department (DEPT) elements that can be used to distribute drawings of
the same type across different DEPTs. The attribute is called PADDXP/RESSION and is a compiled
PML expression to be evaluated when creating a new drawing in order to find an appropriate DEPT
element as the owner of the new drawing. The expression is evaluated against the drawing type of
the new drawing and a typical example on how the PADDXP attribute can be defined to keep a single
database type within a DEPT.
>set PADDXP (marpty eq 1)
Two different drawing types can be put in below the same DEPT like this:
>set PADDXP (marpty eq 1 or marpty eq 4)
There is a fallback implementation used when no appropriate DEPT can be found using the PADDXP
attribute, or if the PADDXP attribute has not been set on any DEPT elements. This fallback
implementation picks up DEPT name from the project definition file (i.e. the d065-file), and it is the
same mechanism as used prior to introducing the PADDXP attribute.
It should be noted that the REGI name is picked up from the d065 file as before, via the appropriate
environment variable e.g. SB_SDB_PADD.
Benefits
Drawings of the same drawing type can now be distributed across several databases, provided that
the DEPT elements have been pre-created in the appropriate databases.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Draft / Marine Drafting / Operator’ Instructions / FILE / NEW DRAWING.
Refer to User Guide Draft / Marine Drafting / User Guide / Model Viewing and General Drafting /
Concepts / Drawings.
Affected Programs
Marine Drafting/Hull Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
276
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.16
Open Drawing in Read Only Mode
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Until now there have been some severe problems when opening a drawing in Marine Drafting as
―read-only‖. When you started to modify a drawing opened as read-only two things could happen:
1.
If you had write access to the drawing and did modification that update the PADD database
(create a new view for instance) then the drawing would be claimed.
2.
If you had no write access (or the drawing was claimed by another user) then the
modifications you made failed to be stored in the PADD database.
Both situation were confusing and could cause you to lose data in the PADD database.
In 12.1.SP4 we have a new solution for these situations that we hope will be more robust.
Basically it means that if you want to do permanent changes to a drawing you have no write access
to, you will have to create a copy. So when you now open a drawing it write mode but fail to claim it,
the system will ask if you want to create a copy.
If you still want to open the drawing as read-only to avoid claiming if for other users then the system
will create a temporary copy without connections to the PADD database. You can do some
modification to this drawing but you will not be able to save them, neither with the ―Save Drawing‖ nor
with the ―Save Drawing As‖ function. You can only output the modification with ―Export SDB‖. Also:
modifications that require the PADD database to be updated will not be possible so do. For example:
draw outfitting, create or modify associative labels/dimensions.
Benefits
There is a more robust and safe solution for opening drawings in ―read-only‖ mode.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Draft / Marine Drafting / Operator’s Instructions Drafting / File / Open Drawing.
Affected Programs
Marine Drafting/Hull Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
277
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.17
Long Drawing Names
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Until now there have been some inconsistencies in how you can name a drawing when doing ―New
Drawing‖ and ―Save Drawing As‖. ―Save Drawing As‖ has been much more flexible since it allows
long drawing names and free use of lowercase and uppercase characters. ―New Drawing‖ now has
the same flexibility as ―Save Drawing As‖.
You can use up to 115 characters in a drawing name.
In case you would like to limit the number of characters that can be used for a drawing there is a new
drafting default keyword: DWG_NAME_MAX_LEN. This can be set to a value between 10 and 115.
115 is the default value.
Benefits
―New Drawing‖ is now equally flexible as ―Save Drawing As‖ when it comes to maximum number of
character and lower case vs. uppercase.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Marine Drafting/Hull Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
278
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.18
PML Triggers
*12.1.SP4*
Description
A new PML based trigger mechanism is introduced meant to replace the Marine legacy Vitesse
trigger functionality. The PML triggers operates on the same events as the Vitesse triggers and are
named with similar names as the Vitesse triggers (see User Guide). The presence of a PML trigger
overrules the corresponding Vitesse trigger which becomes obsolete and not considered for
execution. A Vitesse trigger is considered for execution only if corresponding PML trigger not is found.
Benefits
Customizations made by Vitesse triggers can be replaced by similar PML driven functions.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Legacy Applications / Developers Toolk it / Vitesse / Triggers .
Affected Programs
Marine Drafting and Hull Design.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
279
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.19
New Drawing Types for Automatic Drawing
Production (ADP) *12.1.SP3*
Description
In 12.1.SP3 we have introduced some new marine drawing types that will be set for drawings
generated with the ADP tools in Marine Drafting.
This will make it easier to access the drawings via the ―Open Drawing‖ dialog in Marine Drafting. In
the PADD database the new types are visible as new values for the MARPTYPE attribute of the
SHEET element.
There are also corresponding project environment variables to set up where Marine Drafting should
look for the drawing types in the ―Open Drawing‖ dialog. The basic variable like
―SB_HVAC_SKETCH_PDB ‖ is normally just set to itself (―SB_HVAC_SKETCH_P DB‖) is the marine
project setup file, while the ―_PADD‖ variable should define the DEPARTMENT and REGISTRY
where the drawings of this type are stored. Example of setup:
<var name="SB_HVAC_SKETCH_PDB">
<value><![CDATA[SB_HVAC_SKETCH_PDB]]></value>
</var>
<var name="SB_HVAC_SKETCH_PDB_PADD">
<value><![CDATA[HVACSketch;HVACSk]]></value>
</var>
Please note that the new drawing types will only be set when you run the ADP applications in Marine
Drafting, they will not be set in Outfitting Draft.
Below is a summary of the new types:
Name of Drawing Type as
Displayed in the “Open
Drawing” Dialogue
Marptype
Environment variables
HVAC sketch
29
SB_HVAC_SKETCH_PDB
SB_HVAC_SKETCH_PDB_PADD
*)Isometric ADP drawing
30
SB_ISOADP_PDB
SB_ISOADP_PDB_PADD
Steelwork Detailing ADP drawing
31
SB_STEELWORK_DETAIL_PDB
SB_STEELWORK_DETAIL_PDB_PA D
D
*)Area-Based ADP drawing
32
SB_ABAADP_PDB
SB_ABAADP_PDB_PADD
*)Multi-Discipline Support ADP
drawing
33
SB_MDSADP_PDB
SB_MDSADP_PDB_PADD
*) - The drawing type is not yet active in Marine Drafting (since you cannot run these ADP tools in
Marine Drafting yet) but they are reserved for future use.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
280
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Benefits
It is now easier to organize your ADP drawings and to list/open them in the ―Open Drawing‖ dialog.
Compatibility Constraints
In order to see the new drawing types you must upgrade your PADD database(s) with the optional
upgrade 12010301.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
281
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.20
Draw Pipe Spools
*12.1.SP3*
Description
It is possible to draw pipe spools in marine drafting, provided that VIEW element is given the correct
SPPURP (attribute of the view). It must be set to PSKETCH or PASSMB.
In 12.1.SP3 we have made this easier by automatically setting this attribute to PASSMB when the
user adds a pipe spool to the view via the Marine Drafting user interface, for example with drag &
drop or via the search utility.
However, you should not mix drawing of pipe spools and drawing of pipes in the same view. If you
draw pipes in a view where the SPPURP is PASSMB, there is a side effect: both the pipes and the
pipe spools will show up in the drawing. In other words, the pipes will appear with ―double‖ geometry.
This can have a strange effect if you try to pick p-points in the drawing or if you are using the Model>Exchange function.
Benefits
It is now easier to draw pipe spools in any drawing.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Marine Drafting/Hull Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
282
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.21
Automatic Drawing Production (ADP)
*12.1.SP3*
Description
The General Automatic Drawing Production (General ADP) and Steelwork Detailing (SD) functionality
found in Outfitting draft is now available in Marine Drafting.
Benefits
General ADP automatically creates an annotated drawing from a specified part of the design.
SD creates drawings of steelwork sections with marker and end preparation information.
Compatibility Constraints
Not applicable.
For More Information
See User Guide Draft / Drawing Production / Automatic Drawing Production / General ADP.
Affected Programs
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
283
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.22
Sample C# Project
*12.1.SP3*
Description
A new ―Samples‖ directory is available in the installation. This directory contains sample C# projects
that shows how to create stand-alone applications and add-ins using the Marine .NET API. The
Samples.zip projects previously found in the top directory has been moved here and a new C# project
has been added that shows how to create a stand-alone application for DXF import. This sample
replaces sz020.exe and sz021.exe that have been removed along with other obsolete programs and
directories: ―customise‖ directory, sy020.exe, tbdbutil.exe.
Benefits
The installation now includes a C# sample that makes it easy to create customer specific applications.
Compatibility Constraints
Not applicable.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
sy020.exe
sz020.exe
sz021.exe
tbdbutil.exe
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
284
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.23
Handle Subpictures as SDB Files
*12.1.SP3*
Description
There are two new functions to handle subpictures. A subpicture can now be saved directly to a file of
SDB format and can also be retrieved directly from such a file.
The function ―Tools\Subpicture\Save to SDB‖ will let you define a subpicture and store in in an SDB
file in the file system.
The function ―Insert\Subpicture from SDB‖ will let you retrieve a subpicture directly from an SDB file
and place it in the drawing.
Benefits
Storing the subpictures as SDB files makes it is easier to share them between projects.
Compatibility Constraints
These two new functions have the same limitations as when you export/import the whole drawing via
the SDB format. You will see the same geometry in the target drawing but the underlying PADD
structure may not look exactly as it did in the source drawing. The PADD structure is recreated in the
target drawing based on the Marine Drawing object stored in the SDB file. For example you will lose
the associativity for labels and dimensions, i.e. if the label/dimension refers to a p-point in the source
drawing this will be a geometric point in the target drawing. Thus the label/dimension will not adjust to
model changes when you do ―update annotation‖ in the target drawing.
For More Information
See User Guide Marine Drafting/Drafting/Operator’s Instructions/Tools/Subpicture/Save to SBD and
Marine Drafting/Drafting/Operat or’s Instructions/Insert/Subpicture from SDB
Affected Programs
Marine Drafting/Hull Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
285
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.24
Distance to RSO Dimension
*12.1.SP3*
Description
A new dimension function called Distance to RSO has been added to Marine Drafting. It calculates
the distance from a selected model part to the closes RSO along one of the X-, Y- or Z-axes. It also
creates a dimensioning component to display the resulting value in the drawing.
The dimension text can be customised by clicking one of the Format radio buttons.
Benefits
A new dimension component can be created that will show the distance to the closest RSO from a
model object.
Compatibility Constraints
Not applicable.
For More Information
See User Guide Marine Drafting / Operator’s Instructions Drafting / Dimension / 3D / Distance to RSO.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
286
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.25
Radius/Diameter Dimensioning for Outfitting
Models *12.1.SP3*
Description
In Marine Drafting 12.1 SP3, Outfitting model primitives involving cylindrical surfaces will be drawn as
arc contours instead of polylines under the following conditions:
The view is orthogonal
The view type is not ‗true wireline‘ or ‗modelled wireline‘
This means that it is possible for the user to create Diameter/Radius dimensionings also in outfitting
models if the above conditions are fulfilled, i.e.
the primitive involves a cylindrical surface and is drawn in an orthogonal view
The view type is not ‗true wireline‘ or ‗modelled wireline‘
Benefits
Possible to measure radius/diameter in outfitting model items
More accurate viewing of cylindrical surfaces in outfitting models.
Compatibility Constraints
Not applicable.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
287
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.26
Remove Obsolete .SDB Files
*12.1.SP3*
Description
The Admin functionality to merge changes from several database sessions now takes external
references to .SDB files into consideration when sessions of PADD databases are merged. All .SDB
files that become obsolete as of a session merge operation will be deleted as part of the operation.
Benefits
The size of a .SDB file can be rather big and a drawing can refer several versions of .SDB files (each
per Save Drawing operation). Through this new mechanism it is now possible to keep the file system
clean from obsolete .SDB files.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Admin, Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
288
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.27
Layers for Outfitting Models
*12.1.SP3*
Description
For a long time all outfitting models have been put into the same layer in the marine drawing object.
You could see this when using the function ―View\Layer‖ for example. All Outfitting models were in
layer ―-2501‖. This has now been improved; each Outfitting discipline is now in separate layer. The
Outfitting disciplines and their new layers are:
Pipe
layer -2701
Equipment
layer -2801
Cable way
layer -2901
Room
layer -3001
Structure
layer -3101
Ventilation
layer -3201
You will see the change when you create new views. For old drawings an update design will change
the layers. If you want to upgrade many drawings in batch you can do so with the utility program
sy013.
Please note that the use of new layers requires that you have upgraded your database(s) with the
optional upgrade 12010301.
New layers also make it possible to identify models of different outfitting disciplines in the drawing, for
example with the MARAPI function ―ModelIdentify‖.
Benefits
You can now show/hide the various outfitting disciplines on the screen with the ―View\Layer‖ function.
When exporting to DXF you will get one layer for each outfitting dis cipline.
Compatibility Constraints
The PADD database to which the drawing belongs must be upgraded with the optional upgrade
12010301. If not, the old layer will be used.
For More Information
See User Guide Marine Drafting / Appendices / Outfitting Layers and
User Guide Marine Drafting / Model Viewing and General Drafting / Import / Export using 2D DXF /
Layer Control in DXF Export.
Release note about Optional Upgrade in 12.1.SP3.
Affected Programs
Marine Drafting/Hull Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
289
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.28
List Drawings
*12.1.SP3*
Description
There is a significant performance improvement when you list drawing in the ―Open Drawing‖
dialogue. You will notice this when you list all drawings (search string is ―*‖) or use a search string
starting with a wild card (―*XXX‖).
In order to see the improvement you must upgrade your PADD database(s) with the optional upgrade
12010301.
Benefits
Faster listing of drawings when search string is ―*‖ or ―*XXX‖.
Compatibility Constraints
The improvement requires the optional upgrade 12010301.
For More Information
See separate release note for optional upgrade in 12.1.SP3.
Affected Programs
Marine Drafting/Hull Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
290
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.29
Set Drawing Type during DXF/DWG Import
*12.1.SP3*
Description
When a DXF/DWG file is imported it is now possible to set the drawing type directly in the Import
dialog.
Benefits
An imported DXF/DWG file can be given a drawing type.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Marine Drafting / Operator’s Instructions Drafting / FILE / IMPORT / DXF and
Operator’s Instructions Drafting / FILE / IMPORT / DWG.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
291
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
292
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.30
Draw Outfitting Models
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP3*
Description
There are some performance improvements when drawing outfitting models. The improvement can
be noticed when adding new outfitting models to en existing view. The performance will be
significantly better when adding only a few outfitting models to a very large existing view. Update
design of a complete view is not affected.
You will benefit from the improvement in the ―Insert/Model‖ function, when doing drag&drop from the
design explorer to an existing view or when inserting models via the ―Search Utility‖.
Another improvement is that you can now the update single outfitting models in a view via the
―Tools/Model/Exchange‖ function.
There is one limitation though. This ―incremental‖ way of handle insert model will of course not give a
correct result for hidden line view. Here all models must be considered in order to achieve the proper
result. For hidden line views you will not see any performance improvement. The exchange model
function will actually go ahead and update but give you a warning.
Benefits
Improved performance when inserting a few outfitting models into existing views. Possibility to
exchange single outfitting models.
Compatibility Constraints
None. You will see the performance improvement also in old drawings.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Marine Drafting/Hull Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
293
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.31
Autotagging
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP3*
Description
The Autotagging functionality found in Outfitting draft is now available in Marine Drafting.
Benefits
Autotagging helps you to automatically label design elements according to user defined rules.
Compatibility Constraints
Not applicable.
For More Information
See User Guide Outfitting Draft / Labelling / Autotagging.
Affected Programs
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
294
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.32
Databank for Drawing Forms
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP3*
Description
The databank for drawing forms can now optionally be pointed out by a new marine environment
variable SBD_FORM. If this variable is not defined, SBD_STD is valid for drawing forms.
Benefits
The drawing form names can be listed without being mixed by standard subpictures.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Hull Detail Design / Planar Modelling / planar Hull Modelling Characteristics / System
Components / Data Bank s.
Affected Programs
Marine Drafting and Hull Design.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
295
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.33
User Bulletin
KEEP_SESSION_FILES
*12.1.SP2*
Description
There is a default variable in Marine Drafting controlling whether .sdb files belonging to old s essions
should be preserved each time a new version of the sheet is created (i.e. each time the drawing is
saved). This default variable is called KEEP_SESSION_FILES and can be assigned either YES or
NO.
Unfortunately, the interpretation of the value is inversed. This means that in order to keep all session
files, KEEP_SESSION_FILES previously needed to be set to NO.
This issue has been corrected in 12.1.SP2, and from now on the values have the following meaning:
KEEP_SESSION_FILES=YES
KEEP_SESSION_FILES=NO
Keep old .sdb files
Remove old .sdb files (except .sdb files
belonging to stamped sessions).
There is a support incident about this issue which has been marked as solved in 12.1.SP2, 41493
(KEEP_SESSION_FILES does not work.).
Benefits
Interpreting the value correctly makes the system more consistent.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only documented here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
296
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.34
SZ021
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP2*
Description
The batch program SZ021 used to import a DXF file to a drawing is no longer supported and will be
removed in next release.
The recommended way to import DXF files in batch is to write a C# (or PML) program using the
Marine .NET API. We are in the process of creating a small example to be made available on our
support site.
Benefits
SZ021 only imports DXF files. Using the Marine .NET API it will be possible to import (and export) all
supported formats.
Compatibility Constraints
Not applicable.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
sz021
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
297
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.35
User Bulletin
The Restrict Function
*12.1.SP2*
Description
In Marine Drafting 12.1 SP2 it is possible to capture also invisible geometry in the Restrict function
(Edit/Delete/By Area).
Note that with "invisible" we here mean both geometry that are marked as invisible and geometries
that are not shown because its layer is hidden (via View/Layer).
A new Drafting Default keyword ALLOW_RESTRICT_INV ISIB LE_GE OM has been introduced for this
purpose.
Keyword:
ALLOW_RESTRICT_INVIS IBLE_GEOM
System default value:
"No"
Explanation:
Controls if invisible elements should be treated in the Delete-By-Area function or not.
Legal values:
"No"
Do not treat invisible elements in the Delete-By-Area function
"Yes"
Treat invisible elements in the Delete-By-Area function
It is also possible to change this condition while inside the Delete-By-Area function. For this purpose
the OPTION button has been enabled in the multiple choice dialog in which the user selects the
Restrict condition: "Keep inside" or "Keep outside".
Clicking the OPTIONS button here swaps the "treat invisible geometry" condition (from "invisibles
ignored" to "invisibles captured" and vice versa).
Benefits
Improved productivity in the Restrict function.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
298
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
See User Guide Marine Drafting / Edit / Delete / By Area.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
299
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.36
Delete System Components
*12.1.SP2*
Description
In Marine Drafting it has been possible to delete system components of a certain kind one by one, or
all in drawing. In Marine Drafting 12.1 SP2, the user can also delete all system components of a
certain kind within a specified subpicture (view or subview).
System components of following kind are treated:
Dimensioning
Label
Note
Position Number
Hatching
Markup
Cloud
When entering the Edit/Delete/<system component> function, press ALL and then OPTIONS to delete
all system components within a specified subpicture. Now You can indicate the subpicture from which
to delete all system components.
Benefits
Improved productivity in the delete function.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
See User Guide Marine Drafting / Operator’s Instructions / Edit / Delete.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
300
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.37
Multi-line Dimension Texts
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP2*
Description
In Marine Drafting 12.1 SP2, it is possible for the user to create multi-line text in the following kind of
dimensionings:
Linear 2D and 3D
Radius
Diameter
Angle 2D and 3D
Curved
Axis Parallel
Distance To Plane Leader/Box.
The marker for new-line separator is "#/" (hash slash).
Example for Linear dimensioning:
yields..
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
301
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Benefits
Improved productivity in dimensioning functions.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Se User Guide Marine Drafting / Operator’s Instructions / Dimension
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
302
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.38
User Bulletin
Marine Drafting – Open Sheet
*12.1.SP2*
Description
It is possible to open a marine drawing sheet by using the right click menu of Draft Explorer and select
the ―Open Sheet‖ menu item.
Benefits
Quicker way to open a certain drawing if it is displayed in the draft explorer tree.
Compatibility Constraints
Not applicable.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
303
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.39
Marine System Font
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP2*
Description
A TrueType font called ‗Marine System‘ with the same appearance as the TBSystemFont‘s has been
introduced in 12.1 SP2.
This font contains the entire set of glyphs from all TBSystemFonts (0-7), i.e. the English, Cyrillic,
German and Scandinavian characters.
Benefits
TrueType fonts are more general and fit in better with the database and other parts of the system.
Compatibility Constraints
Please note that in order to use the Marine System font in Marine Drafting or in Hull Design, it first
needs to be registered in the project using the Admin module, just like any other TrueType font.
For More Information
User Guide Marine Drafting / Appendices / System-defined Text Fonts
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
304
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.40
*12.1.SP2*
Insert Text Shortcut Keys
Description
New shortcut keys have been added to the Insert Text form in Marine Drafting 12.1.SP2, for easier
access to the previously entered texts.
When the text box has focus, pressing ALT + Up (or ALT + Down) will move focus to the history
combo box containing the previously entered texts and scroll the combo box list one step up or down.
When the combo box has focus, the drop down list could be displayed by pressing the ALT + Down
keys again.
To cycle through the history combo box items while keeping focus to the text box, press CONTROL +
Up (or Control + Down).
As before, following standard Windows behaviour, focus can be moved with the TAB key (SHIFT +
TAB to move focus backwards), and the combo box can also get focus by using the mouse.
Benefits
The new shortcuts make it possible to move focus to the history combo box with fewer keyboard hits /
mouse clicks.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only documented here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
305
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.41
User Bulletin
Symbolic View Menu
Description
All functionality handling symbolic views has been moved to a new top menu ―Symbolic View‖.
The ―Symbolic View‖ menu is available in the following applications:
Hull Design – Curved Modelling
Hull Design – Planar Modelling
Hull Design – Structural Design
Hull Design – Space Management
Marine Drafting
Please note that the menu function previously called ―Create‖ has now been renamed to ―Section...‖
to unify the function names in this menu.
This means that the following has been removed:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
306
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
The Planar Hull/View menu in Planar Modelling and Structural Design.
The Curved Hull/View menu in Curved Modelling and Structural Design.
The view handling buttons in the Model Selection dialog (Insert/Model).
Benefits
All symbolic view functionality is available in one single place making it easier to find these functions.
All symbolic views are also available from Marine Drafting making it possible to use Marine Drafting
for more types of drawings.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Please see the Hull Design documentation.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
307
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.42
User Bulletin
Default Action at Start-up
Description
Using a default variable INITIAL_DRAWING it is now possible to define what Marine Drafting and Hull
Design should do at start-up.
The following possibilities exist:
Value of INITIAL_DRAWING
Action
NONE
Do nothing (same as Hull Drafting 12.0).
NEW
Open a new drawing named UNTITLED<n> where <n>
is selected so that UNTITLE D<n> is non-existing.
LAST
Open the most recently used drawing during last
session.
ASK_NEW
Show the New Drawing dialog.
ASK_OPEN
Show the Open Drawing dialog.
Benefit
Most functions in Marine Drafting require an open drawing so the first thing a user does is to either
create or open a drawing.
This new default variable will allow users to start working directly when Marine Drafting has started.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Marine Drafting / Appendices / Drafting Default File Keywords / Miscellaneous .
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
308
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.43
User Bulletin
New Module Name
Description
Hull Drafting has been renamed to Marine Drafting.
This name change affects the following:
Old name
New name
Hull Drafting
Marine Drafting
PDMSUI\hdra
PDMSUI\mdra
PMLLIB\hulldrafting
PMLLIB\marinedrafting
PMLLIB\hulldrafting\hDraPickElement.pmlfnc
PMLLIB\marinedrafting\mDraPickElement.pmlfnc
PMLLIB\hulldrafting\apphdramain.pmlfrm
PMLLIB\marinedrafting\ appmdramain.pmlfrm
marhdra.exe
mardra.exe
Benefits
Previous name was in many cases misleading and made c ustomers confused when it came to which
Drafting module to use. Using the Marine Drafting name strengthens our recommendation to use
Marine Drafting for both hull and outfitting users.
Compatibility Constraints
Please note that in order to use Marine Drafting 12.1 with a project, the module definition in the
project must be modified. This will be done using the upgrade script for 12.1.
There is also a macro PDMSUI\mdra\admin\hdra2mdra.mac that can be used from the Admin module
to change the module definition.
It is important to note that any customisation done by customers that checks the module name might
have to be modified to work properly.
For More Information
See User Guide Marine Drafting.
Affected Programs
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
309
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.44
User Bulletin
Drawing Export Formats
Description
Marine Drafting can export a drawing to the following formats (File/Export):
DXF
HPGL
HPGL/2
IGES
SDB
SVG
TIFF with LZW compression
The following formats have been removed:
CGM
TIFF with PackBits compression.
Benefits
Supporting both HPGL and HPGL/2 will make it easier for customer to interact with different 3rd-party
products.
TIFF with LZW compression offers better compression.
Compatibility Constraints
The CGM format is no longer supported.
For More Information
See User Guide Marine Drafting / Operator’s Instructions / File / Export.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
310
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.45
User Bulletin
Navigate To
Description
The context menu available in the 2D canvas of Marine Drafting/Hull Design has been extended with
a set of new ―Navigate to‖ functions:
The functions are useful to quickly find out what a selected graphical entity represents. The functions
will identify the closest entity in the drawing and navigate to the corresponding element in one of the
explorers: ―Draft Explorer‖, ―Design Explorer‖ or the ―Marine Drawing Explorer‖. You will only see the
effect of the function if the corresponding explorer is currently opened.
Benefits
It will make it easier to get information about a graphical entity in a drawing.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
311
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.46
User Bulletin
General Note
Description
The General Note function is extended by multiple-lines feature and a new Options dialog.
Benefits
More user friendly way of creating general notes.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
312
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.47
User Bulletin
Choose Projection
Description
The Choose Projection dialog has been re-designed.
It can be displayed by clicking on the Projection button in the InsertModel… dialog:
It is also displayed during drag & drop from an Explorer tree when choosing to drop an element into a
new view, or by choosing the ToolsModel ViewChoose Projection menu function.
Benefits
This re-designed dialog provides a more modern and attractive user experience.
The choose projection step during the Insert/Model process is now removed if the user wants to use
the already selected view projection.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
313
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.48
User Bulletin
Fill Styles
Description
The Outfitting draft Fill Style concept has been implemented in Marine Drafting, making it possible to
add any combination of hatch patterns to contours in the drawing. A Fill Style can be system-defined
or user-defined, and contains the definition of an arbitrary number of hatch patterns.
Compared to the existing Hatch Pattern functionality, the Fill Style concept is associative and can
combine any number of Hatch Patterns. Also Solid Fill is available.
The Fill Style can be applied to any contour in the drawing, closed or possible to close. It is also
possible to apply the fill style on a general area defined by multiple contours. In both cases, the fill
style will be persisted in PADD.
The Fill Style can be selected and applied to contours in two ways:
MB right-click on a contour to define, or modify the fill style applied on that contour.
Select the Modify/Fill Style function to select a Fill style to apply to given contours.
The dialog for selecting Fill Styles looks like below:
Benefits
Possibility to use the Outfitting Draft-defined Fill Styles in Marine Drafting, including association.
Compatibility Constraints
The new attributes added to HPATTErns (see Outfitting Draft) might not be handled in Marine
Drafting.
Note that the old Hatch Pattern concept will be deprecated in a future release.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
314
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
For More Information
See User Guide Marine Drafting / Operator’s Instructions / Modify / Fill Style.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
315
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.49
User Bulletin
Symbol Files
Description
The files holding the different symbol fonts have been changed from binary to ASCII format and
renamed from d012syxxx.sbd to d012syxxx.port. The reason for this is that these files now will be
easier to maintain and also somewhat more readable for the human eye (even though updating such
a file still should be done with specific Drafting functionality).
Benefits
It will be easier for both provider and customer to maintain the new format.
Compatibility Constraints
The system-defined symbol font files will be delivered in the new ASCII format. However, please note
that any symbol font files modified or created by the customer at site must be converted to the new
ASCII format before it can be used. This is done by running the conversion utility sb022 that is part of
12.0 or older releases.
Note also that the utility programs sb022 (convert from binary to ASCII format) and sb023 (convert
from ASCII to binary format) have been withdrawn in this release.
If needed, the 12.0 or older releases can be used.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
316
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.50
User Bulletin
Dynamic Highlighting
Description
During the creation/definition/indication of lines, arcs and contours in Marine Drafting, the resulting
entity will now be dynamically highlighted as the cursor moves over the drawing. For example, when
creating an arc segment with three points, the resulting segment is highlighted dynamically when third
point is about to be defined.
Dynamic highlighting is implemented during the definition of
Line segments: all definition modes
Arc segments:
all definition modes except ―Point, radius and Tangent‖
PolyLine segments: all definition modes
Ellipses: ―Circumscribed Rectangle‖ and ―Major & Minor Axis‖ and in the following
functionality:
Modify/Stretch Node
Modify/Stretch Elbow
Insert Rectangle/Square with a fillet radius
Insert/Staircase
Benefits
Improved UI during geometry definition: resulting entity is pre-highlighted
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
317
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.51
User Bulletin
Arc Quarter Points
Description
The UI for defining a point on arc periphery has been improved.
Instead of first indicating the arc and then keying in the angle, the Combo Box in the Geometry tool bar
is now used to give the angle. Moreover, by selecting the ―Indicate‖ alternative in the Combo Box the
point on the arc is defined as the periphery point closest to the arc indication. Periphery points close
to one of the four cardinal directions will snap to the corresponding quarter points (0, 90, 180 and 270
degrees).
Benefits
Easy way of defining arc periphery points and in particular the quarter points .
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Marine Drafting / Operator’s Instructions / Format / Geometry mode / 2D points.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
318
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.52
Length
User Bulletin
New Definition of Line Segment, Direction +
Description
When creating a Polyline, a new way of defining a segment has been implemented, namely ―Line by
Direction and Length‖. It works in the same way as ―Line by two Points‖ except that the length of the
resulting line is given in the Combo Box in the Geometry toolbar.
Benefits
This implements a convenient way of creating a line with a given direction and length.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Marine Drafting / Operator’s Instructions / Format / Geometry mode / Polyline.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
319
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.53
User Bulletin
Simple Arithmetic in 2D Offset Input
Description
When giving an offset during point definition, it is now possible to key in simple arithmetic expressions
in the 2D Offset input dialog. For example, the following input is valid: 0.02*300 + pi N.
Benefits
Simple arithmetic accepted in the offset input dialog.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
320
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.54
Ones
User Bulletin
Automatic Chaining of New Contours to Existing
Description
When creating a new contour, this will optionally be chained to existing c ontours in the drawing. This
options is controlled by a new Drafting default keyword AUTO_CHAIN with values ―Yes‖ or ―No‖
(system default).
The system will compare the start and ending points of a new contour with the ones of existing
contours structurally belonging to the same component as the created one. If any of them coincides
with the start/ending points of the new contour it will be chained to the new contour. Note that at most
two contours can be chained to the new geometry, one in the beginning and one in the end.
The criterion for an existing contour to be chained to the created one is thus:
AUTO_CHAIN is set to ―Yes‖
The existing contour belongs to the same component as the created one
The existing contour is not closed
The start or ending points of the existing contour coincides (zero tolerance) with the
start/ending points of the created contour
The Automatic Chain concept is implemented in the following functions:
Insert/Polyline
Insert/Staircase
Benefits
This will improve productivity. Instead of invoking the Modify/Chain function as post-action, the
chaining is performed automatically as new contours are created.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
See User Guide Marine Drafting / Appendices / Drafting Default File Keywords / Miscellaneous.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
321
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.55
User Bulletin
Dimensioning UI Improvements
Description
A ‖Reset‖ button has been implemented in all dimension dialogs .
Clicking it will reset the dimension text to its system default value (e.g. #DIM() for linear
dimensioning).
When positioning the result of a linear dimensioning (2D, 3D or Axis-parallel), the complete graphics
(except witness lines) will be highlighted instead of just the dimension lines.
When positioning the result of a linear dimensioning (2D, 3D or Axis-parallel), it is now possible to
change the dimensioning parameters (text height etc) without having to re-define all measure points.
Instead of pressing Cancel and enter the ―Advanced‖ function in the dimension dialog, just click
Options and do the parameter changes without losing the given measure points.
Benefits
This will improve productivity in dimensioning functions.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
322
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.56
User Bulletin
Improved Dragging Technique
Description
During dragging, the highlight colour will be the same independently of the background colour (like
steady highlighting).
TrueType texts will now be dragged with full display.
Benefits
This will improve graphic feedback.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
323
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.57
Plane Reference Text in Distance-To-Plane
Dimensioning
Description
In the Distance To Plane dimensioning, when principal plane is Centre Line, Base Line or Aft
Perpendicular, modifications of the Plane Reference Text will be remembered and saved in the
Drafting default system.
For this purpose, three new default keywords have been introduced:
Keyword
System Default
DIM_DTP_BASELINE_REF_TEXT
― from BL‖
DIM_DTP_CENTRELINE_REF_TEXT
― off CL‖
DIM_DTP_AFTPERPENDICULAR_REF_TEXT
― from AP‖
Benefits
This will improve productivity. The system remembers user modifications of Plane Reference Text.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Marine Drafting / Appendices / Drafting Default File Keywords / Dimensioning.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
324
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.58
User Bulletin
Delete Last Entity
Description
The Edit/Delete/Last Entity functionality has been re-introduced.
Benefits
Make it possible to ―undo‖ last created entity without having to exit current function and explicitly
delete the entity.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Marine Drafting / Operator’s Instructions / Edit / Delete / Last entity.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
325
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.59
User Bulletin
Persisting Contours to PADD
Description
In 12.1 release of Marine Drafting, persistence to PADD has been further implemented.
Creation and modification of contours will now be persisted in most situations, like:
All Insert functions, except Spline and Fillet
Modify/Transform and Copy
All Modify/Trim functions (To Entity, By Length, Gap, Cutout)
All Modify/Stretch functions (Node, Elbow, By Polygon)
Modify/Chain and Dechain
Modify/Fill Style
Tools/Subpicture/Regroup and Split
However, any persistence of contours must be explicit enabled by the user, by setting the
environment variable TB_ENABLE_PERSIST_CONTOUR to ―Yes‖
Benefits
More drawing information persisted in PADD.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
326
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.60
User Bulletin
Text Font Attributes
Description
The attributes Bold, Underline and StrikeOut of texts using legacy system fonts will now be displayed
properly.
Benefits
This will improve graphic feedback.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
327
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.61
User Bulletin
Dimming & Checking of Menu Items
Description
The enabling and checking of menu items and toolbar buttons has now been implemented and will
reflect the current context and state.
Benefits
This will improve productivity.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
328
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.62
User Bulletin
Unicode
Description
Better support for Unicode (i.e. non-latin characters such as Korean, Chinese and Japanese) has
been added to Marine Drafting. Unicode characters may be used in the following areas:
Drawing names
Values of Drafting‘s default variables
Dimension annotations
Model names (except Hull)
MarAPI (nb. Limited or no support for Unicode in Hull functions)
Benefits
Supporting Unicode e.g. provides functionality to make annotations in the user‘s native language.
Compatibility Constraints
There is limited Unicode support among the Hull Design specific functions.
For More Information
Please see the Marine Drafting documentation.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
329
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.63
User Bulletin
Restriction of Symbolic Views
Description
An additional option has been added to the function Symbolic View/Planar Hull View/Modify to change
the restriction of an existing symbolic view.
The restriction could be
an existing contour,
a contour created interactively or
an infinite line (the user is asked to choose the side of the line were the geometry is to be
kept.
There is also an option to make a new view as the restricted view.
Note that this restriction is an addition to the restriction possible in the view/create function with
limitation in the principal axis.
The second tab Limits contains the limits.
It is possible to take away the restriction made in View/modify by removing the tick for the restrict
button.
Benefits
Enables the view to be restricted in a more flexible way.
Compatibility Constraints
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
330
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
331
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.64
User Bulletin
Inspect Drawing
Description
In some cases, text will not be displayed properly on drawings migrated from Tribon M3 to AVEVA
Hull & Outfitting 12. One reason could be that the codepage used to encode multibyte text has been
changed to UTF-8 in AVEVA Hull & Outfitting 12. The ‗Inspect Drawing‘ function has been extended
with an option to correct such texts. This new function displays a dialog box presenting a list
containing all texts within the current drawing, and the user can choose which texts to convert.
Benefits
Make it possible to correct texts with the wrong codepage.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
332
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.65
User Bulletin
Draw Assemblies
Description
There are new ways to insert an assembly into the drawing. The first one is in the ―Insert model‖
dialog which has been updated with a new line for assemblies:
In the name field you can give the name of an assembly object optionally with wild cards. In the
―Block/Zone/Wld/Env/Asm‖ you can give a name of an assembly or assembly world element. If given,
the search will be limited to assemblies below this element. If this field is left empty the whole MDB is
searched.
The second possibility to add an assembly to the drawing is to use drag&drop from the design
explorer: you select an assembly in the design explorer drag it and drop it in a view in the current
drawing. (The drag&drop is a new feature in this release, please see a separate release note for more
documentation.)
Another improvement is that the assembly is always shown with the correct number of parts. One
effect of this improvement is that the appearance of hull models may be different from what it was in
previous releases regarding line styles, colours, p-lines etc. The appearance of the hull models will
now be controlled by the representation rule set defined for the view. This is valid for all view types
(―Wireline‖, ―Wireline Hidden Line‖, ―Modelled Wireline‖, ―Local Hidden Line‖, ―Global Hidden Line‖
and ―Universal Hidden Line‖).
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
333
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Benefits
It is easy to add assemblies to the drawing. The assemblies are always drawn with correct number of
parts.
Compatibility Constraints
The appearance of hull models may be different from what it was in previous releases regarding line
styles, colours, p-lines etc.
For More Information
Only noted here
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
334
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.66
User Bulletin
RSO Default Colours
Description
An RSO is given a default colour related to the type of RSO. The following colours are used:
RSO Type
Colour
Compartment limit
Blue
General Inner Structure
Steel blue
Block Limit
Navy Blue
General Limit
Slate blue
Backdrop
Light blue
The colour settings are valid both when an RSO is drawn in drawings and when drawn in the 3D
canvas.
Benefits
Easier identification of RSOs.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Structural Design / Functions Overview / Functions in the Functional Structure Menu.
Affected Programs
All programs with graphical presentation of RSOs
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
335
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.67
User Bulletin
RSO Enhancements in Insert Model
Description
Input Model has been enhanced to allow users to easier select and insert RSOs into a drawing.
RSO selection can now be filtered on type. Wanted type can be selected from a drop-down list with
the following values:
The values in the drop down list corresponds to
Any type (no filtering)
Compartment Limit
General Inner structure
Block Limit
General Limit
Backdrop
RSO selection can now also be made on envelope. All RSOs belonging to a given envelope are
selected.
It is no longer necessary to specify the ―_RSO_‖ prefix when keying in the name of an RSO in the
input field.
Benefits
Enables RSO modelling to be made in a more flexible way.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Structural Design / Functions Overview / Functions in the Functional Structure Menu.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
336
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.68
User Bulletin
Curved Panel Holes in Input Model
Description
Curved panels presented using the function Input model now displays holes defined to be marked
with a dashed line type.
Benefits
The model display reflects the design more correctly.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
337
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.69
User Bulletin
Base Line Position Ruler
Description
The Base Line ruler is always located at zero height in the ship. But there are other
constructions/ships where it would benefit if this ruler could be located at another height. To be able to
control this, a new default keyword, BASE_LINE_POSITION, has been added. By assigning a height
to this keyword, the base line in the project can be set to another default position. If not given, the
height zero will be applied.
Affected functions are:
Dimension  3D  Distance to Plane  Leader  4 BL
Dimension  3D  Distance to Plane  Box  4 BL
Annotate  Position Ruler  Base Line
Benefits
Makes it possible to have different Base line and take automatic measure from that.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
338
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.70
User Bulletin
Overlays
Description
The ability to use overlays on a drawing has been added to Marine Drafting. Overlays may take the
form of external plot files (.plt), or may be database elements.
An overlay sheet can be placed anywhere on the drawing sheet, and can be of any size. Any number
of overlay sheets may be used on a drawing sheet.
Benefits
Overlays have been made available to Marine Drafting and Hull Design.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Outfitting Draft / Underlays and Overlays.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
339
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.71
User Bulletin
Protection of the Drawing Form View
Description
In order to give Marine Drafting users better control of how to protect the contents in the drawing form
view, the Drafting keyword ALLOW_TEXT_MODIFICA TION_IN_FORM_RULE has been replaced by
the keyword ALLOW_MODIFICATION_IN_FORM_VIEW.
Keyword:
ALLOW_MODIFIC ATION_IN_FORM_VIEW
System default value:
"No"
Explanation:
User can modify protection flag for contents in the drawing form view.
Legal values:
"No" :
"OnlyRuleBasedText" :
"Yes" :
Whole form view is protected from modification
Texts defined by rules can be modified
C ontents of whole form view can be modified
Benefits
Better control of how to protect the contents in the drawing form view.
Compatibility Constraints
The old keyword ALLOW_TEXT_MODIFIC ATION_IN_FORM_RULE has been removed.
For More Information
See User Guide Marine Drafting / Appendices / Drafting Default File Keywords / Miscellaneous .
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
340
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.72
User Bulletin
Open Drawing
Description
Lookup of drawings using the ―Open Drawing‖ dialog can be slow in projects with a large number of
drawings. This functionality has been improved using a type index.
This means that from this release it is often preferable to have the ―Search all departments‖ option
checked. The initial value of this option is controlled via the Marine Drafting default keyword
―SEARCH_ALL_DEPTS‖.
It is also advisable to give one or more initial characters before a wild card since it speeds up the
search significantly.
Please note that if the search string starts with a wild card and ―Search all departments‖ is not
checked, the performance will be as in previous release.
Benefits
Lookup drawing view name and type in the ―Open Drawing‖ dialog is much fast er.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
341
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.73
User Bulletin
Drag and Drop to the 2D Canvas.
Description
It is possible to drag and drop model items onto the 2D Canvas. The result of a successful drag-drop
operation matches that of an ―Insert Model‖ using the ―Insert Model‖ dialog.
It is possible to drag items to create new views, insert into a specific view or insert into all views. The
new functionality includes standard left mouse button drag drop, right mouse button drag drop and
other sources such as dragging items from other gadgets than the explorer, e.g. the ―Search Result‖
and ―My Data‖.
Benefits
Easy ways to insert Model to the 2D canvas.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
See User Guide Marine Drafting / Model Viewing and General Drafting / Common Functions and
Routines / Drag and Drop to the 2D Canvas.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
342
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.74
User Bulletin
Marine .NET API (hull views)
Description
All hull symbolic views can now be created and modified from the user-interface of Marine Drafting
12.1. The corresponding Marine .NET APIs have therefore been implemented into the
AVEVA.Marine.Drafting namespace as well.
The following Marine .NET APIs have been implemented in the AVEVA.Marine.Drafting namespace.
Please note that some APIs have been renamed to reflect changes in menus. The changes are
marked with bold.
Please also note that MarDrafting.Recreate is used to recreate all kinds of hull views.
Old (still available, marked as obsolete)
New
Aveva.Marine.Design
Aveva.Marine.Drafting
MarChm.ViewBodyPlanNew
MarDrafting.ViewBodyPlanNew
MarChm.ViewCurvedPanelNew
MarDrafting.ViewCurvedP anelNew
MarChm.ViewDevPlaNew
MarDrafting.ViewDevPlaNew
MarChm.ViewShellXNew
MarDrafting.ViewShellXNew
MarChm.ViewShProfNew
MarDrafting.ViewShProfNew
MarChm.ViewModify
MarDrafting.ViewCurvedModify
MarChm.ViewRecreate
MarDrafting.ViewRecreate
MarHullPan.ViewDetailNew
MarDrafting.ViewDetailNew
MarHullPan.ViewSymbolicModify
MarDrafting.ViewSectionModify
MarHullPan.ViewSymbolicRecreat e
MarDrafting.ViewRecreate
MarHullPan.MAR_BRACKET
MarDrafting.MAR_BRA CKET
MarHullPan.MAR_BRACKET_PML
MarDrafting.MAR_BRA CKET_PML
MarHullPan.MAR_FLANGE
MarDrafting.MAR_FLA NGE
MarHullPan.MAR_FLANGE_PML
MarDrafting.MAR_FLA NGE_PML
MarHullPan.MAR_SEAM
MarHullPan.MAR_SEAM_PML
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
MarDrafting.MAR_SEAM
MarDrafting.MAR_SEAM_PML
343
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
MarHullPan.MAR_STIFFENE R
MarDrafting.MAR_STIFFENE R
MarHullPan.MAR_STIFFENE R_PML
MarDrafting.MAR_STIFFENE R_PML
The following APIs have been renamed to reflect changes in menus.
Old (still available, marked as obsolete)
New
Aveva.Marine.Drafting
Aveva.Marine.Drafting
MarDrafting.ElementIsSymbolicView
MarDrafting.ElementIsSectionView
MarDrafting.ViewSymbolicNew
MarDrafting.ViewSectionNew
MarDrafting.ViewSymbolicModelTra
MarDrafting.ViewSectionModelTra
It is strongly recommended that you change your customisation files (C#, PML) to use the APIs from
AVEVA.Marine.Drafting as soon as possible.
Benefits
A Marine Drafting 12.1 license is sufficient to be able to create hull views using the Marine .NET API.
Compatibility Constraints
The APIs have been marked as obsolete in the AVEVA.Marine.Design namespace.
They will continue to be available in this namespace in 12.1 but they will be removed in a future
release.
When using the APIs from the AVEVA.Marine.Design namespace, you will get a warning when
building a C# solution.
For More Information
See User Guide Customisation / :NET Customisation / Hull and Marine Drafting .Net API .
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
344
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.75
User Bulletin
Removing Default Variables
Description
A number of default variables used in earlier releases of Drafting, but not in Hull Drafting 12.0/Marine
Drafting 12.1, have been removed to avoid unnecessary confusion. The obsolete default variables
that have been removed are listed below.
Tribon M3 Outfitting has been replaced by AVEVA Outfitting so the following default variables are no
longer valid:
FLOW_UNIT_SYSTEM
IMPEDANCE_UNIT_SYS TEM
INDUCTANCE_UNIT_SYS TEM
LUMINANCE_UNIT_SYSTEM
PDI_STRUCTURE_V RML
PDI_TRANS_STRUCTURE
PRESSURE_DROP_UNIT_SYS TEM
STRUCT_COMP_CODE_DE T
STRUCT_COMP_CODE_DRAW
STRUCT_COMP_VOLUME _COLOUR
STRUCT_KEEP_INSERT_OB J
STRUCT_KEEP_S TAND_REF
STRUCT_MODULES_IN_HULL
STRUCT_MODULES_IN_OUTF'
TEMPERATURE_UNIT_SYS TEM
VELOCITY_UNIT_SYS TEM
The volume concept in Tribon M3 has been replaced by AVEVA Outfitting so the following default
variables are no longer valid:
INCL_COMP_VOLUME_EVENT_POINTS_IN_EQUIP
INITIAL_VOLUME_DB
PLACVOL_NAME_CODE
The database in Tribon M3 has been replaced by Dabacon so the following default variables are no
longer valid:
AUTO_CLEAN_WORKSPACE
BACKUP_ACT
BACKUP_TIME
The control point concept in Tribon M3 has been removed so the following default variable is no
longer valid:
DIM_CONTROLPOINT_MID_TOL
Benefits
Avoid confusion by not showing obsolete default variables in the Format/Defaults dialog.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
345
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Compatibility Constraints
Not applicable.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
346
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
19.76
User Bulletin
TBSystemFonts
Description
It is a known issue that the old legacy fonts do not function very well in AVEVA Marine 12. These
fonts are:
TBSystemFont0
TBSystemFont1
TBSystemFont2
TBSystemFont3
TBSystemFont4
TBSystemFont5
TBSystemFont6
TBSystemFont7
TBISOFont101
TBISOFont105
The issue is that these fonts cannot be used for text elements stored in the PADD database. This is
for example all texts created with the ―Insert\Text‖ function in Marine Drafting. TBSystemFonts will in
this case be replaced with a default true type font.
In 12.1 we have introduced a way to map a TBSystemFont with any true type font available in the
project. The mapping is primarily intended to be used when migrating drawings from M3 to 12.
The font mapping is setup in a file with a simple format, where each TBSystemFont can be associated
with a true type font (separated by a blank or a TAB). The name of the file is assigned to the
environment variable ―TB_SYSTEMFONT_MAP‖. This is a sample file:
TBISOFont101
TBISOFont105
TBSystemFont0
TBSystemFont1
TBSystemFont2
TBSystemFont3
TBSystemFont4
TBSystemFont5
TBSystemFont6
TBSystemFont7
Arial Unicode MS
Lucida Sans
Arial Unicode MS
Times New Roman
Times New Roman
Times New Roman
Courier New
Courier New
Lucida Sans
Times New Roman
The font mapping will affect the text font when:
migrating a drawing with the SY013 migration utility
importing a drawing with the ―File\Import\SDB‖ utility
importing a drawing with the Copy Assistant utility.
Benefits
TBSystemFonts can be replaced with any true type font available in the project, not only the default
font.
Compatibility Constraints
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
347
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
None
For More Information
Only noted here
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
348
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
19.77
Persisting of part level modifications in Linear
Dimensions
Description
In Marine Drafting 12.1, it is now possible for the user to get certain ―part level‖ modifications in linear
dimension persisted in Dabacon. Modification on ―part level‖ means e.g changing the size, position,
value, colour etc. on individual measure texts in a linear dimension.
The Modify/Dimension sub-functionality has changed slightly
Move Dimension Line
No change of functionality. Modification is persisted.as before.
To be more specific, the caption text has been changed slightly.
Slant Witness Line
No change of functionality. Modification is persisted as before.
Presentation
No change of functionality. Modification is persisted as before.
Text Properties
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
349
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Functionality has been improved: Here the user can toggle between updating on component level
(whole dimensioning) and part level (individual texts in it). To toggle, just press the Option button
when the system asks the user to indicate the dimensioning (text) to modify. Modifications both on
component and part level will be persisted.
The following properties can be modified:
Font
Size
Aspect
Slant
Colour
Text Value
Functionality has been improved: Here the user can toggle between updating on component level
(whole dimensioning) and part level (individual texts in it). To toggle, just press the Option button
when the system asks the user to indicate the dimensioning (text) to modify. Modifications both on
component and part level will be persisted.
Move Dimension Text
Functionality has been improved and renamed (from Transform Text): Here the user can move
individual texts within an arbitrary linear dimensioning. The changed position of the measure text will
be persisted.
Flip arrow
No change of functionality. Modification is not persisted as before.
In case the Drafting default keyword DENY_UPDATE_OF_NON_PERS IS TED_GEOM is set to ―Yes‖,
the same part-level functionality that is offered within the Modify/Dimension function can be also be
invoked by clicking the right mouse button (RMB) on a text in a linear dimensioning and selecting one
of the submenus:
RMB/Edit (or Edit/Text)
same functionality as Modify/Dimension/Text Value
RMB/Move (or Modify/Move/Text)
Same functionality as Modify/Dimension/Move Dimension Text
Note the whole dimension line will not be moved (as in 12.0), but only the indicated text within the
dimensioning
RMB/Properties
Same functionality as Modify/Dimension/Text Properties
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
350
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Benefits
Improved productivity in dimensioning modifying functions.
Compatibility Constraints
None
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Hull Design
Marine Drafting
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
351
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
20.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Outfitting Draft
A number of improvements have been made to Outfitting DRAFT and its associated applications.
20.1 Extended Hatch Patterns
This development has three components:
An additional 12 system-defined Fill Styles (or patterns) bringing the total to 30. These cover
patterns such as brickwork and concrete and are shown in Fig 8-6 of the updated DRAFT
User Guide.
Creation of user-defined Fill-Styles has been enhanced to allow the use of non-solid linestyles. Two new attributes have been added to HPATTErns (see below). These provide
values for new Wigwam parameters. As a result, users can create very complicated patterns.
The existing GUI, allowing users to pick the system-defined Fill Styles, has been extended to
include the 12 new ones. This meant the provision of 12 new icon files.
In addition, hatch and fill patterns are now exported to DXF as the appropriate entities rather than
lines.
20.2 Line Styles
User-defined LineStyle & FillStyle elements have a system-generated Style Number that should be
unique within the MDB. These attribute values are automatically created upon element creation.
However, if a DRAFT database containing a Style World (STYLWL) is added to an MDB that already
has a STYLWL it is possible for duplication of numbers to occur.
At Hull & Outfitting 12.0, it is the later of the duplicates (in database order within the MDB) that has
precedence when a Style of a given number is used. This is opposite to the case of duplicate names
where it has always been the first that has precedence.
At Hull & Outfitting 12.1, this has been changed to ensure consistency of behaviour between duplicate
styles and names. When an MDB contains Styles with duplicate Style Numbers, it is the first (in
database order within the MDB) that will be used when that Style Number is used to draw graphical
elements.
20.3 Line Widths
Hull & Outfitting 12.1 has been enhanced to allow accurate line widths to be output in all output
formats. The definitions of the system line-styles are held in the System database and set up in the
Admin module, using Line-style Width Definition elements (LSWIDDEFINITION) in a new Line-style
World Element (LINESTYLEWORLD).
The upgrade from Hull & Outfitting 12.0 to 12.1 can do this or Hull & Outfitting can be left to use its
default values. The AVEVA sample projects are provided with this hierarchy and new projects will also
be created with it present.
Full details are given in the various Draft User Manuals and the Administrator User Guide.
20.4 System Defined Line Styles
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
352
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
The system line widths of THIN, MEDIUM, and THICK are now configurable in ADMIN using the new
line-style hierarchy in the system database.
By default, they have been changed to standard values from the ISO 128 standard, which specifies
line widths of: 0.18, 0.25, 0.35, 0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 1.4, & 2.0 mm. The values chosen for THIN, MEDIUM
and THICK are: 0.25, 0.35 and 0.7 mm, rather than the former 0.22, 0.5, & 0.7 mm.
The Minimum pen line width, formerly set by a gadget on the Plotting Options form, no longer
appears. This is a parameter of the Plot command and is no longer required as the user has much
better control of the widths. A very low value will be treated as the minimum width allowed for the
format specified – PDF, DWG, etc. These may vary or have some special meaning.
Note: the line width resolution of PDF output is currently controlled by a reference printer, which is
either the user‘s default printer (if there is one) or the user‘s screen resolution. If the resolution of the
said printer is 600dpi, it will not be sufficient to show the difference in width of the example lines on
A0. One way to prevent this problem from occurring is to set a default printer with a higher resolution,
say 1200 dpi.
20.5 User Defined Line Styles
User-defined line-styles will no longer be converted to a multiple of 0.2mm. Instead the precise width
in mm specified by the user will be transferred directly to the export format.
20.6 Minimum Line Width
The MINLW parameter is configurable by the user in the DRAFT UI and via the DRAFT PLOT
command; it was used to change the value of both THIN and the minimum user-defined line-style
width. It applied only to the hardcopy exports (PDF, EMF etc) and did not affect DXF or AVEVA PLOT
files.
It is no longer required, as the line-styles are now precisely defined. It has been withdrawn from the UI
and the PDMSUI/dflts/plotter_user_defaults file where its default value was defined.
Its use with the PLOT command is deprecated: its value is ignored and a warning given if it is used.
Note that this means that the user no longer has a way to artificially thicken thin lines on a drawing
during export. This was introduced at 12.0 and was a side effect of allowing the user to determine the
value of THIN line-styles.
20.7 Plotting User Interface
20.7.1 DRAFT “Plotting Options” Form
The plot utility form, accessed from Utilities > Plot CE > Plotters, no longer has the Minimum Line
width fields at top left:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
353
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
20.7.2 DXF – General Options
The "Polyline width factor" and "Character encoding" fields
have been removed from the DRAFT ―DXF - General‖ form,
which is accessed from:
Utilities > Configurable DXF output > Modify >
General
or in Draft administration mode:
Settings >
General
DXF
configuration
settings >
20.8 Enhanced Angular Dimensions
Angular Dimensions (ADIMs) no longer need to have
their origin defined, if it can be deduced from the
vectors defined by their first two dimension points.
Typically these are directions defined by P-lines but
they can also be defined by P-points.
Dimension Direction
29.6
0
Dimension Direction
For example, the figure shows an Angular Dimension
with its origin defined implicitly by the intersection of
the two Dimension directions, which are P-lines of
SCTNs.
This Angular Dimension could be created by typing
the following commands, starting at Layer level:
Dimension Origin
(by intersection)
NEW ADIM
Create new Angular Dimension element
FROM DIR IDPL @ TO DIR
IDPL @
Use cursor to pick P-lines defining the first and second
Dimension Directions.
DPOS @
Use cursor to pick a Sheet position through which the
Dimension Arc will pass.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
354
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
For full details, please refer to the DRAFT User Guide, section 12.6 Angular Dimensions, which has
been extensively revised.
20.9 Enhanced P-line Picking
There is now an option for P-lines to behave in a similar fashion to P-points when creating annotation.
If enabled on a View, P-lines appear as the mouse passes over them so that they can be picked.
They can of course also be made part of the SCTN‘s permanently visible representation when
required on the drawing.
The number of P-lines drawn thus can be limited by use of their PVIF attribute, as for P -points.
Performance for Update Design when drawing sections with a large number of P-lines will
therefore be improved by making suitable adjustments to the catalogue! Pseudo-attributes PLVIFlag
and PLVISibility, equivalent to the PPVIF and PPVIS attributes, are also available.
The behaviour for picking is as previous versions when the new option is ‗OFF.
For full details, please refer to the DRAFT User Guide.
20.10
Improved Performance of Extrusions
These enhancements are focused on speeding up Extrusions and Panels by improving the handling
of their vertices. Vertex (VERT) & Panel Vertex (PAVE) elements have 10 p-points, mostly for
dimensioning purposes. Each p-point number has a particular functional position:
P0
Origin of Vertex
P1
Bottom panel face in line with panel vertex
P2
Midway through panel in line with panel vertex
P3
Top panel face in line with panel vertex
P4, P6 Bottom face tangent points (for filleted radius at vertex)
P5, P7 Top face tangent points (for filleted radius at vertex)
P8
Bottom face fillet centre
P9
Top face fillet centre.
There are two changes to improve performance:
calculate all the p-point positions in one go when drawing them in Draft
omit P5 to P9 when the fillet radius is zero, as they are coincident with the first four
20.11
Drawing Gridlines
Plant Design grids (GRIDSYstem and GRIDAXis elements) may now be added to IDLists, but may
not be the sole member of the IDList. They are drawn using the Centreline Style/Colour; their
GRIDLNs are considered to be of infinite length and so are extended to the VIEW boundary. AUTO
commands ignore these elements when calculating the VSCA, THPOS, and SIZE attributes of a
VIEW.
For details, please refer to the DRAFT User Guide, section 4.2, 4.3 and 12.9.
20.12
Intelligent Text Handling Enhancement
Draft allows all Design and Catalogue database attributes and pseudo-attributes to be used in the
annotation of drawings. It is also possible to use attributes of related elements; for example, #SITE
gives the name of site owning the referenced element.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
355
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Hull & Outfitting 12.1 additionally allows the more commonly used position attributes (POS, HPOS,
TPOS, APOS, TPOS, NPOS, POSS, POSE, DRPS and DELP) to be qualified so as to provide only
one of the coordinates. For example:
#POS full 3D position, e.g. W12250 N7890 U3120
#POSE Easting coordinate only, e.g. E12250, W9675
#POSN, #POSU, #POSX, #POSY, #POSZ are also provided.
Note that the codeword #POSE can have two meanings depending on the context: for SCTNs it
means the POSE attribute (Section End Position), in other cases it means the Easting of the POS
attribute
For other position attributes, single coordinates can be obtained by using a single index qualifier. For
example:
#GCOFG[2] would give the Northing (Y coordinate) of the Gross Centre of Gravity.
Positions can be output in ‗+/-‗ format by appending ‗+‘ to the codeword. For example:
#POS+
would give -12250 +7890 +3120 for the example above
For full details, please refer to Chapter 14 of the DRAFT User Guide.
20.13
Export to CAD Formats
Significant improvements have been made to the export of DXF, DWG and DGN format files from
Draft, using the ‗configurable‘ drivers (Draft_XXX_LI).
Recommended AutoCAD versions are 2007-2010, as shown in section 2.9.1. The DXF version used
is now AutoCAD 2006, so it cannot be supported in earlier releases. Recommended MicroStation
format is now v8. Additional limitations may apply for earlier releases.
For full details of configuration, please refer to the Draft User Manual.
20.14
Support for Unicode Text
Drawing export to recent releases of AutoCAD and MicroStation should now cope with all supported
languages for which the computer is set up. Full support is not possible for AutoCAD releases before
2007 or for MicroStation DGN v7 format. As noted elsewhere (see section 4.2.3), it is recommended
that Latin filenames are used.
20.15
Improved Drawing Feature Export
These changes should result in a much more usable drawing and smaller file sizes. The main
improvements for the 3 formats are:
User defined Line-styles: defined with PATDEF and PATREP but not PATNAM
Fill Styles: export in native format hatch entities for all system defined styles 1-30: this
includes the new ones (see section 20.1)
The following limitations apply:
Draft's intelligent blanking primitives are not exported
User-defined line styles with Glyphs and line pictures are not supported
Only ―built-in‖ line patterns are supported at present for layer definitions, not the full range of
configurable line patterns
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
356
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
20.16
User Bulletin
Configurable DXF & DWG Export
Improvements also include:
Symbols and Logos are exported as Nested Blocks; differentially scaled symbols are
supported.
Overlays and Design Elements are exported as Nested Symbols.
Ellipse is exported as an entity (AcDbEllipse)
Layers can be defined and exported – new switches control their use; for example rules can
create new layers, set their colour, assign elements to layers by type. However, ―colour
bylayer‖ is not used for objects in the DXF/DWG file.
Text Alignment has been improved
20.17
Configurable DGN Export
Improvements also include:
Symbols, Backing Sheets, Frame and Logos are exported as cells; differentially scaled
symbols are supported. Cells are exported with Tag data attached.
The following limitations apply:
Although user-defined glyphs and line pictures are ignored, it is possible to specify a
MicroStation custom line-style for a given DRAFT pen number.
Hatching (fill) patterns from HPATTERN19 to HPATTERN30 use a common shared cell
definition. For these: Colours, Line weight and Line style will not be set.
Dimensions are not exported as MicroStation dimensions. However, they may be grouped.
20.18
AVEVA Isometric ADP
This add-on application has been completely overhauled for Hull & Outfitting 12.1. It can now be used
for drawing detailed drawings, complete with parts lists, of both HVAC and Cable trays.
It is fully configurable and produces a fully annotated Isometric-style drawing with:
Dimensioned and labelled Spool
Material Take-Off Table
Location Plan of the Spool in the Main
Keyplan of location to nearest Grid Line
Revision table
Total Weight and Centre of Gravity
Drawing output is in PDF format, with Material Take-off to MS Excel. In addition, there is a dedicated
Toolbar, Edit tools and a Print Tool for Multiple drawings.
Please note that this new release will not work with earlier versions of Hull & Outfitting and that many
areas are significantly different, including the following;
HVAC Catalogue upgrades
Draft Library elements for True-Type Fonts
The appropriate changes have been made to the sample data supplied with Hull & Outfitting.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
357
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
For full details, please refer to the updated Isometric ADP user documentation:
Installation Guide
User Guide
Administration Guide
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
358
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
21.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Marine Migration
21.1 Preparing Databanks for Import into Hull and
Outfitting 12.1
The ability to read native Tribon indexed databanks has been removed from AVEVA Marine. Before
using the migration program to migrate a Tribon project to AVEVA Marine, the Tribon databanks need
to be upgraded to a neutral format (Tribon Model Index). There is a Tribon M3 program called
sa021.exe for this purpose:
sa021 { –sourcedb <dbname> | –sourcedir <dir> } –targetdir <dir>
Example. Convert the databanks in a native Tribon M3 project to Tribon Model Index-databanks:
sa021 –sourcedir c:\m3projects\testproj –targetdir c:\tmi
This will convert all databanks in the directory given by ‗-sourcedir‘ to Tribon Model Index databanks
and store them in the directory given by the ‗-targetdir‘ option.
Please contact your local AVEVA representative to get a copy of the sa021 utility .
Please note that this is a Tribon program and must be copied to and executed in the Tribon bin
directory, for example C:\Tribon\M3\bin.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
359
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
22.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Schematic 3D Integrator
Integrator has been extensively updated since its first release at 12.0; some of the developments
noted below were first introduced in the Schematics Update Release at 12.0. SP6.8.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
360
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
22.1 Compare/Update Scope by Destination
*12.1.SP4*
Compare/Update provides a new Scope by Destination capability, alongside the existing scope (now
renamed as Scope by Source).
Scope by Source provides the capability to synchronise populations of objects. It takes as its scope
the set of objects of chosen type from the source database and looks for matching objects in the
destination database.
The new Scope by Destination provides the capability to verify the objects in the user's current scope
of work. This can be the current drawlist in Design or Outfitting, the current diagram view in Diagram s
or Schematic Model Manager, or the current list in Tags. If a graphical selection has been made in the
3D view, diagram view or list, then the scope is further reduced to those objects that have been
selected. The scope can also be the Current Element. Compare/Update will report any objects that
are not present in the source database and any differences on those objects for which a match has
been found. The user can then choose which objects to update, automatically copying over attribute
data. Note that Compare/Update will not carry out object deletions but the comparison results can be
used to trigger a manual process.
Depending on where invoked, these options are available directly from the Compare/Update button or
menu entry, as shown here for Tags from the Manage tab:
Press Open to open the Compare/Update tab or dialogue in Scope by Source mode.
Press Compare Current List to compare all objects in the current list (and similarly for current
graphical view).
Press Compare Current Selection to compare those objects that have been selected (in the list or
graphical view).
From within the Compare/Update tab or toolbar, to switch modes press By Destination.
A list of available configurations will be displayed.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
361
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Select the required configuration and press Open to run the comparison.
For more details refer to the Compare/Update User Guide.
View Datasheet in Compare/Update
The Compare/Update Elements grid has a new right click View Datasheet option when the source is
Engineering Database and the selected source item has an associated datasheet.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
362
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
22.2 Simplified Selection of Configurations
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP4*
A simplified selection is now provided for end users to select an appropriate Configuration. For
example, a basic check may be used early in a project when you just need to check for the existence
of matching items and whether they are in the correct specification, whereas a full check may be
needed as the data matures.
End users can no longer define Comparison Categories or set Comparison Options. These have been
moved out of the main menu and now form part of the administrator‘s scope. Instead, end users
select from a list of Configurations defined by an administrator. Configurations are shared across the
project but each user‘s selection is preserved across sessions.
For more information refer to section 4.8 of the Integrator User Guide.
Administrative Flexibility with Configurations
Integrator now allows an administrator to setup multiple Configurations for use on the project. For
Integrator, an administrator is either a free user or a member of team CUADMIN (this team is also
used by Compare/Update). End users can no longer view the Configuration Explorer.
Within the Configuration Explorer you can now define multiple sets of Compare Colours, Comparison
Categories, and Rule Sets, and combine selections of these into Configurations. It is the
Configurations that are then available to end users.
End users always access the default configuration file (ProjectConfiguration.xml in the appropriate
project folder) so you need to save to this file to make any changes available to the project.
Administrators can work with any filename, since any project configuration file opened in the
Configuration Explorer becomes their current file. Thus you can test using a different file and save to
the default filename when ready to deploy the changes.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
363
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Note: The administrator‘s current file is remembered across sessions.
The Project Defaults section has additional fields for the default Configuration, Colours, Category and
Rule Set (these will be used if an appropriate selection cannot be identified).
A new Configurations section is where you create individual Configurations and allocate their Colours,
Categories and Rule Sets. The Comparison Options have also moved here.
You can now define multiple sets of Compare Colours.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
364
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
The Comparison Categories settings have moved inside the Configuration E xplorer.
The configuration file can now hold many different Rule Sets with source SCHE and target DESI.
Integrator can still work with older configuration files but some tools are provided to assist upgrade.
You can import user defined Comparison Categories into the Configuration Explorer (because these
are user specific, you will only get those that you yourself have previously defined for this project).
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
365
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
You can import Rule Sets from old configuration files, thus allowing you to combine the contents of
multiple files into one new file and removing the need to rename configuration files.
For more information refer to section 6 of the Integrator User Guide.
Changes to PML Methods
New PML methods are provided to select a particular configuration file, to get the list of
Configurations defined in the current file, and to select a Configuration. Other methods return the
names of the current Configuration, Compare Colours, Category and Rule Set.
The methods setComparisonCategory, getReportCheckPosition, setReportCheckPosition,
getCompareNoHierarchy, setCompareNoHierarchy and compareStrictlyLimited have been
deprecated and will now return an error if called.
A new PML method has also been provided to allow individual objects to be coloured on the Diagram
Viewer. This could be used, for example, to colour the diagram according to user defined criteria such
as status values.
For more information refer to section 7 of the Integrator User Guide.
Reduced Information when using Comparison Categories
The behaviour of the Compare Report in response to Comparison Category settings has been
changed. When a category of difference is switched off, relevant rows in the Compare Report lower
Data panel will no longer be shown.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
366
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
22.3 Compare/Update Additional Filter Fields
*12.1.SP3*
Compare/Update has additional filter fields to add a PML expression, e.g. for status values.
Expressions can be added by the administrator to the configurations, and by the end user at run time.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
367
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
For More Information
See user Guide Compare/Update / Compare and Update Data and Options and Mapping / Options.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
368
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
22.4 Show in Diagram Option in Compare/Update
*12.1.SP3*
Compare/Update has a new Show in Diagram context menu. The diagram view can be displayed
when the source is Schematics Database, the selected source item appears on a diagram, and the
SVG file is available for that diagram.
For More Information
See User Guide Schematics / Compare/Update / Options and Mapping / Grid Options / Grid Context
menu.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
369
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
22.5 Integrator Capability to Accept Differences *12.1.SP3*
Integrator allows a designer to accept differences from the comparison report, for situations where the
3D and schematic models have a different level of detail, or are functionally equivalent but do not
match precisely. Examples include vent and drain detail, instrument connections, and welded
attachments. Note that Integrator automatically ignores MDS trunnions, but trunnions defined by other
means may still be included in the comparison and so could be handled as described below.
The differences can be accepted and managed in the following ways, and will not be flagged up
thereafter in the comparison report:
1.
Accept Differences: A pair of linked objects having differences such as attribute values,
sizes, connections or sequence, can be accepted as different.
2.
Accept Missing Element: For unmatched objects, such as a drain connection, the
corresponding elements can be accepted as missing. Integrator will still match the object if it
is added subsequently to the model.
3.
Disable Matching: For objects that should not be matched ever, such as a tee for a trunnion,
whether or not Integrator has currently matched them, matching can be disabled.
All of these actions can be reversed and the differences will then revert to being flagged up in the
comparison report. Once a number of differences have been accepted it is necessary to redo the
comparison in order to see the effects. This in turn can change which objects are matched and thus
offer more opportunities to accept differences, and so the process may take s everal cycles to achieve
the desired results.
Setup for Accepting Differences
Note: Before you can accept differences in Integrator you must ensure the necessary UDAs have
been defined, and you must have created and selected an appropriate GPSET.
This functionality requires some UDAs to have been configured by an administrator. The definitions
are included in a PML function. In Lexicon navigate to a writable database then display the Command
Line then type:
!!integratorUDAs()
Note: If you have been using an earlier trial version of the Accept Differences functionality you will
need to run this function to add one of the UDA definitions.
Integrator stores its accepted difference information in GPSET objects. Before using the functionality
a suitable GPSET must have been selected. Use the Integrator settings menu to create suitable
GPWL and GPSET objects and to select a GPSET to write to. The selected GPSET is serialised
between sessions. Integrator writes some attribute information to the GPWL and GPSET to
differentiate them from other objects of the same types.
GPSETs are claimed like other objects and so each concurrent user will need to select their own
GPSET in order to write accepted differences data during their session. Accepted difference data
from multiple GPSETs can be read during a single comparison.
Select Bar Menu > Settings > Accept Differences > Select GPSET then in the dialogue right click
on the preferred GPSET and press Select GPSET. There is also an option to create a GPSET here.
The currently selected GPSET is indicated in the status bar of this dialogue.
Select Bar Menu > Settings > Accept Differences > Create GPWL then in the dialogue enter a
name and select the database in which to create the GPWL.
Select Bar Menu > Settings > Accept Differences > Create GPSET then in the dialogue enter a
name and select the GPWL in which to create the GPSET.
A new compare colour for Accepted Differences has been added to the configuration. The out -of-thebox colour for a new configuration file has been set to colour 120 which is a shade of green.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
370
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
How to Accept Differences
Accepted differences are shown with a small green icon in the report and have their own colour for
the graphical views.
Note: Before a difference on a pair of objects can be accepted, the objects must be linked. If objects
are not linked, the match may not persist in subsequent sessions as it depends on data values and
rules configuration.
If the pair of objects are matched but not linked, right click in the Details tab and select the option to
Link matched elements.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
371
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
If two objects have not been matched they will be reported on different rows to each other, and may
have been matched to other objects. For example, Integrator by default will not match an SCINST to a
PCOM, but if they have been modelled that way they can be linked to preserve the design intent.
Right click in the Details tab on one of the objects, click on Select for Linking, and then click on the
required object. Then right click on the other object and click to Link the required pair (there may be
more than one choice of link candidates). After a redo of the comparison they will be lined up in the
report. The Accept Differences option in the right click menu will then be enabled.
To accept a difference on a pair of linked objects, right click and select Accept Differences.
To accept an unmatched object, right click and select Accept missing element.
Alternatively if the object is never to be matched then select Disable matching. In the case of a tee
connection, where the connecting branch is not connected into the piping network at its other end, the
branch will also be accepted as missing, or disabled for matching. This allows, for example, drain
connections not detailed on the P&ID to be accepted in one operation.
To reverse acceptance of a difference, right click and select Reject accepted differences.
To reverse acceptance of a missing element, right click and select Reject acceptance of missing
element.
To reverse a disabled match, right click and select Enable matching.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
372
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
After a number of accept or reject operations, redo the comparison to see the effect.
Ignoring MDS Trunnions
Integrator automatically ignores MDS trunnions. Trunnions are identified as any 3D branch with
:MDSTrun TRUE. This means any trunnion defined in an application other than MDS can be handled
in the same way by setting this UDA. Four connection scenarios are handled:
An MDS cross will be matched with a schematic tee
An MDS reducer will be matched with a two way schematic reducer
An MDS elbow will be treated like a two way elbow and thus not significant for comparison
An MDS set-on tee will be ignored and thus not matched or treated as missing
Note that differences in the SPREF attribute for an MDS cross or reducer will be ignored and will not
be available to copy to 3D in the compare report.
Comparison Options
Integrator has a new option which allows you to set whether accepted differences will be ignored, i.e.
reported as if the difference had not been accepted.
Accepting Differences from the Command Line
A set of methods provide command line access to the functionality for accepting differences.
The following methods can be used to create an acceptance GPWL in a named database or in the
first writable database, create an acceptance GPSET, and select an acceptance GPSET to be active.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
373
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
!!integrator.createAcceptanceGPWLD(!GPWLDName is STRING,
is STRING, !OwnerDB is STRING)
!!integrator.CreateAcceptanceGPWLD(!GPWLDName is STRING,
is STRING)
!!integrator.CreateAcceptanceGPSET(!GPSETName is STRING,
is STRING, !OwnerGPWLD is STRING)
!!integrator.SelectAcceptanceGPSET(!GPSETName is STRING)
!Description
!Description
!Description
The following methods can be used to accept differences on an element or accept a missing element.
The methods without the flag are equivalent to the corresponding methods with the flag set true.
Setting the flag false has the effect of reversing any acceptance.
!!integrator.AcceptDifferences(!Name is
!!integrator.AcceptDifferences(!Name is
!!integrator.AcceptMissingElement(!Name
!!integrator.AcceptMissingElement(!Name
!!integrator.AcceptMissingElement(!Name
!IncludeConnectedBranch is BOOLEAN)
STRING)
STRING, !Flag is BOOLEAN)
is STRING)
is STRING, !Flag is BOOLEAN)
is STRING, !Flag is BOOLEAN,
The following methods can be used to disable or enable matching on an element. Setting the flag
false has the effect of disabling matching.
!!integrator.DisableMatching(!Name is STRING)
!!integrator.EnableMatching(!Name is STRING)
!!integrator.EnableMatching(!Name is STRING, !Flag is BOOLEAN)
!!integrator.EnableMatching(!Name
is
STRING,
!Flag
is
BOOLEAN,
!IncludeConnectedBranch is BOOLEAN)
The following methods can be used to return a report of all accepted differences as an array of
strings, or to print it out in the command window.
!arrayOfStrings = !!integratorSupportHandler.acceptedDifferences()
!!integratorSupportHandler.printAllAccepted()
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
374
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
22.6 Design and Schematic Explorers Enhancements
*12.1.SP3*
The Design and Schematic explorers have new context menu options to navigate to linked or
matched objects, and the Schematic explorer in Design and Outfitting now has virtual folders for
consistency with its presentation in Diagrams and Schematic Model Manager.
Objects can be linked by Schematic 3D Integrator or Compare/Update. Matched objects are not
linked but have the same name (there is no guarantee they will be of appropriate types). This
functionality is for schematic and 3D objects and does not currently extend to engineering objects.
There may be multiple linked pipes for pipelines, whereas most types are linked one to one.
Select an object in the explorer and right click to see the context menu. If there are linked or matched
objects available they will appear under Navigate To.
In this example the equipment is matched by name but is also linked to another object. This indicates
a possible issue to investigate.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
375
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
22.7 New Integrator Object Method
Integrator link information stored on CYMLNK elements cons ists of references to schematic and 3D
elements. It is possible during project execution for these references to become invalid when
elements are deleted. A method is provided to clean up CYMLNK elements with invalid references.
!!Integrator.ValidateLinks()
Note: This method should be used only when all of the schematic and design databases, holding
elements that have been linked, are current on the MDB.
22.8 Electrical Connections
When building an equipment with a template, Integrator will try to match schemati c electrical
connections to 3D electrical connections within the template. It already does this for nozzles which are
matched on BORE, but for ELCONNs it now tries to match on CATREF. Details are included in the
updated Integrator User Guide Section 5.4.1 Building Equipment.
22.9 Selector Rules
Quotes are no longer required in selector rules for long STYPs as Integrator will automatically include
quotes for text selectors. For example, a rule with SCSTYP OF source operating on an SCVALV
with SCSTYP PTFE-LINED will generate Choose with STYP |PTFE-LINED|.
22.10
Improved Links Administration
Integrator no longer automatically creates a Link World. Project administrators are recommended to
create a separate Design Reference database to hold links, and then use the new Manage Links
dialogue, available from the Integrator > Settings menu. This can be used to create and manage
Link Worlds in the appropriate database, including consolidating links from separate databases.
Manage Links is also available with the new Compare/Update Utility.
For More Information, please refer to the Integrator User Guide sections 4.7.16, 5.2 and 5.3.
22.11
Configuration Rules Extensions
Integrator‘s Project Configuration Explorer is now shared with the Compare/Update Utility, and so can
hold rules for comparing elements between design, schematic and engineering databases. A Rule Set
holds all the Rule Groups for a particular pairing of database types. For example, the sample
configuration has a default Rule Set for comparing Design database content against Schematic
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
376
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
database content. You can add Rule Sets for other combinations of database types, e.g. schematic
and engineering, for use with Compare/Update.
Top level Rule Groups now have a source type which is the type of element for which they will be
applied (in place of the condition setting type of source).
For More Information, please refer to the Integrator User Guide section 6.5.5.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
377
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
22.12
User Bulletin
Example Macro
Some users may prefer to use a macro to run the comparison. The example macro below compares
all schematic equipment and pipelines that appear on a particular diagram:
-- File: compare macro for user guide.pmlmac
-- Initialise Integrator
!!integratorInit()
-- Collect schematic equipment and pipelines that appear on this
drawing
!scgroup = |/Piping_Diagrams|
!sctypes = |SCEQUI SCPLIN|
!diagExp = |name of diaref eq '/A1-51-2003'|
!sccoll = object COLLECTION()
!sccoll.scope(!scgroup.dbref())
!sccoll.types(!sctypes.split())
!sccoll.filter(object expression(!diagExp))
-- Integrator compare method needs array of strings
!comlist = ARRAY()
do !element values !sccoll.results()
!comlist.append(!element.ref.string())
enddo
-- Set report direct to file and do compare
!!integrator.setreportvisible(false)
!!integrator.setreportpath('c:\mac\compareReport.xml')
if (!comlist.size() gt 0) then
!!integrator.compare(!comlist)
handle any
write !!error.text
elsehandle none
-- Write out the compare summary
!!integratorSupportHandler.printSummary()
-- View the report unless running in non graphics mode
if (not istty) then
!file = object FILE('c:\mac\compareReport.xml')
if (!file.exists()) then
!!integrator.openreport()
endif
endif
endhandle
endif
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
378
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Diagrams
23.1 Ribbon User Interface in Diagrams
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Diagrams has been redesigned to use the ribbon user interface.
Benefits
More modern look and feel. Consistent with AVEVA Engineering.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
Note that any customisations made in UIC files need to be recreated using the Ribbon bar instead.
This can be done
For More Information
Refer to updates in the Diagrams User Guide.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Diagrams.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
379
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.2 View Datasheets in Diagrams
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Datasheets that are defined in AVEVA Engineering are viewable in AVEVA Diagrams, if the
engineering item is linked with the schematic item. They are only available as read-only.
Benefits
Better visibility of Engineering data in Diagrams.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Schematics / Diagrams / Work ing with Diagrams / Viewing Datasheets in
Diagrams.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Diagrams
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
380
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.3 Design Reuse for AVEVA Diagrams
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Design Reuse is now available for AVEVA Diagrams and AVEVA Engineering (AVEVA Marine only).
Benefits
Allows Engineering items to be copied between projects, including Datasheets and all
attributes
Allows one or many complete diagrams to be copied, together with all related schematics
data. Individual Schematic items can be copied, but the shape references need to be on a
whole diagram.
Saved transfer sets – the data can be saved, moved between machines, emailed and copied
between different locations
Works between different projects
Automatically resolves dependencies and referred items
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Schematics / Diagrams / Utilities / Design Reuse.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Diagrams, AVEVA Engineering
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
381
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
23.4 Secondary Shapes for Pipe and Instrument Lines
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Secondary shapes for Pipe and Instrument lines can now be created using Copy/Paste. Secondary
shapes will be a group that cannot be edited, except changing the layout .
Consistency Check will identify the need to refresh when the original has been changed.
Primary Shapes
Arrangement
Secondary Shapes
Arrangement
Benefits
Allows for more flexibility in the diagrams. An entire pipeline or parts of a pipeline can be represented
on a different diagram.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Schematics / Diagrams / Work ing with Diagrams / Primary/Secondary Shapes.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Diagrams
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
382
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
23.5 Customisable Drawing Grid in Diagrams
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Definable grid configuration by an XML file (griddef.xml)
Grid position available as a pseudo attributes (GRIDXPOS & GRIDYPOS)
Benefits
Can be used for shape annotation of for example Off-page connectors.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Schematics / Diagrams / Working with Diagrams / P&ID Grid Definition / P&ID
Grid Definition File.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Diagrams
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
383
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
23.6 Diagrams Rules (Configurable Consistency Check)
*12.1.SP3*
A new capability has been introduced in AVEVA Diagrams allowing the Consistency Check Rules to
be configured according to customer requirements and project standards. This development has been
combined with the existing Auto Formatting Rules, to form a new common function that is called
Diagrams Rules.
Using the new function, the Consistency Check Rules that were built -in to previous releases are now
available in an open format. This allows customers to modify or remove the in-built rules, and also to
add their own checking rules as required.
It is now also possible to set up the rules to be executed automatically, for example on connection of
shapes, or if so preferred, they can be still be executed manually as before, for example to allow
temporary inconsistencies.
Automatic Refresh
With previous releases, a Refresh command had to be executed to refresh the currently open drawing
with any updates that had been done directly to the database. For example, if the Command Line or
Attributes form was used to update the database, the Refresh command had to be executed to see
the updated data in the Diagrams Drawing.
A new automatic refresh function has been introduced in this release. This function triggers on
Database Events, and automatically updates the currently open drawing.
For some cases the Refresh Command will still need to be used, for example if changes have been
done in the database and the related drawing was not open at the time.
For More Information
See User Guide Diagrams / Work ing with Diagrams / Main GUI Components / Diagrams Rules .
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
384
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
23.7 Export of Diagrams Drawings in DGN Format
*12.1.SP3*
A new option has been added to export Diagrams drawings in the DGN format. This function is similar
to the existing DWG format export capability, but it has some format specific handling and settings.
For More Information
See User Guide Diagrams / Utilities / DGN Export.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
385
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
23.8 Batch Export of DWG and DGN Format Files
*12.1.SP3*
By using the Batch Job function, it is now possible to select a number of drawings and export them all
in one go, instead of processing them one-by-one.
For More Information
See User Guide Diagrams /Utilities / batch Job / Batch Update.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
386
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.9 Customization API for Diagrams
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP3*
A new Public Customization API has been added for the AVEVA Diagrams application. This adds to
the already great customization capabilities and will allow administrators and super-users to make
even more advanced customization through the new .NET API.
For More Information
See User Guide Diagrams / Appendices / Diagrams API.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
387
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
23.10
Explorer Enhancements
*12.1.SP3*
Explorer functionality has been extended to make the presentation of elements configurable by the
user. Now it is possible to decide if type should be shown before the element name in the node text
and also to select the nodes members that should be sorted by name. This can be set for each
explorer separately.
For more information
See User Guide Diagrams / Work ing with Diagrams / Main Gui Components / Possibility to sort
Explorer Items by name.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
388
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
23.11
Instrument Loop Creation Dialog
*12.1.SP3*
Description
It is possible to create SCLOOP element (and all derived UDET‘s) using a dialog that is available in
the P&ID menu:
Here you can:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
389
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
1.
Select the type that should be created from the drop down list. The list contains all UDETs
derived from SCLOOP. By default base SCLOOP type is set.
2.
Select the group in which the element should be created.
3.
Set the element name. It is also possible to use auto naming rules instead of typing it in
manually. To do this the ―Use autonaming‖ has to be checked. In the case this option is
disabled, please check your naming settings.
4.
Set attributes and UDAs. By default these values are taken from the session defaults.
Benefits
Possibility to set all attributes (including UDA) in the creation dialog.
Possibility to create any UDET that base on SCLOOP.
Possibility to use the auto-naming mechanism instead of manually entering the name.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Diagrams / Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID) / Instrumentation / Elements /
Schematic Loop (SCLOOP).
Affected Programs
Diagrams
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
390
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
23.12
Size of Imported Background Shape
*12.1.SP3*
Description
When importing a view from Marine Drafting he the basic position of view can be chosen in the import
options dialog. There are three possibilities:
Original
Center
Fit
After import, the view shape position is locked from modifying it. With this fix, each import ed view get
an extra right-click menu option called ―Lock‖. By default this is checked, so, user cannot move the
view. By unchecking it, the view can be flipped, moved, rotated and scaled
After editing the view, it can again be locked to avoid accidental modifications.
Please note that any items that are located on foreground page (like equipments etc) that had their
position set before view shape movement, will not be automatically updated automatically after view
has moved or resized. They will need to be manually refreshed.
For more information
See User Guide Diagrams / Work ing with Diagrams / Using Back ground Drawings / Intelligent
Back ground Page.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
391
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.13
Flipping Labels
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP2*
A new option has been introduced for label shapes – they can now be flipped automatically,
depending on the flow direction of the pipeline.
This can be used for example in KKS, to show flow direction as a flag, pointing in the flow direction.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
392
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.14
User Bulletin
Improved Copy/paste Capability
*12.1.SP2*
The capability of copying and pasting diagrams data between diagrams has been improved
substantially. In this release it is possible to copy any shape within a single diagrams and paste it into
another diagram, together with the entire database structure and all its attributes.
Copying can be done between diagrams in a single project, but also between different projects and
instances of AVEVA Diagrams.
When copying between projects it is possible to copy either according to the group structure in the
source project, which is then recreated in the destination project, or to paste the copied objects
according to the session defaults in the destination project.
When copying branches belonging to pipelines already existing in the destination project, a choice is
given whether to create the branches in existing pipelines or to create new pipelines for the copied
data.
Benefits
Allows for reuse of data within a project or between projects.
For More Information
See User Guide Diagrams / Work ing with Diagrams / Copying/Pasting Data
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
393
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.15
User Bulletin
Diagram Change Highlighting
Changes to schematic diagrams can now be highlighted in the Diagrams, Schematic Model Manager
and Tags modules, using a new Diagram Change Highlighting add-in. This add-in enables the
database changes between two database sessions to be viewed, using the AVEVA SVG Viewer to
highlight the changes in colour. It also provides a summary of the changes in the list below the two
viewer screens.
It can be accessed from the context menu of the Schematic Explorer:
Note: For this function fully to work with the data created by the Diagrams application, it requires that
SVG files are created for the relevant sessions. This is affected by the ―Keep session files‖ and
―Create SVG on Save Work‖ settings in Diagrams Options, as well as the possible use of the
―Release Diagram to 3D‖ button.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
394
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
For more information
Only noted here.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
395
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.16
Items
User Bulletin
Connection between Instrument and Process
It is now possible to use Instrument Relationship Shapes to connect Offline instruments or Actuators
to any valid process item. The connection point will be created automatically on the shape if
connection is possible, so the user will not have to create any additional ones beforehand.
However, connection points on in-line items that were designed for in-line flow connections cannot be
used for instrumentation connections.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
396
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.17
User Bulletin
Automatic Upgrade of Options Settings Files
The Diagrams Options files (DiagramsDefaultSettings.xml and DiagramsAttributePresentation.xml)
are now automatically upgraded from previous versions, so that existing project settings can be
preserved in the upgrade process while also gaining access to new settings and options introduced in
the latest version.
The process of upgrade relies on a proper placement of the file containing the options values from an
older version of diagrams. The proper place for the file is described in detail in the Diagrams User
Guide, in the DiagramsGetting StartedApplication SettingsDiagrams Options section. The
upgrade is fully automatic and executes upon application start. A report of the upgrade process,
containing descriptions and locations of the participant files and any problems that might have
occurred is available in the Diagrams Message Log.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
397
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.18
User Bulletin
Admin Settings vs. User Settings
It is now possible for customers to define and set up which settings should be Admin Settings and
which settings should be possible for regular users to change.
The administrative set has the same format as the current version of diagrams options store, but is
located at a location which is write protected for the user but read/write for administrators.
When an option in the administrative set has a ―ro‖ value of the access attribute (access=―ro‖), this
option‘s value will overwrite the value set in the user‘s options store, and the option wi ll be disabled
(greyed out) in the Diagrams Options dialogue.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
398
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.19
User Bulletin
Handling of Units in Annotations
With the release of AVEVA Hull and Outfitting 12.1, some changes and enhancements have been
made to the handling of Units.
In AVEVA Diagrams changes have been made to accommodate the new functionality and to allow
presentation of values with or without units in shape text and annotations.
Some attributes with numeric values are now dimensioned and have associated units. For example,
attribute PRESS of element of type SCPLIN currently has a dimension of type ―pressure‖ and can
have units of pressure (psi, bar, etc.). All attributes that are dimensioned have current session units.
If the current session unit for the dimension of pressure is psi, and the value of the attribute PRESS is
23psi, one can use [scplin.press] to use the value of the attribute in annotation: this will produce the
value of the attribute in the current units - ―23‖. If the units are desired, the ―.withunit‖ keyword can be
used - [scplin.press.withunit] will give the result in the annotation text as ―23psi‖.
The following screenshot shows annotation where the ―.withunit‖ keyword is used:
This shows the same annotation without using the ―.withunit‖ keyword:
For More Information
See User Guide Schematics / Diagrams / Appendices / Attribute Presentation Notation.
Affected Programs
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
399
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
AVEVA Diagrams
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
400
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.20
User Bulletin
Publish Diagrams Data to AVEVA NET
Description
This version of AVEVA Diagrams has new functionality to publish Diagrams data to AVEVA NET.
Publishing can be done on individual pages in a diagram. This will make the diagram and the
schematics data on the diagram available in AVEVA NET.
It is also possible to publish several diagrams using the Batch Job function, and also to publish the
diagrams while releasing the Diagrams data to 3D.
For More Information
See User Guide Schematics / Diagrams / Utilities / Publishing Data to AVEVA NET.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Diagrams
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
401
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
23.21
Automatic Line Breaks Depending on Line
Priority.
Support for line jumps has been introduced in the Auto Formatting Rules feature. Two new format
types have been added on the ‗Format to Assign‘ tab in the ‗Auto Formatting Rule Details‘ window:
Add line jumps – allows the user to specify the behaviour of the line when crossing another
line shape. It can be selected from a list of standard values:
Line jumps style – allows the user to specify the style of jump if the line is the one which
should break. It also can be selected from a list:
The new settings together allow the user to specify the behaviour of crossing lines depending on
defined conditions. If the settings are applied properly by rule, the result is visible on the drawing and
also appropriate values are shown for particular shapes on the tab in the Visio Format->Behaviour
dialog.
For More Information
See User Guide Schematics / Diagrams / Work ing with Diagrams / Auto Formatting Rules .
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
402
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.22
Viewer
User Bulletin
Improved Shape Annotation in Schematic Model
It is now possible to individually control the shape annotations for the element types in the Schematic
Model Viewer. The following settings can now be made using the options dialog in the Schematic
Model Viewer:
Display criteria for selection of shapes
Display text
Icon (.png file)
Stencil shape
For More Information
See User Guide Schematics / Diagrams / Schematic Model Viewer.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
403
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
23.23
Automatic Line Breaks Depending on Line
Priority.
Description
Previously Diagrams did not provide functionality to configure automatic line jumps with priorities
depending on attributes. To capture the requirement, support for line jumps has been introduced in
the Auto Formatting Rules feature. Two new format types have been added on the ‗Format to Assign‘
tab in the ‗Auto Formatting Rule Details‘ window:
Add line jumps – the setting allows to specify the behaviour of the line when crossing another
line shape. It can be selected from a list of standard values:
Line jumps style – allows to specify the style of jump if the line is the one which should break.
It also can be selected from a list:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
404
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
The new settings together allow specifying behaviour of crossing lines depending on defined
conditions. If the settings are applied properly by rule, the result is visible on the drawing and also
appropriate values are shown for particular shapes on the tab in the Visio Format->Behaviour dialog:
Benefits
Auto Formatting Rules functionality covers user needs in a better way.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Schematics / Diagrams / Work ing with Diagrams / Auto Formatting Rules
Affected Programs
Diagrams
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
405
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.24
Viewer
User Bulletin
Improved Shape Annotation in Schematic Model
Description
It is now possible to individually control the shape annotations for the element types in the Schematic
Model Viewer. The following settings can now be made using the options dialog in the Schematic
Model Viewer:
Display criteria for selection of shapes
Display text
Icon (.png file)
Stencil shape
Benefits
Enables the user to better control shape annotations in the Schematic Model Viewer.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Schematics / Diagrams / Schematic Model Viewer
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
406
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Affected Programs
Diagrams
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
407
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.25
User Bulletin
Split-Merge for SCBRAN
Description
Split-Merge functions for SCBRAN now available in Diagrams.
Join
To join two branches please select two valid connectors and execute the Join <LineType> Branch
option from toolbars or menus:
If join will not be possible the system will notify the user in the System Message log.
Split
To split branches use the ‗Branch splitter‘ symbol which works in the same way as ‗Line splitter‘.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
408
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Benefits
The possibility to join/split branches in simple way without using workarounds.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here..
Affected Programs
Diagrams
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
409
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.26
User Bulletin
Setting SCVALV GTYP to INST rather than VALV
Description
It is now possible to use INST as a GTYP on SCVALV elements instead of VALV, VTWA or VFWA
gtypes. To achieve this, the master shape must have the ‗Classify as Instrument (GTYPE=INST)‘
option checked on the Edit/Import master dialog.
When this option is checked in the master item, all SCVALV‘s that will be created from this master will
have GTYPE set to INST.
Changing existing items
1.
Changes on opened diagram
It is possible to change existing SCVALV gtyp from VALV, VTWA or VFWA to INST using the shape
context menu option ‗Replace Symbol‘.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
410
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
If your current item has a GTYP different to INST and you replace this shape with a master that have
the ‗Classify as Instrument‘ option checked, then after shape replace, the system will change GTYP
from the existing one to INST and give a warning message in the System Message Log. Of course
this can work the opposite way around. The system is able to change INST GTYP to VALV, VTWA or
VFWA.
2.
Batch changes
In case you have many diagrams and you want to update all items on all drawings you can use the
‗Update symbols according to master shapes‘ option from the Batch Job update:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
411
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Before you can use this option you have to modify the masters that were used to create valves by
checking/unchecking the ‗Classify as Instrument‘ check box. After that, you need to select it using the
dialog below:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
412
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
In case the system will change GTYP during this operation, a warning message will be displayed in
the batch job log.
Specification search during batch job:
If GTYP has been changed and existing item has valid SPRE attribute set then system will try to find
the new specification. The search algorithm is presented below:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
413
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
SCVALVE Item
Item has no SPCO set
before. Do nothing
Check if Item contains
valid SPRE
NO
YES
Give a warning that current
SPRE might be not valid
NO
Check in diagrams settings if
specification should be used.
and
Check if SPRE type is SPCO
YES
NO
Check if any SELE or SPEC
element asks about TYPE
YES
Find the element with TYPE question and start searching downstream looking for
new SPCO. The following criteria is considered during search:
The current SPCO does not
depends on GTYP.
Do nothing
o
o
For PPBO, TYPE and STYP questions the answer is taken from SCVALVE
directly.
For other questions, the default answer will be used (in case if there is only one
possible item to choice then this item will be taken). In case if above fails then
system will try find the answer for current question from existing SPEC
„Question-Answer path‖.
If no items fit to the answer then system put message in log that SPCO can not be
found. Otherwise system will continue search until it find correct SPCO. If SPCO is
found then the system warn the user about the SPRE change.
For More Information
See User Guide Diagrams / Utilities / Batch Job.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
414
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.27
User Bulletin
Changes to Upgrade Drawing Functionality.
Description
Previously after ‗Upgrade Drawing‘ was executed either automatically on open or manually from the
Tools menu it was not possible to cancel the operation. However, it was possible to close the drawing
before the upgrade was completed and this caused an exception.
Now a progress bar is shown during ‗Upgrade Drawing‘ and the operation can be safely cancelled:
Also, appropriate messages are added to the message log on operations start and cancel/finish:
Additionally, when ‗Upgrade Drawing‘ is called manually from the Tools menu, a status window
appears after the operation is completed:
or was stopped by the user:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
415
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
In case the user opens a drawing that is not updated to the current product version and the ‗Upgrade
drawing on Open‘ option is set to false, the following warning appears in the message log:
If the ‗Upgrade drawing on Open‘ is set to true, but for some reason the drawing cannot be opened
automatically, an appropriate error message is added to the message log:
Benefits
The ‗Upgrade Drawing‘ functionality works better and does not cause any errors.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Diagrams
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
416
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.28
User Bulletin
Linked Files Update
Description
New ways to update linked objects in a diagram.
Use Edit->Links… dialog
When a drawing that contains linked objects is active then the ‗Links…‘ option is active in the ‗Edit‘
menu. This option is hidden when a drawing has no linked objects.
Use ‗Update Diagrams‘ in batch job. (File->Batch Job…)
This option allows the user to update linked objects in many drawings in one go.
Benefits
Allows users to update and manage linked objects.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Diagrams
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
417
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.29
Style
User Bulletin
Possibility to Determine Connector Re-route
Description
It is possible to determine a connector re-route style for newly created lines. For HVAC, Pipe and
Instrument line types a special option called ‗Reroute‘ has been added. This option allows the settings
‗Never reroute‘ or ‗Use shape settings‘ for newly created connector lines. By default ‗Never reroute‘ is
selected. In case the ‗Use shape settings‘ is selected then Visio decides which setting will be used.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
418
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Benefits
Newly created ducts or tubes can have routing style set to ‗Never Reroute‘ by default.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Diagrams / Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams / Adding Parts to a Branch /
Dropping and Connecting.
Affected Programs
Diagrams
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
419
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.30
User Bulletin
Default Value of the Stencil in Batch Job
Description
To be able to set default values for all existing items that have been created from particular equipment
masters it is necessary to edit the equipment master and set the default value for the new UDA. Then
running the Batch Job with ‗Update attribute presentation settings‘ selected. The master that contains
the modified data must be selected.
Before starting the batch update it is necessary that ‗Allow individual shape settings to override
default settings‘ is checked for items that needs to be updated.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
420
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
If this setting is not checked, the default value of the new UDA will be taken from ‗Session Defaults‘.
If the system changes the database attribute, there will be detailed information in the batch job log.
Please note that the system will not set attribute value for items where a UDA was already defined in
shape data. If refresh is executed before the update then refresh will add any missing UDA to shape
data with a default value. Then the system detects it and will not set a default value to database.
Benefits
The possibility to update existing items about newly created attributes values using batch job.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
See User Guide Schematics /Diagrams / Utilities / Batch Job / Batch Update.
Affected Programs
Diagrams
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
421
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
23.31
Auto Hide Option for Shape Text for Short
Connectors
Description
Two new options have been introduced to keep diagrams nice and clean where text will be displayed
on connectors only when some criteria are met. The options described below are valid for pipelines,
instrument lines and HVAC lines.
Auto hide text by leg length.
This option allows to determine a minimum size for the tallest connector leg where text will be
visible. If the tallest leg of a connector will be shorter than the default then the text will be
automatically hidden and the system will notify about this in the System Message Log. It is
possible to use metric as well as imperial units to determine the distance value. To disable
this option, set it to 0 or just use blank.
Auto hide text by text fit
This option will hide the text on the connector in the case the tallest leg of this connector will
be shorter than the text that is currently displayed on it. If this happens the system will notify
this in the System Message Log.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
422
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Both options will work when the connector size is changed. This means that text on connectors will be
visible after you modify above options and accept changes. To make it work the connector size must
be changed.
To enable text that has become invisible because of these options, the ‗Show Text‘ option in the
Shape Context menu must be ticked.
Benefits
There is a possibility to hide text on connectors because of the connector leg length.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Only noted here.
Affected Programs
Diagrams
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
423
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
23.32
User Bulletin
Miscellaneous Minor Improvements
A number of further improvements have also been made to Diagrams for this release:
Area Shapes DB representation: A new Database Element Type (SCAREA) to represent
Area Shapes has been introduced. This allows data to be stored in the database related with
Area Shapes, allowing them, for instance, to represent rooms with related attributes and
properties.
Consistency Check Improvements: The Consistency Check function now detects further
issues that may exist with the objects on the diagram, such as bad references and
inconsistent use of fluid between connected pipelines.
Auto Formatting Rules Improvements: The ―Format to Assign‖ tab in the Rule Details
window now includes more options for format type; a number of UI enhancements have also
been made to the Auto Formatting Rules windows.
Diagram and Page References: Pseudo attributes that return references to the diagram(s)
and page(s) on which objects are shown have now been introduced for further types of
objects, for instance inline valves & fittings. This may help integration with other data sources
such as Instrumentation.
Fixed Shape Text and Label position: For tube & branch labels on Visio connectors, when
the option 'Use Control Handle' is set and the text of a line is positioned using this, the
position will be kept when the line is split by inserting a component. For all 2D shapes, there
is now a new ―Move label with 2D shapes‖ setting in the Annotations section in Diagrams
Options. This allows the user to have labels with a fixed position, for instance Equipment Data
Block labels that will not move when the equipment item itself is being moved.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
424
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
24.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Engineering
A new AVEVA Engineering product has been introduced with the release of AVEVA Plant and AVEVA
Marine 12.1. This new product includes a new Tags module as well as a new ENGIneering Dabacon
database type, designed and optimized for Engineering data. The Engineering product also includes
Schematic Model Manager, which is no longer sold as a separate product.
24.1 Project Breakdown Structure (PBS)
*12.1.SP4*
Description
1.
PBS for Engineering and Diagrams is a new and flexible way of structuring engineering
data, which can be completely customised to represent the way users want to navigate the
data. User defined PBS Templates are set up in Lexicon, where they can use PML
expressions or external .NET dll‘s to display engineering data.
2. Multiple PBS templates can be set up for different user roles, which can be managed by DICT
DB‘s & MDB‘s to display the appropriate data structure for the user.
Benefits
Allows for data to be organised in a logical way that is appropriate for the engineering workflow.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
425
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
For More Information
Refer to User Guides Lexicon / Project Break down Structure, Schematics / Diagrams / Work ing with
Diagrams / Main GUI Components / Project Break down Structure and Schematics / Tags / Project
Break down Structure.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Engineering, AVEVA Diagrams
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
426
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
24.2 DateTime Data Type
*12.1.SP4*
Description
UDA:s can now be defined as DateTime in Lexicon. In AVEVA Engineering, the lists will display a
date picker for DateTime attributes. The date and time format is displayed and entered according to
regional settings.
The column filters in Tags lists are specialised for DateTime attributes.
Benefits
Better handling of date and time.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Lexicon / Reference Manual / User Defined Attributes .
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
427
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Affected Programs
All modules can use DateTime UDA‘s. AVEVA Engineering has the filtering mechanism in the lists.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
428
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
24.3 Icons for Linked Items and Documents
*12.1.SP4*
Description
The List Manager now includes 4 default columns for: Datasheet, Linked Diagram, Linked 3D Object
and Linked Documents. An Icon will be displayed if a linked object exists
The icon can be clicked to open the related Viewer (for Diagram, 3D & Linked Documents) or the
Datasheet Editor. Empty cells in the Datasheet column can also be clicked to create a new datasheet
Benefits
Better visibility of linked items in lists.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Schematics / Tags / Create and Manage Lists.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Engineering
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
429
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
24.4 Sublists for Reference Attributes in Engineering
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Now possible to have Sublists for items referenced from main list or referring to main list
For example, the From and To of a Line List might refer to other Lines or Equipment, these
referenced items can now be shown as sublists.
Other sublist examples could include Loops/Instruments, Catalogue, Systems, Streams, Fluids etc.
It is also possible to create new items in the sublist (depending on user access rights). Reference
attributes will be updated accordingly.
From & To
Line List
Pipelines referred by From or To on the
selected item
Equipment items referred by From or To on
the selected item
Benefits
Allows for relevant data to be presented together in a comprehensive way .
Compatibility Constraints
None.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
430
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Schematics / Tags / Create and Manage Lists.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Engineering
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
431
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
24.5 Datasheets in AVEVA Engineering
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Datasheet instances can be created and edited in AVEVA Engineering. Data entered in mapped fields
in the datasheet will automatically be updated in the database. Datasheet instances are based on a
previously created Datasheet template (see below) and can be. revisioned.
Datasheets can be viewed read-only in AVEVA Diagrams if a schematic item is linked to the
engineering item.
Templates are set up in Lexicon using the Datasheet Template Editor. The templates are based on
Excel format, which allows for importing existing Excel templates and mapping attributes to the
database. It is possible to add free text fields on the datasheet templates that are not stored in the
database. User Defined Revision Schemas can be set up in Lexicon
Benefits
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
432
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Provides the user with the ability to create, revise, view, export and compare datasheets for tagged
items.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Schematics / Tags / Datasheets and Administration / Lexicon / User Guide /
Datasheets.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Engineering, AVEVA Diagrams, Lexicon
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
433
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
24.6 Datasheets Option in “Publish to AVEVA Net”
*12.1.SP4*
This document describes the steps to make the new 12.1.SP4 Datasheets option available in the
―Publish to AVEVA Net‖ configuration form for a project currently running 12.1.SP2 or SP3.
Please note this procedure is not required for a project that is created initially at 12.1.SP4.
For an SP2 or SP3 project, to enable the datasheet option in Publish to AVEVA Net, either carry out
these 3 steps or see the alternative approach that follows:
1.
Rename the old configuration file present in the project folder.
E.g. for the SAMPLE project rename the file AvevaNetExport ConfigA ddin.xml in the folder
%SAMDFLTS%\PublishToAvevaNet.
The AVEVA Net Gateway Setup checks for the configuration file in the project folder, and if it is not
found there, will copy the default file from %PDMSEXE%.
2.
Login to AVEVA Engineering Tags. Click on ―AVEVA Net Gateway Setup‖ menu in Admin Tab
and the datasheet option will be now available.
3.
Re-implement any customisations that had been implemented in the original file.
An alternative approach is to replicate the ―Reports‖ section under ―Tags‖ module in the
AvevaNetExportConfigAddin.xml file in the current project folder location.
After copying the ―Reports‖ section, change the configuration name from ―Reports‖ to ―Datasheets‖.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
434
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Change the name from “Reports” to “Datasheets” after copying this section
This would ensure that any changes made previously to the project configuration file are retained.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
435
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
24.7 Design Reuse for AVEVA Engineering
*12.1.SP4*
Description
Design reuse is now available for AVEVA Engineering (AVEVA Marine only).
Benefits
Allows Engineering items to be copied between projects, including Datasheets and all
attributes
Allows one or many complete diagrams to be copied, together with all related schematics
data. Individual Schematic items can be copied, but the shape references need to be on a
whole diagram.
Saved transfer sets – the data can be saved, moved between machines, emailed and copied
between different locations
Works between different projects
Automatically resolves dependencies and referred items
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Schematics / Diagrams / Utilities / Design Reuse.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Diagrams, AVEVA Engineering
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
436
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
24.8 Tags
The new Tags module provides an easy-to-use and powerful user interface for engineering users,
allowing them to work on Engineering Lists & Schedules and related data.
Some of the more prominent features and functions of the Tags module are as follows:
Easy-to-use User Interface: Familiar Microsoft Office 2010-like UI. See pictures overleaf.
List Editing: Grid-based editing of list data in the new ENGI database. List views can be set
up Project Wide by administrators. It is also possible for regular users to create and use their
own specialized layouts. This includes grouping/filtering and bulk editing capabilities.
Multi-discipline concurrent engineering: By using the new Distributed Attributes and
Database Views mechanisms, it is possible to allow true parallel work between different
disciplines, even on the same object.
Navigation: In addition to the list editing, it is also possible to navigate the engineering or
system hierarchy to find and edit individual items.
Data Management functions: A number of management functions such as Status Control,
Change Highlighting, Attribute History and Extracts are available to manage the lifecycles of
engineering objects.
Change Highlighting: It is possible to highlight and report on changes made by different
users and disciplines. This also includes highlighting of changes made in diagrams.
Diagram viewer: A built-in diagram viewer allows users to view and navigate P&IDs and
other schematics.
Compare & Update: Engineering data can be compared and updated against a number of
other AVEVA sources, such as Schematics, 3D, AVEVA Instrumentation etc. (see
Compare/Update). It is also possible to compare individual items of the same kind against
each other to find differences.
Excel Import/Export: Engineering data can be imported from external sources and exported
to external applications by using Excel Import/Export utilities.
AVEVA NET Integration: Engineering data can be exported to AVEVA NET
Reports: Project-quality formatted reports can be created direct from the Dabacon
databases. As Engineering is based on the same platform as the 3D and Schematics tools, it
is very easy to combine data from these sources into common reports.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
437
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
For full details of this important new module, please see the AVEVA Tags User Guide.
24.8.1 Admin Tab
The Tags module includes a new concept for administration. There is an ―Admin‖ tab in the ribbon bar
which is only available for users that are:
Free users (Like SYSTEM)
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
438
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Members of the TAGSADMIN team
Allocating users to the TAGSADMIN team allows superusers or department managers to perform
certain admin tasks in Tags / engineering, without them having to be free users.
24.8.2 Tag Deletion
In the new Tags module, data for a single tag can be distributed over multiple databases to allow for
different disciplines, possibly operating in different locations. For any tag, the data for each discipline
is stored on a separate object but presented as if on a single object. It is thus possible to delete a tag
but not have access to delete all of the distributed data, and this can result in orphan objects
remaining.
The Delete Tag Orphans.pmlmac macro (available from AVEVA Support Knowledge Base) can be
run in the Tags module to find and delete orphan objects. Please note that all relevant databases
should be current before running this macro (it contains a warning). It maintains a log of its results
including any errors where it is unable to delete an object. It may need to be run at different locations
to tidy up periodically.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
439
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
24.9 Schematic Model Manager
24.9.1 Use of units
Schematic Model Manager now uses the new units capabilities rather than its former specific units
functions. This means that imported data is automatically converted to the appropriate units chosen
for the project. In the Project Options dialogue, the Units tab has been removed.
The specific Units UDAs have been removed from the default file and will no longer be populated on
import. Users can choose to use them but will need to set them up as required.
The Attribute Type is no longer needed in the Attribute Mapping file, so has been removed from the
Attribute Mapping UI.
24.9.2 Units upgrade
Schematic data imported prior to 12.1 must be upgraded. A check is performed automatically on entry
to Schematic Model Manager and the user will be warned if an upgrade is required. The upgrade
process must be carefully considered by project administrators as it can affect multiple projects and
locations. Firstly, schematic data is scanned to identify changes required. Secondly, UDA definitions
are updated for the appropriate units. Thirdly, the changes identified are applied to the schematic
data.
Please refer to the Schematic Model Manager User Guide for full details of this process.
24.9.3 Change Highlighting in Diagram Changes in Diagrams may now be highlighted in
Diagrams, Schematic Model Manager and Tags, using a new Diagram Change Highlighting add-in.
Please see section in Diagrams chapter.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
440
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
24.10
User Bulletin
Tag Compare / Update
The new Compare/Update add-in application can integrate data between Design, Schematic and
Engineering databases, as well as data from AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical. It
enables populations of tagged objects such as equipment and line lists to be compared, updated and
linked between the data sources. Compare/Update supersedes the A VEVA Instrumentation Data
Update application and is available in several Design/Engineer modules: Design, Tags, Paragon,
Schematic Model Manager and Diagrams.
For More Information, please refer to the new Compare/Update User Guide.
24.10.1
Enhanced Compare/Update
*12.1.SP2*
Compare/Update in Tags has been improved to allow Engineering Data to be both source and target
for comparison. This allows one list of engineering objects to be compared against another.
A new configuration wizard will be delivered in a future service pack to fully support this capability. In
the meantime this capability can be provided only with specialist customisation.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
441
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
25.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Outfitting Module
25.1 Model Editor
25.1.1 Offset From Feature… option
This new option has been added to the popup menu for the following Model Editor modes:
Model Editor, Equipment Editing, Quick Pipe Routing and Pipe Component Modification.
Selecting it gives the user a form to specify the offset and then pick the relevant feature:
25.1.2 Structural primitives
Primitives owned by structural elements can now be edited in a similar way to Equipment Editing, with
a right click on the selected item.
Primitives owned by the following additional element types are affected:
STRU, SUBS, VOLM, SVOLM, PTRA, AREADE
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
442
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
25.2 Move, Drag Move and Plane Move Commands
The Piping, Equipment, HVAC and old cable tray application now have new positioning menus.
Structural move commands are unchanged.
The new forms provide a WRT gadget to allow direction to be specified in terms of a local co-ordinate
system. In addition, UNDO has been implemented for all move operations (i.e. when the Apply button
is clicked).
All picks are now EDG picks, replacing the old ID@ style picking. This allows most of the pick
functions to be replaced by a single EDG pick (i.e. screen, P-point, graphics and element picks can all
be done using standard EDG position picks.)
Note that many of the functions provided by these menu commands can also be achieved by using
the Model Editor and Pipe Route Editor.
25.2.1 Summary of Move, Drag Move and Plane Move options
The Move commands enable the user to move the Current Element (CE) in a given direction. CE can
be moved by a given distance in that direction or it can be moved to a position relative to another
element, or relative to a plane through a given position.
For piping and equipment, the Drag command moves a piping item, together with other components,
equipment and nozzles connected to it which form a constrained network.
The new form appears with four tabs:
The Distance tab moves an element a distance in a given direction.
The Through tab moves an element in a given direction until it reaches a point relative to a plane
perpendicular to the direction of movement through another point.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
443
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
The Clearance tab moves an element in a given direction so that its obstruction volume or a P-point
is a given clearance from another element. The clearance is measured in the same direction as the
direction of movement.
The Towards tab moves an element a given distance in a direction specified in terms of another
element.
For details, please refer to the Design Common Functionality User Guide.
25.3 Change highlighting and reversion
This development provides improvements in the management of change, including that resulting from
the use of extracts. These changes fall into four categories:
Enhanced sessions user interface to show the reason for each database session
Command syntax to revert an element, or hierarchy of elements, to a previous state
Improved Extract Data Control dialog to highlight extract changes
Model Changes Add-in to explore and highlight general changes to the model
There is a separate Comparison add-in – see section 24.9.3 – available from the Schematic Explorer
context menu. This can show changes related to diagram elements between two database sessions
or stamps and can use the SVG Viewer to highlight the changes in colour.
25.3.1 Enhanced User Interface for Sessions
Forms that display details of a database session now also include the reason for that the session. For
example, the database session form, accessed from Utilities > DB Listing, shows it thus:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
444
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Users can explore sessions containing an added element by selecting DB Changes or DB
Differences from the Control menu, and selecting Session in the ―Changes Since‖ radio button set.
25.3.2 Revert Elements Command
A new command can revert an element, or hierarchy of elements, to a previous state:
>- REVert -+- ELEment ---.
|
|
`- HIERarchy -+- <selele> -+- AT -----.
|
|
`- BEFore -+- <comparison> ->
where the <comparison> syntax is similar to that following the SINCE keyword in the
DIFFERENCE and OUTPUT CHANGES commands:
-->-+- <date/time> -+-----------------------.
|
|
|
|- LATEST ------|
|
|
|
|
|---------------+- EXTRACT -+-----------|
|
|
|
|
|- extno ---+
|
|
|
‘- extname -+
|
|
|
`- STAMP - <name> ----------------------+->
If the BEFORE option is used, the elements will be reverted to the state they had before the specified
session.
Examples:
REVERT HIER /EQUIP AT LATEST
reverts the element hierarchy rooted at /EQUIP to the latest saved session.
REVERT HIER /EQUIP BEFORE LATEST
reverts the hierarchy rooted at /EQUIP to the state it had before the latest saved
session.
REVERT ELE /E1301 AT 20:16 26 / 3 / 2010
reverts the single element /E1301 to the state it had on the given time and date
REVERT HIER /PIPES AT STAMP /StampMilestone7
reverts the hierarchy rooted at /PIPES to the state it had at the named stamp
REVERT HIER CE AT EXTRACT
reverts the hierarchy rooted at the current element to its state in the parent extract
The Revert command ensures that every element creation, include, reorder and deletion, and every
attribute change is allowed before proceeding. If any of these tests fail, for example due to legality
checks, read-only databases or DACs, then the entire revert operation is cancelled and the following
error is generated.
(43,615)
Cannot Revert elements. No changes have been made.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
445
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
In this case a series of warning messages is written to the console indicating the causes of the error,
for example:
DAC prevents deletion of element /DELETE_UDET_B
DAC prevents creation of element =15752/1363
DAC
prevents
modification
of
attribute
/MODIFY_B_VESS1
Built
on
element
Element locks do not prevent a Revert operation if those elements were unlocked in the previous
state.
Note that this command is not directly related to the REVERT <database name> command available in
Admin. This command allows an entire database to be reverted to the state it had at a previous
session.
25.3.3 Change Highlighting via Extract Data Control
The Extract Control dialog has been enhanced to highlight outstanding changes in a child extract in
the graphical view. It can also highlight changes introduced to a child extract by a refresh operation.
The highlighting is controlled and customised within a ―Change Highlighting‖ framebox, shown below.
When the ―Outstanding in Extract‖ checkbox is selected, all changed elements in the child extract that
have not yet been flushed or issued to the parent are highlighted if they appear in the current
graphical view. The Colour button allows selection of the change highlight colour using the standard
colour palette. The highlighting is cleared when the dialog is closed, or when a subsequent extract
operation is performed using the dialog. In the latter case the checkbox becomes unselected.
When the ―Introduced by Get All Changes‖ checkbox is selected, all elements that are changed by the
next Get All Changes action, or Flush or Issue actions if these include Get All Changes, are
highlighted if they appear in the current graphical view. The same highlighting colour is used as for
outstanding changes. The highlighting is cleared when the dialog is closed, or if the ―Outstanding in
Extract‖ checkbox is selected. In the latter case the ―Introduced by Get All Changes‖ checkbox
becomes unselected.
There is a subtlety to the Flush and Issue actions available in this dialog: these operations include an
extract refresh by default. The exception is in a Global project, where the parent extract is not primary.
In this case a refresh is not included in the operation. In order to clarify whether a refresh will occur as
part of a Flush or Issue action, an indication has been added to the dialog, as shown below:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
446
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
25.3.4 Change Highlighting via Model Changes Add-in
A new Add-in has been introduced to provide a general mechanism for exploring change and
highlighting changed elements in the 3D graphical view. The Model Changes Add-in is activated and
de-activated via menu option Query > DB Changes. This replaces the previous DB Changes option,
though this function is still available via Utilities > DB Listing: see below. The Add-in is shown in its
default layout below:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
447
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
The Model Changes Add-in has two vertically split panes. The top split contains a Design
Explorer; the lower split contains a tabbed pane and controls, as shown below:
Model Changes Add-in tabs and controls
The tabbed pane condenses the following displays (see over):
Model Timeline: every session for every Design database in the current MDB, ordered
chronologically.
Stamps: details of every stamp that records session numbers for all of the Design databases in the
MDB.
Element History: details of every database session in which the selected (current) element has
changed.
Key: static tree control with images, colour and text explaining annotation of changes in the Explorer.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
448
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Model Timeline pane
Element History pane
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
449
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Explorer Annotations Key pane
The Element History and Key panes are for information only; the Model Timeline and Stamps panes
allow selection of a session or stamp upon which to base the display of changes in the Explorer pane,
and optional highlighting of changes in the 3D view. Once a session or stamp is selected, changes
can be highlighted by clicking the Refresh button at the bottom left of the Add-in (see above).
Two modes of change reporting are supported, according to the current selection in the drop-down list
in the bottom right of the Add-in:
Only Changes At... shows only the changes that were made when the highlighted session was
created. This may have been a Savework or as the result of an extract operation, such as a flush or
refresh, as indicated by the Reason column in the Model Timeline table. Note that highlighting in the
Explorer pane and in the 3D view is always with reference to the current state of the model; it is
possible that no changes from a previous session will be visible, for example if all changes were
made to elements that have since been deleted.
All Changes Since... shows all changes that have been made in all databases in the MDB between,
but not including, the selected session or stamp, and the current state of the model. This does include
any unsaved changes. Note that for large models this change analysis can take some time.
When the Refresh button is clicked and the change analysis operation is complete the explorer tree is
updated with annotations which highlight the changed elements in detail. An example is shown
overleaf:
The annotations are as described in the Key pane; in this example, we can see that:
The World element and SITE element /ATEST are not themselves changed but have
changed descendants. This helps navigation to the changed parts of the element hierarchy;
ZONE element /ZONEEQUIP_FROM_A has member list changes only. Since no new or reordered elements are displayed, it can be inferred that all child elements have been removed;
CONE element /CHANGETYPE_UDET_CONE_A has been modified (its type has been
changed);
EQUI element /MOVE5_A_VESS1 has been moved from the child list of
/ZONEEQUIP_FROM_A into the child list of /ZONEEQUIP_TO_A;
EQUI element /CREATE_A_VESS1 has been created under ZONE element /ZONE1.EQUIP,
thereby changing its member list.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
450
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Annotated Explorer
Clicking the highlight checkbox at the bottom middle of the Add-in (see Model Changes Add-in tabs
and controls picture above) has an immediate effect on all 3D graphical views if changes are currently
displayed in the explorer tree. Any changed elements that have graphical representation and are in
the drawlist for any active view are highlighted in colour. This uses the same customisable colour
used by the ―Highlight element‖ function available via right-click menu in the standard Design Explorer
Add-in. Unchecking the checkbox returns the graphical display to normal colouring.
All panes of the Model Changes Add-in are updated and Explorer annotations and 3D graphical
highlighting are reset in the following circumstances:
further element changes
Savework, Getwork, and Refresh
User or MDB switch
Following any of these operations, the Refresh button must be clicked again in order to update the
change highlighting.
Former DB Changes Dialog
The functions of the Query > DB Changes dialog in earlier versions of Hull & Outfitting are still
available via Utilities > DB Listing. This dialog is very similar, the only difference being the initial
mode setting. This mode can be changed using the Control menu on the DB Listing dialog as shown
below:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
451
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
25.4 Enhanced attribute export to Review
The Export Attribute form, accessed from the Utilities menu, now allows the user various options to
specify the element(s) to be exported and to pick the export file name from standard file browser.
25.5 Weight and Centre of Gravity (CofG) form
The Within Area option has been removed from this form (Utilities > Mass Properties > Weight and
Centre of Gravity) as it depends on the INSIDE/OUTSIDE qualifier, which is not supported for these
mass properties.
25.6 DRAFT Explorer
The DRAFT Explorer may now be made accessible in Design; this is only useful if the Draft
databases are also made accessible in Admin!
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
452
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
25.7 AVEVA Mechanical Equipment Interface
It is now possible to export to a single STEP file by specifying a file name instead of a directory name,
e.g.
export file /c:\project\a345\pipe1.stp
Naming of exported items is unique within this file.
Note: It is still not possible to create a multi-level assembly hierarchy in a single STEP file.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
453
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
25.7.1 Tesselation Cache
*12.1.SP4*
Description
An option has been added to create a facetted approximation of the model data during the import and
to store it with the model.
The used tolerance should be in the interval 0.1mm and 20.0mm, default value is the arc tolerance.
When the default tolerance is changed and the approximation is no longer valid a facetted model with
the new tolerance will be created that replaces the stored one.
Benefits
Better performance
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Interfaces / Import Model / Graphical User Interface / Import.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Mechanical Equipment Interface - Import
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
454
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
25.7.2 Import Subequipments
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP4*
Description
It is now possible to import model data at the SUBE level. There are two new options:
Import every STEP file as Subequipment
Command line:
IMP <Root Directory or File Name> [TO <id>] AS SUBE [VALIDATE] [LOG <log filename>]
Import every STEP file as Equipment and when the file contains assemblies create an
additional Subequipment level
Command line:
IMP <Root Directory or File Name> [TO <id>] AS EQUI SUBEQUI [VALIDATE] [LOG <log
filename>]
Benefits
Improved structure of imported model data.
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Interfaces / Import Model / Graphical User Interface.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Mechanical Equipment Interface - Import
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
455
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
25.7.3 Import of Coordinate System Entities from STEP Files
*12.1.SP3*
Description
A STEP file may include coordinate system entities that specify locations and orientations in three dimensional space. Coordinate systems are normally used to define connection points, placement of
assemblies, or to define any other positions and orientations that the exporting system has decided to
include in the STEP file.
These coordinate systems entities are now imported and stored in the database together with the
imported geometry. Stored locations and orientations can be used directly or indirectly via P -points.
Benefits
These coordinate systems will make it much easier to position imported parts or to relate other design
items to them.
Compatibility Constraints
Coordinate system entities are not stored in the database until an optional upgrade is done. After this
upgrade, the database is no longer compatible with 12.1.SP2 or earlier versions.
For More Information
See User Guide Interfaces / Mechanical Equipment Interface
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Mechanical Equipment Interface
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
456
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
26.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Outfitting Design Applications
26.1 CSV Import Function *12.1.SP3*
CSV import function used at 12.1 as Equipment Import has been deployed across Piping, HVAC and
Cable Tray applications.
Import is found under the utilities menu in each application.
Import Equipment... has changed to Import Equipment Data...
and the following are added for the other disciplines.
Import Pipe Data...
Import Cable Tray Data...
Import HVAC Data...
Several other data validation checks are performed for the new application of the utility
For more information
See User Guide Equipment / Import Equipment Data.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
457
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
26.2 Equipment
26.2.1 Equipment Interface – Modification
The ability to modify imported mechanical equipment models in the form of creating and positioning
nozzles and design points has been added.
For more information
See User Guide Equipment / Create Equipment / Create Primitives.
26.2.2 Create Equipment Form
The Create>Equipment… form has been redesigned with several enhancements:
Equipment may be positioned using graphical picking
Attributes are input directly using the creation form rather than a sub-form
UNDO is available
The form is resizable
For details, please refer to the Equipment User Guide (Section 4).
26.3 Piping
26.3.1 Non-standard Pipe Connections
*12.1.SP4*
This new feature allows the addition of an additional connection to pipe components, enabling the
user to add tappings or boss connections at any point on a pipe for a wide variety of purposes such
as vents, drains, instrument connections.
The mechanism used is to position an extra ppoint (PIPCA), to which an additional branch is
connected, on a pipe component. (The PIPCA s stored in the database as a child of the component.)
The connection is created by clicking Create>Non-standard Branch Connection:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
458
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
This brings up a form enabling the user to create the connection and then either connect an existing
branch or create a new one:
For details, please see the Pipework Design User Guide.
26.3.2 New Pipe Fabrication Capabilities
*12.1.SP4*
New design tools comprise modelling extensions as well as checking and optimisation tools. It is then
possible to produce both fabrication & installation drawings. In addition, there are configurable output
tools for bending, welding & extrusion machines.
The new tools may be accessed from the main menu:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
459
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Extensive configuration capabilities enable the system to ensure that the machines selected are
capable of fabricating the pipes.
Where necessary, the system will suggest design changes in order to make fabrication possible – for
example a bend radius may need to be increased:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
460
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Some idea of the scope of the checking may be judged from the configuration options:
For details, please see the Pipework Design User Guide.
26.3.3 New Options in Spooler Create Menu
*12.1.SP3*
New options have been added to the Spooler Create menu to allow Spool Breaks to be added at the
arrive or leave ppoint of the current component.
This provides an alternate method of defining Spool Breaks to the Create Spool Break GUI interface
and removes the possibility of inadvertently creating single-component spools.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
461
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
26.3.4 New Dependent Spool Drawings Frame
User Bulletin
*12.1.SP3*
A Dependent Spool Drawings frame has been added to the Spooler Update/Number Spool Drawing
form in order to allow an update to be performed without affecting any dependent Spool Drawings.
The Align checkbox should be checked if the update is to align dependent Spool Drawings.
The checkbox replaces the 'Need to align dependent spool drawing. OK to continue?' message.
A newly created Spool Drawing will now have its SFLIMIT attribute set to PIPE rather than WORLD by
default.
26.3.5 Sloping piping
The data structure for piping includes two new concepts for better handling of slopes or falls:
An adaptive or ―wobbly‖ P-point that can accommodate a specified range of angles – this is
achieved by introducing a tolerance attribute OFFTOL on all types of P -point (in Paragon). A
PDIR pseudo-attribute defines the actual direction, which must be within the tolerance of the
nominal direction
A Slope element or SLOELE, in a Slope table or SLOTAB, that can be referenced by the
SLOREF of a SPEC, PIPE or BRANCH to specify default, minimum and maximum slope
The introduction of these new concepts has no effect on existing Cats & Specs or models. The new
features are used in Quick Pipe Routing and also for sloping existing orthogonal piping. The Paragon
GUI has been extended to cover Slope Tables.
The pipe creation form has an additional option for selecting from a list of slopes and the modify pipe
form has the same option for setting branch values. The older pipe and branch modification forms
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
462
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
have also been changed to include new options for slopes. Note: If the SLOREF attribute is set at
pipe level, it is automatically inherited by new branches.
The Model editor has been extensively revised to handle elbows (as well as bends) and the new P point options, as well as adding slope options to the menus. A new form can assist in applying a slope
to an existing pipe, including all the branches within it. To display it, navigate to an existing pipe and
select Modify>Pipe Slope...
For full details, please refer to the Piping User Guide.
26.3.6 Direct setting of Insulation Thickness & Material
This allows the piping designer to choose piping insulation of a given thickness and material rather
than setting the temperature and spec for automatic selection.
New sample insulation specifications are provided as a basis on which users can base company
and/or project insulation specifications.
26.3.7 Bending Machine NC Output
A new option Bending Machine NC Output… in the Utilities Menu allows users to save a file, which
contains the bending details of a specified list of pipe pieces. To use this, the current element must be
a Site, Zone, Pipe, Pipe Spool List (PSLIST), Pipe Spool (PSPOOL), Pipe Piece List (PPLIST), or a
Pipe Piece (PPIECE).
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
463
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
User Bulletin
464
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
This enables you to search for bent pipe pieces, filter them, and then create a report.
26.3.8 Improved production checks
The Pipe Production Checks can now use a user-defined pipe stock length as well as the bending
machine maximum material length (MML).
The Pipe Stock Length is set up in the Pipe Data Table (type PDAELE) using Paragon: the data
elements of that table now have a field PStLen for pipe stock length. It may be queried using q
PStLen on a pipe data table element. New Pseudo-attributes enable the pipe stock length of a
particular (implied) tube to be queried: q ATST for ‗Arrive Tube Stock Length‘ or q LTST for ‗Leave
Tube Stock Length‘.
The production checks perform two tests on each pipe piece:
Compare the pipe piece length with the stock length for that tube spec. If the piece is longer,
the test will fail regardless of bending requirements
Compare the pipe piece length with the maximum pipe length for the bending machine
assigned to this branch or pipe. If it exceeds the machine-defined value, the test will fail
These two tests will be performed in the order above and in addition to any other tests, such as wall
thickness, corrosion, etc. The user will be notified of the success or the reason for the failure.
26.3.9 Material search for Pipe Bending Machine setup
A Search button has been added to allow the user to search for the appropriate material (from all
SMTE in catalogue or |SOLI in the Property database, with Filters if required).
26.4 Structures
26.4.1 New Bent Panel
*12.1.SP4*
Description
When creating bent panels in Outfitting, a new element BPANEL can be used. The new element
supports operations like holes, fittings and subtraction of primitives to modify the outer contour.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
465
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
The Model Editor can be used to modify the shape of the trace line.
The interactive support to create or split this new element is implemented in the existing functions for
bent panels.
Benefits
Bent panel element now support all necessary operations
Compatibility Constraints
None.
For More Information
Refer to User Guide Structures / Structural Design / Bent Panels.
Affected Programs
AVEVA Marine Outfitting
26.4.2 Steelwork Connectivity Upgrade
The user interface for connecting structural elements has been improved in various places to use
event-driven graphics (EDG) interaction. In addition, several operations now also work on GENSEC
elements including curved members and UNDO is now available for some functions.
In particular, a Connect Ends? check box has been added to the form for creating Curved Section
GENSEC elements. This check box allows the user to specify whether they wish to connect the ends
if a suitable start or end point is selected.
Minor changes apply to creation of straight and curved members, connection and disconnection and
several operations related to joints. For details, please refer to the Structural User Guide.
When regenerating the support, e.g. by selecting a new template with a different steelwork section
specification, or creating by dimensions, pads will be regenerated if pads already exist before the
regeneration process if triggered. If the size of the steelwork sections is not modified then the same
pad will be used. If the steelwork section is modified then the pad size will be modified.
26.5 Hole Management Enhancements
The Hole Management Utility which creates and manages penetrations in panels has been improved,
by the addition of additional catalogue properties in the Pipework catalogue and HVAC penetration
components. The utility is available only in the Pipework and HVAC Designer applications and
accessed from the Hole Management Utilities toolbar.
To start the application, click the Hole Management Utility icon on the toolbar to display the Managed
Hole Utility window. The main utility form is divided into 4 sections – for the creation, merging,
modification of holes and utilities.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
466
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
For further details, please refer to chapter 4 Multi Disciplinary Penetration and Hole Management of
the Design Common Functionality guide.
26.5.1 Hole Management Enhancements
*12.1.SP4*
Hole management functions have been enhanced in PDMS 12.1.SP4. In addition to various defect
corrections, the changes consist of:
Improved support for managed penetrations through SCTN, GENSEC, STWALL and WALL
elements in PDMS Design. Managed fitting holes were not supported in these elements in
earlier versions of PDMS 12.1. Free hole penetrations remain unsupported in these elements.
Support for cable tray as a penetrating discipline, where the cable tray material forms a full
penetration, as for piping penetrations. This does not replace existing Cabling System hole
management, which is designed to handle cables (without cable tray) passing through
transition pieces.
Support for penetrations through FLOOR elements.
Support for free holes and fitting holes in FLOOR elements in the Walls & Floors Application.
Improved presentation of penetration validation errors in the hole management form.
Autonaming for penetrating marker (e.g. ATTA element) creation.
The MAS project has been updated to include penetration ATTA components for MDGLG, HDCTG
and SCTG cable tray specifications. Other cable tray catalogue data has not been exten ded to
include penetration ATTAs. MAS has also been extended to add very s imple fittings for floor
penetrations, and to make new hatches available to the steel panel Fitting Hole function.
For details, please refer to the Multi Disciplinary Penetration and Hole Management section of the
Design Common Functionality User Guide.
26.5.2 Create Holes
In the Clearance field, specify the clearance to apply to the penetrating item. This is not applied if the
software detects a clash with a pipework or HVAC component that has hole size properties.
Note: The clearance can be controlled by the component that passes through the panel if the
penetrating component has a Property AHDI (for circular) or AHX, AHY (for noncircular) in which case
these property values will control the clearance. For more information, refer to Configuration Hole
Management Data.
Click Auto penetrate CE to automatically create holes in panels in a selected structure.
The clash analysis can take a few minutes; a progress message and bar will be displayed. Once the
analysis has taken place, the Hole Association Manager window is displayed with the details of the
newly created virtual holes.
Note: The Hole Association Manager window is not displayed if no virtual holes are created.
If more than 30 virtual holes have been created, there will be a confirmation message to display the
Hole Association Manager window.
To create holes individually, click Create Hole. The user will be prompted to pick a panel, pipe or
HVAC branch that penetrates the selected panel. The creation of the hole is identical to the automatic
hole creation.
26.5.3 Merge Holes
Merged holes are individual holes merged together into a single hole. To merge holes, click Pick
holes; the user is prompted to pick a Managed Hole fitting to be combined into a single merged hole.
Note: A minimum of two holes must be picked.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
467
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Click Merge Holes, the software creates a merged hole containing the selected penetrations.
26.5.4 Modify (and Delete) Holes
Created holes can be modified, managed or deleted.
To modify a created hole, click Modify CE. The Hole Modification window is displayed, modify the
created hole as required, the Free Hole Boundary Editor can also be started from this window.
To manage created holes, from the Hole Association Manager window, select Managed Selected
Holes, the Hole Management - Definition window is displayed.
Use this window to add single or merged hole penetrations, define the hole type, penetrating
clearance, hole shape parameters, positioning and an option for the hole to revert to the catalogues
specifications.
To delete a created hole, the user is prompted to pick a hole. If the hole has no status it is deleted; if
the hole is Requested, the user will be prompted to confirm the deletion. If the hole is Approved,
deletion is not permitted.
26.5.5 Utilities
All panels within the volume of the selected pipe or HVAC can be added to the 3D view. To do this,
from the Utilities part of the Managed Hole Utility window, click Add Structure.
To view all pipe or HVAC elements within the volume of the selected structural panels, from the
Utilities part of the Managed Hole Utility window, click Add Pipe/HVAC.
To generate and define a report on selected holes, click Hole Report. The report can then be printed
or exported to Excel.
Managed hole reports
The Hole Association Filter enables the user to
specify which Managed Holes to list in the Report:
Current
Element
Holes
associated
with the
currently selected element only
Graphical
Selection
Holes associated with elements in
the current graphical selection
All Managed
Holes
Holes in the MDB
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
468
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Report Headings may be specified:
Discipline
Specify holes for all disciplines or a single one specified using the drop -down menu
Status
Specify holes at any Status or at a single Status option using the drop-down menu
Valid
Select all holes or only those that pass or fail the validation tests
Note: any option other than Not Checked may significantly slow down report
generation as all the validation tests will be run for every selected hole
Invalid
Include hole associations that have any bad references, invalid references or invalid
data
Panels
Select holes in panels
Apply Filter
Refreshes the Hole Report according to the element and filtering options selected
Note: It is necessary to select Headings required on the report before clicking on
Apply Filter because heading data is collected when filters are applied.
Report
Headings
Select headings required on the report from three categories: information about the
hole, information about the penetrated item and information about the penetrating item
Preview
Displays Managed Hole Report window
The Managed Hole Report window displays the specified report.
You can use grid column functions to sort and filter columns before printing or exporting the report.
Select Print Preview to view the report or select Export to Excel to export it.
Right click the Hole Associations list to display the following pop-up menu:
Navigate to
the Association, the penetrated or the penetrating item (sin gle selection
only)
Add to 3D view
Adds the selected holes and associated items
Remove from 3D view
Removes the selected holes and associated items
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
469
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Focus on Hole
Zooms the 3D view to centre on the selected hole and zoom in.
Clipping is applied if it is enabled (single selection only).
Export list to Excel
Exports the report grid to Excel
Print list
Shows a standard grid print preview for the report grid
26.5.6 Configuration of Hole Management Data
Additional hole size properties on piping and HVAC components are used to control automatic hole
dimensions. If these properties are not provided the system uses hole management default sizes (e.g.
OD for pipe holes).
Hole Management Design and Catalogue data configuration is as described in the Design Common
Functionality User Guide, with the addition of new data set properties on selected piping components.
The following properties are used to control automatic hole sizes.
Property Name
(DKEY)
Description
AHDI
Property specifying the diameter of the hole required for the component (a REAL
DISTANCE expression returning the hole diameter.)
The property is used if:
1.
It is associated with a piping or HVAC component that clashes with the
panel at the penetration. For example, this property may specify the outsid e
diameter of a COUP element that represents a penetration sleeve.
2.
It is associated with a FLAN component that is adjacent to a penetration
clash with pipe implied tube. This allows for a flange clearance hole to be
created.
If the AHDI property is applied, the Clearance value is ignored. If the AHDI
property is not applied, (Pipe OD + Clearance) is used to calculate the hole size.
AHX
Property specifying the X dimension of a rectangular hole required for the
component (a REAL DISTANCE expression.)
If the AHX property is applied, the Clearance value is ignored
If the AHX property is not applied, (Component width + Clearance) is used to
calculate the hole size
AHY
As for AHX, but specifies the Y or height dimension of the hole.
26.5.7 Hole Association Manager
The Hole Association Manager window is used to manage the tasks associated with holes.
The Hole Association Filter is used to select hole association(s) and structural elements to be
displayed.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
470
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Select the element, specify the filter criteria and structural elements, then select Apply Filter. The
selected hole associations will be displayed in the Hole Associations table.
If some of the hole associations fail, navigate to the hole and use hole management to modify the
penetration, then select Apply Filter from the Hole Association Manager window.
To add elements to be managed, select Add Current Element.
To remove the automatically created penetrations, select Reset, then Refresh.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
471
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Displaying Holes
The Hole Association Manager window can also be used to display selected holes in the 3D view.
Clipped Hole View
The Focus on Hole option can be used to zoom in on a selected hole and remove all other elements
from the 3D view. Make sure that the clipping and capping options are selected on the active 3D view.
From the Hole Associations table, right click to select a single hole and activate a popup menu. Select
Focus on Hole; this zooms to the selected hole and clips the surrounding background.
To return to the normal view, de-select the clipping and capping options or select a different view.
Show Tags
To show tags and a box surrounding a selection of holes in the associations list, check the Show
Tags box.
Translucent Penetrated
To emphasise the penetrated items selected in the associations list, check the Translucent
Penetrated box.
26.6 Penetration with Piping Component
This new pipe penetration function enables a component such as a watertight bulkhead seal,
modelled as a COUP, to be positioned on either side of the plate being penetrated. It can cope with
cases where the penetrating pipe is not orthogonal to the plate.
The component can be shown on pipe sketches and isometrics; Isodraft has been modified to add a
new SKEY CPCF and a penetration seal symbol. Please see section 26.11.7.
Full details are given in the Common Functionality User Guide: Chapter 4. Catalogue Requirements
are given in Section 4.2.13 Project Configuration for Hole Management.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
472
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
26.6.1 Creation of Penetration
Normally, a penetration ATTA element is created on the pipe to mark the location of a penetration. It
is possible to put a pipe component, representing a sleeve or penetration seal, at the penetration if
the piping catalogue is suitably configured. Pipe penetration components are modelled as COUP
elements.
When a penetration component is required, select From Pipe Spec in the Specification pull down,
and select Marker Type COUP.
The CHOOSE form is displayed showing the couplings available from the piping specification. Select
the required component and click the OK button.
Note: In the sample MAS project, an example of a pipe penetration component can be found in
category /MACB2OR.
The Hole Management – Definition form is displayed. If a suitably configured piping component is
selected, it can be placed on either side of the penetrated plate – an additional Flip Side button
appears on the form.
Click on the Flip Side button to place the piping component on the other side of the penetrated plate.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
473
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
The symbol for this component is represented on an isometric drawing as:
26.7 Standard Model Library
This new function, an early version of which was included in the Marine Outfitting Update
12.0.SP6.10, allows the user to capture multi-discipline design elements, store them in a library for reuse and then create any number of instances of them at any position in the model, as required.
It is accessed from a new Standard Model Library Manager form, accessed from the Utilities menu
and uses a Create Standard Model Library Item form; these vary somewhat dependent on whether
a user is a library manager or a general user.
The first form to appear is the Manager form, which can be used to browse the library and add items
to it:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
474
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
This creates a new element in a Library in the application data world (APPLDW) – the library item is
an APPLDA element in an APPDAR. A similar form is used to modify these items.
Libraries, Areas and Items are modified or deleted from a pop-up menu on the same form:
For full details, please refer to the Design Common Functionality User Guide manual.
26.8 Clash Utility enhancements
The Clash utility uses a new form, which shows all the options; it uses a grid gadget for filtering and
grouping and a 3D view of the clash with aid graphics. Simple clipping, navigation, reporting and
printing are also available.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
475
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
When the form is first shown, the current element is selected in the Check field. Users can change
this as they wish by typing any Design name or syntax such as ZONE. The element to be checked is
always named in this text box. The options available are:
Check Check the named element for Clashes
Check CE
Show the name of the current element and check it for Clashes
The Clashes are displayed in a grid, with the usual facilities for filtering, grouping etc:
The whole grid can be printed or saved to file by the RH popup menu options:
Print Preview
Save to Excel…
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
476
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
It is necessary to scroll the grid to the right to see all the information about the clash such as Position
There are also columns for the primary element that clashes or obstructs; any column can be dragged
in the grid to group rows, for example:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
477
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
The example groups all clashes per branch and then clashes against the same obstruction. This is a
common useful grouping so there is an option to set the default presentation.
Other options on this panel are covered by the standard DESCLASH defaults.
In addition to the DESCLASH options there are various other presentation defaults such as the View
background colour and options to display aid constructs to in the 3D view.
By default each clash is displayed in a clipped view; the clip box size can resized by direct input or a
slider bar above the view – or clipping can be switched off.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
478
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
When checking for clashes, the default obstruction is All; this mean that the element is checked for
clashes against everything in the MDB. In practice, it is perhaps more realistic to check for clashes
against specific obstructions. This is specified in the Obst ruction/Exclusions panel:
There are several options to help the user add to these lists:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
479
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Current Element
Pick Element
Current Selection
Current List
All
Remove removes any selected elements and Clear clears the entire list.
The application allows a limits volume to be set so that only clashes within these limits are reported. If
all values are zero then there are in effect no limits to the clash check. This can be reset using the
Clear button.
The volume box can displayed using the Display option:
To set limits the Position can be directly input or set using the options:
Current Element
Picked Elements
Defined by 2 Picks
Current Selection
Current List
The 3D view has all the expected functionality of a standard 3D view and can be Printed and Saved to
file by setting focus to the view and selecting from the View > Print Graphics… and Copy Image
options.
26.8.1 Reports
If a text report of the clashes is required this can be done by ticking the Export report to file toggle on
the Report panel. The report will be written to file each time a Check is performed
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
480
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Other Changes to the Application
The old Clasher settings forms from Settings>Clasher have been removed
The old Clasher form is removed but the Menu Utilities Clashes is still the same
26.9 Cable Design
A number of enhancements have been made. Of particular note is a new Manual Route Cable ‗task‘
that allows the user manually to create or modify a cable‘s route between its start and end references.
For details, please refer to the Cable Design User Guide.
26.9.1 Copy Cable
*12.1.SP2*
The Copy Cable form has been revised.
To copy a cable, select Create > Copy > Cable Elements from the main menu bar to display the Copy
Cable window.
26.9.2 Cable Tray Volume Converter
*12.1.SP2*
A new form enables the creation of Cableway branches from existing cable-trays.
The form allows the user to select an existing tray and create volumes with dimensions extracted from
the tray members. The user can select the zone for creation of the new elements and set some
cableway branch attributes using the same form.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
481
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
26.10
Multi-Discipline Supports
26.10.1
Cable Tray Supports
User Bulletin
MDS can now support the new cable tray CTRAY elements, as used in the Cable Design application.
A CTSUPP element is used instead of an ATTA.
‗Old‘ piping (BRAN) cable trays and CTRAY cable trays can be supported by the same cable tray
support using the Add Rack function as usual:
26.10.2
Automatic generation of pads
There is a new application default to turn the auto generation of pads on or off; the default is on.
If the setting is ‗on‘, pads are created when using a cursor based creation method (CURSOR or
CLEARANCE) with a PANEL or HPLATE element identified. The section type is checked and a
suitably shaped pad chosen, appropriate to the section type. For example, triangular shapes are used
for angle and square (rectangular) for flat bar.
A new ‗Modify pad size‘ button on the Modify Section form enables the user to change the dimensions
of an existing pad.
In Paragon, the default value for the Automatic Pads option can be set On or Off in the MDS Admin
Data form, under the top bar menu Modify > MDS Application Defaults…
26.10.3
Updating client project defaults
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
482
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
From time to time new or updated component standards will become available in the MDS catalogue.
Where users are maintaining their own application defaults databases, these changes will not be
immediately available because they need to be added to the database.
A new upgrade tool allows the MDS administrator to update existing standards or add new ones. This
is useful for users upgrading from a previous version of a project or continuing work on a project that
uses a copy of a previous version‘s MDS/APPDEFAULTS database.
The ‗Check MDS Application Defaults‘ tool is a new feature in the Utilities menu of the Paragon
module and is available to administrators who belong to team ‗CATADMIN‘. For details, please see
the Multi-Discipline Supports Administrator Guide.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
483
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
26.11
User Bulletin
Outfitting Piping Isometrics
There are several developments in Hull & Outfitting Isodraft version 12.1. For details, please refer to
the updated User and Reference Manuals.
26.11.1
New Output File Formats, Including PDF
Isometrics may now be produced in PDF, Image or EMF (Enhanced Windows Metafile) format. This is
achieved through an extension of the FILE command, for example:
FILE PDF /filename
These formats may also be selected from the Options form:
26.11.2
TrueType Fonts
TrueType fonts, as defined in Admin, may now be used on isometrics. The user can select the font
type for all the text on the isometric (including material description) by font number, e.g. TTFONT 5.
Examples:
TTFONT
TTFONT
TTFONT
TTFONT
TTFONT
OFF
ON
5
6
NONE
TrueType fonts are not used
Selected TrueType font is used
Times New Roman font as defined in Admin
Arial font as defined in Admin
TrueType fonts are not defined
TrueType fonts may also be selected from the Options form – see above.
Note: True type fonts may only be used when isometric output files are to be produced in DXF, PDF,
Image or EMF (Enhanced Windows Metafile) format.
26.11.3
Large Coordinates
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
484
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
ISODRAFT can now handle coordinates larger than other limits in Hull & Outfitting and show them on
the isometrics. Its limit is now 2,147,483,647,000 mm (approximately 2 million km).
It can also display large coordinates, such as those encountered when using coordinat es related to a
GPS datum, on the iso.
26.11.4
Additional Coordinate Formats
New commands and options on the Annotation Options GUI allow the user to specify format, units
and precision for coordinates on the iso:
COFORMAT
Selects the format for the coordinates output on isometrics:
USER
ENU
XYZ
SHIP
NUMB ERS
User-Defined using Alternative Texts (as before)
E, N, U format
X, Y, Z coordinates
Ship Reference system
Purely numeric
COUNITS
Selects units for the coordinates:
Command
MM
CM
METRE
FINCH
USFINCH
DECINCH
INCH
USINCH
Units
millimetres
centimetres
metres
feet and inches
feet and inches (US style)
decimal inches
fractional inches
fractional inches (US style)
Example
6263.48
626.348cm
6.26348m
20’6.19/32”
20’-6 19/32”
246.59”
246.19/32”
246 19/32”
CODECP
Selects the precision (number of decimal
coordinates:
0
1
places) for
DECINCH (Imperial decimal)
precision to nearest inch
precision to nearest 1/10 inch
COIMPP
Selects the precision for Imperial fractional coordinates:
FINCH
USFINCH
INCH
USINCH
26.11.5
(feet and inches)
(feet and inches - US style)
(fractional inches)
(fractional inches - US style)
Drawing Pipe Spool
This enables isometrics to be drawn of the PSPOOL elements stored in PIPEs under a PSLIST. This
is an alternative, used by pipe fabrication checking, to the SPOOL elements in the SPOOLER
database.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
485
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
26.11.6
User Bulletin
„North‟ Arrow Text
The text shown with the ‗North‘ arrow may be changed by means of the Alternative Text ATEXT(202).
The default is ‗N‘; If the User changes ATEXT(202) to ‗LP‘, the symbol will appear as:
26.11.7
Pipe Penetration Seal Symbol
This new user-definable symbol (SKEY CPCF) represents a Penetrating watertight piece modelled
using a COUP element – see section 26.6.
This is in addition to the similar user-definable SKEY CPWP used for a Penetrating piece.
For details, please see the ISODRAFT Reference Manual section 3.27 Symbol Key Reference Index.
26.11.8
Setting Units in Options files
Isodraft loads the current units setting when the user enters the module but has its own units for
defining bore and distance on Isometrics; these are built into the individual Isodraft options files.
There is no change are to the way that bore and distance units are output but changes have been
made to define the units required for some additional items.
Previous versions of Isodraft output units for Weight, Pressure and Temperature; these will be
interpreted in current units and converted to the correct output value. For example Pressure is stored
in Pascals but the user may require the equivalent in bar on the iso. To ensure this, the options file
needs to contain the required output settings.
This is done by adding a block of code for setting units at the end of the options fi le. Each time an Iso
is created, the options file is run as a macro so appending the correct units settings to this will ensure
that Isodraft enter the detailing process with the correct units settings loaded. The process of
modifying the option file will automatically append the current units so each option file can potentially
redefine the current units.
The standard option setting process is to select Options>Modify from the main Isodraft menu bar to
show the Modify Options form. After selecting an options file to modify, pick Dimensioning Options.
A new button (Other Unit Settings) on this form shows the Current Session Units form as in
Design:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
486
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
The units settings can be reset using this form and need to be activated using the Set … Unit button.
Clicking OK on the options form will save the current units setting into the current options file. Once
an options file has its own units settings, these will be loaded before generating isos or modifying the
file.
Notes:
Until an options file has been modified, the units displayed in the Current Session Units form
will be the current Design session units as on entry to Isodraft. When an options file has been
loaded, the units defined in the options file become current. Existing Options files will have no
unit definitions until they have been edited and saved.
Isodraft does not currently perform any units conversion for UDAs. Isodraft will output them in
database units.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
487
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
26.12
Future Considerations
26.12.1
Access platforms, Stairs and Ladders (ASL)
User Bulletin
The new application for Access platforms, Stairs and Ladders (ASL), released in 12.0, is being
improved to provide an excellent tool for stairs (single flight in the first release), ladders and
handrailing. The functionality to create platforms with the application is being removed and platforms
will be created using standard Beams & Columns and Panels & Plates functionality, possibly in
conjunction with the Standard Model Library utility.
The new application will, therefore, be known as Stairs, Ladders and Handrailing (SLH).
Until the new application is released the 12.0 ASL application is kept in the product as is .
The old Access platforms, Stairs and Ladders application (from Hull and Outfitting 11.6) is still
available, though it will be removed at a future release. It is available, hidden, at Hull and Outfitting 12
and can be reactivated by a simple edit to the PML file PDMSUI/des/addins/access. This file is all
commented out; activate all the code lines after the header and ensure that the application is shown
on the menu:
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
488
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
27.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Global
27.1 Global Server Version
Marine 12.1SP3 as well as Marine 12.1SP2 and PDMS 12.1SP2 are supported by Global Server
12.1SP2. A limitation in this version of Global Server is that it supports a 12.1SP3 project only if the
optional upgrade has not been applied. Please contact AVEVA support website
http://support.aveva.com if there is a need to apply the optional upgrade on a Marine 12.1SP3 Global
project.
Global Server 12.1SP3 will be released together with Marine 12.1SP3 hotfix 1. This Global Server
version can be used with 12.1SP2 as well as with 12.1SP3, independently if the optional upgrade has
been applied or not.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
489
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
27.2 Layout of Create/Modify Database Form *12.1.SP3*
The layout of Create/Modify database form is now improved. All propagation flags are now in a frame.
Propagation flags have been added (in a frame) to the Create Extract form, but are only active if the
extract is being created at the Hub from a local database.
The layout of Create Extract form has also been improved, and Working extracts have been removed
from the list of possible owning databases.
Attached are screen-shots of the new forms in both Global and standalone projects
A Hub user can now specify Propagation flags for Linked documents or Neutral format files when
creating a local extract database. For satellite extracts, these settings will be inherited from the
owning database.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
490
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
27.3 Global WCF
This option was introduced with Hull & Outfitting 12.0.SP6.6 to improve the security of all Global
communications. It is an alternative to the use of RPC which has been used in previous versions of
Global.
It provides an interface to the Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) as an alternative to
Remote Procedure Calls (RPC) for network communications. As a result, Global can now exploit the
security configurations provided by WCF, which is enabled and configured by modifying values in
XML configuration files.
The following security benefits are now available:
Transport Layer
o
Apply security to either the connection (ideal for connected networks), or individual
messages (ideal when sending messages over the internet)
Bindings
o
Determine the low level protocol used, BasicHTTP (textual, unsecured), wsHTTP
(textual, secured) or TCP (binary, faster, but cannot be validated)
o
Determines which ports to use for connections
Encryption
o
WCF provides many encryption algorithms to protect data en route
Encoding
o
Tied in with the binding, this determines how the message will be sent: text (slow),
binary (fast) or Message Transmission Optimisation Mechanism (MTOM) which will
send what it can in text, but will send binary data as binary (a combination of the
previous two)
Authentication
o
At the server side, the message is verified to be from a known source; at the client
side, the message is sent to a known receiver. Messages can authenticate against a
Windows account or via a certificate.
Message Validation
o
Ensure that messages meet a known format by comparing against a Schema
Full details are provided in the Global WCF Configuration Guide. Other Global manuals have also
been updated for 12.1.
27.4 Global Claim Commands
Global Claim (to an extract) commands issued from Hull & Outfitting now pass only if ALL claims
succeed. This is a change as in previous versions, where the Claim command would pass even when
some claims had failed.
The Running Global Projects manual has been updated with further details.
27.5 Global WCF Service Name
The Global WCF interface name has changed from that in 12.0.SP6. This affects the Global WCF
client and server Configuration files. The purpose of this is to force an interface change between
12.0.SP6 and 12.1 as the databases are not compatible.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
491
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
The name has changed from the unversioned name used in 12.0.SP6. This is reflected in the
endpoint definition within the configuration files GlobalWcfClient.config and
admindWCF.exe.config.
The Endpoint has changed from:
…/GlobalWcfServiceLib/GlobalWcfService
to:
…/GlobalWcfServiceLib/GlobalWcfService_11_1_201011
As a result the WSDL file is now renamed from:
aveva.globalservice.wsdl
to:
aveva.globalservice.11.1.2010.11.wsdl
The service contract is now:IGlobalWcfService_11_1_201011
The Endpoint has changed from:
…/GlobalWcfServiceLib/GlobalWcfService
to:
…/GlobalWcfServiceLib/GlobalWcfService_11_1_201011
The sample configuration files provided with Global 12.1 contain the new versioned names; however
if you wish to carry the 12.0.SP6 WCF configuration files forward to 12.1 you will need to change the
references above in both the GlobalWcfClient.config and admindWCF.exe.config
configuration files.
27.6 ADUUID Attribute Length
This attribute provides a UUID (Universal Unique Identifier) for the Global daemon. It is a string of
hexadecimal values (for example, 92e2714e-0a85-42b0-9d6a-100905aeffc0). Global will
not work if this attribute does not contain a valid UUID.
While reviewing all text attributes for Unicode, this one has been shortened to 40 characters; the
former length of 120 characters is far longer than the maximum possible value.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
492
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
28.
User Bulletin
AVEVA Catalogue & Specifications
A number of improvements have been made to the PARAGON module. The most significant are
listed below:
28.1 Model Settings
The Model Settings form has been updated. The most significant change is to allow the alteration of
catalogue parameters only.
Model settings can be altered by the Model View form as well as by the Model Settings form. In
addition to changing the catalogue parameters, the Model View from may change other parameters
based on a category‘s data set. For example, if the data set includes properties that define design
parameters, those design parameters in the model settings are set to the default property values from
the data set. If the ‗Only Update Catalogue Parameters‘ box is checked, the Model View form will not
update any model settings except those for catalogue parameters.
28.2 Parameterised Detail Text
The GUI will now accept Text Expressions in Detail Text fields: these must be entered as valid string
expressions beginning with ‗(‘ and ending with ‗)‘. If the expression is not specified in this way, the
Detail Text field will be treated as a simple string.
For details, please see section 4.1.15 Detail and Material Text in the Catalogues and Specifications
User Guide.
28.3 Structural Catalogue
28.3.1 Copy Button for Structural Catalogue
New Copy buttons have been added to the forms for creating structural geometry components and
Plines. These make it easy for the user to copy an existing element and then modify the expressions
rather than start from scratch. This approach is similar to that used for the Data Sets.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
493
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Details of the changes are given in the Catalogue & Specifications User Guide.
28.3.2 Creation of Structural Specs
In the Specification list form, available from menu Display > Specifications, there is now a button
Display Spec. Pressing this button brings up the Specification form as before except that the form
opens in Read Only mode. In this state the form UI changes slightly – the title includes [Read Only]
and changes the wording of two link buttons from Edit Spec Atts... and Edit CAT Atts... to Show
Spec Atts... and Show CAT Atts...
The Create menus in Steel Work and Equipment have had the Specification menu restored, moving
the Specification World entry down to a submenu next to Create Specification. The Modify menus
have had the Specification... entry restored.
When modifying specifications, some non-piping specifications cannot be altered by the form.
Attempting to modify such a specification will put the form into read only mode as described above.
This form allows you to access various tasks which administer all aspects of a new Specification. The
current version is primarily intended for use with piping specifications and may not always be suitable
for other specifications.
28.3.3 Raw Plates in CATA
The raw plate definition has been moved from the manufacturing database (MANU) to the catalogue
(CATA) in the Catalogue World. The raw plate elements are defined in Paragon using the PML script
HullDefineRawPlates. Input to the script is the file which previously was used to create the raw pl ates
in MANU. This change is beneficial for projects using Global.
28.3.4 Unknown Ref on NAREF reports an error
*12.1.SP2*
Catalogue Data consistency checking now includes SPRF elements.
The following warnings may be generated:
S 10 Sprf error: PSTR not set
S 20 Sprf error: Unknown ref for PSTR
S 30 Sprf error: NARE not set
S 40 Sprf error: Unknown ref for NARE
S 50 Sprf error: No plines set
S 60 Sprf error: Duplicate pline key NA
S 70 Sprf error: GSTR not set
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
494
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
S 80 Sprf error: Unknown ref for GSTR
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
495
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
29.
User Bulletin
Known Issues
29.1 Outstanding Faults and Issues
29.1.1 General Issues
Unicode Filenames
The use of ASCII (Basic Latin) filenames is recommended for two reasons: compatibility with other
systems and various specific issues which have yet to be resolved. This applies to some of the
systems to which PDMS is interfaced, and even to some of the interfaces where Hull & Outfitting
makes use of third party software such as output of DXF and DGN. PML Publisher does not currently
fully support Unicode filenames.
29.1.2 The Impact of the PML Form Layout Changes
*12.1.SP3*
Description
PML developers using the new Forms and Menues libraries, may discover unacceptable changes to
the layout of some existing forms. The fix for the layout changes is usually straight forward.
This document lists the available documentation. The continuation of this document, which can be
found in item KB4453 in the Knowledge Base, also extracts some important layout programming
guidelines and issues. It also tries to present some of the experience gained so far, which should help
developers to solve their layout problems.
For More Information
Key documents:
Software Customisation Guide: see particularly
CH15.2 Defining a Form
Ch17 Form Layout
17.2 Layout Modes
17.4 Positioning, Alignment and Size of Gadgets
17.5 Auto-placement
17.7.1 Set Size to the Positional Extent of a Previous Gadget
17.8 Intelligent Resizing
17.8.1 ANCHOR Attribute
Appendix B Converting a Form to VarChars and Layout Form.
Software Customisation Reference Manual: updated to match the Guide.
29.1.3 AVEVA Global
Global 12.1 does not fully support projects with spaces in their pathnames. Work is in hand to remove
this limitation but no definite release date is yet set.
The daemon will work when installed in C:\Program Files\ but there is a known issue, see below.
RPC Daemon cannot detect if a WCF daemon is already running for current location of the project.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
496
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
PDMS reports "(1,504) Unexpected error contacting Daemon - check versions match‖ when
missing global client dlls.
Element claims can be lost for distributed extracts if an issue fails. This can lead to the error
message ‗has been deleted in a later session‘.
The new Database Distribution allows a collection of DBs to be relocated to another location. If the
HUB daemon is down, the form will hang until all relocation commands have timed out.
Default Drawing files and Stencils are not propagated to location project on creating the new
location.
REMOTE CHECK will fail to run Standalone DICE if the daemon is installed in a folder which
contains spaces, partly due to the semi-colon delimiter.
29.1.4 New Reporting Add-in
This new feature has a number of known limitations at this release, which will be improved i n future
releases. These include:
Improving performance while running reports in batch mode
Background colour not exported in RTF format
Watermark fails to display in the report
No Copy / Cut / Paste available in table modifications
Changing the Zoom in the Report designer causes Report to crash – with Exception error
message, which you cannot close, making it hard to close Tags as Report Designer keeps
screen focus.
Some other limitations may be worked around as follows:
Drag and Drop of DBView Array Fields to Report Designer
This does not work at present; as an alternative, you can use an Array field in a report and place a
control which can be bound to a field on the report. By setting the Data Binding property of the control
it can be bound to an array field.
In the example below a Label has been placed in the Detail section of a report for binding to the array
field.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
497
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Quick Reporting – Handling of Grouping
Where grouping is applied in the search results grid, the group layout result will not be maintained
when a quick report is generated.
This is because:
This would lead to an inconsistency with quick reporting functionality in Instrumentation
Different layouts need to be maintained for use in the reporting tool for grouped and nongrouped quick reports
Note: To enable group sorting: right click on the search results grid column heading, selecting Enable
Group Sorting, and then dragging the column heading of the attribute you wish to group by into the
group area of the search results grid (see example below).
Use of Summary in Calculated Fields
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
498
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
Where a summary field is used in a report the results of this summary cannot be used in a calculated
field.
This has been identified as a future enhancement. A workaround is available.
Use of the Results of one Calculated Field in Another Calculated Field
It is not possible to use one calculated field in another calculated field.
This has been identified as a future enhancement. A workaround is available.
Not Possible to Hide Group Header Only
In the report designer, hiding a group header via the Group and Sort window also hides the group
footer. However, hiding the group footer still leaves the group header visible.
Workaround: To hide only the group header, assign the height as 0 to group header.
PageRange Property Ignored when the ExportMode Property is set to SingleFile
DevExpress recommends that the ExportMode should be set to any other value to resolve this issue.
AVEVA Net Gateway - Unicode Characters
The field list explorer will not display Unicode characters unless the respective language pack is
installed. The user can specify Arial Unicode font for reporting to display multi-byte characters in the
report, PDF, excel, etc. without installing the respective language pack.
Reporting Default Values in Cells
When a value is not found, the error text ―!Error‖ is given. In the UDA definition there is a default value
defined, which should be in the report.
Workaround: This workaround removes ―!Error‖ from the report field, and replaces it with empty
string.
Select the cell/label or control in report designer
Add the script for before print, select new when creating script for the first time.
Change the text from !Error to desired string as below:
Reporting Document Fails to Attach to the Mail
This occurs for PDF files only when you have a Unicode character in the filename; it does the save
but doesn‘t send it to Outlook. The workaround is to attach to email or right click the file to send it
manually
Quick Report exception thrown
Doing a quick report and then using the HTML VIEW tab throws an exception.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
499
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
This occurs only with a large number of columns, so the report cannot accommodate them within the
visible area.
Large length Reports fail to export at certain formats
A 509 page report exports as PDF, CSV and TEXT, but fails for all other formats. If you run the Excel
(XLS) export it warns you and says use (XLSX) but fails on doing so. It can export to the CSV version
that can then be loaded into Excel. Even if you select single page versions of the image export it fails.
Reporting output differs for different Excel formats
Exporting the output from Reporting, the data exported differs between XLS and XLSX. The XLSX
format creates #VALUE! (errors in the cells that are PDMS REFs in the DBViews); whereas the XLS
format creates the data correctly.
This issue arises because export to XLSX format considers the data in Value (object) mode by
default. The workaround is to use the Text export mode: please see below:
29.2 Corrections and Minor Enhancements
*12.1.SP2*
Corrections have been made for a number of defects, as reported by customers in support incidents.
Particular attention has been paid to some of the newer areas of the system, such as Schematics and
Cable Design. The most significant improvements are listed under their respective areas in this
document. Late changes and those made after the initial release will be listed on the appropriate
release letters.
12.1.SP2 also includes the corrections made in 12.0.SP6.31 and 12.1.1.1, with a few exceptions. In
general, Schematic 3D Integrator includes those in 12.0.SP6.30, with the exceptions listed below.
These and the defect fixes from 12.0.SP6.31 will be supplied in a future fix release:
P-40710: SCTUB shown yellow with differences on routing components message but no differences
reported
P-41424: Not matched SCFITT(TEE ) gets green icon
P-41743 (SI 39870): Branch TREF not set on Integrator build
P-41825: Integrator should not output messages about return refs from off page connectors
P-41851 (SI 40064): Build Several SCPLINs on Integrator cause error
P-41855 (SI 40064): Integrator "View diagram" form's preview check box should be off by default
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
500
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
This page left blank intentionally
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
501
AVEVA Marine 12.1.SP4
User Bulletin
© AVEVA Solutions Ltd., High Cross, Madingley Rd, Cambridge CB3 0HB, UK
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Ltd.
502
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising